<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Nsullivan</id>
	<title>makerhub - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Nsullivan"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/wiki/Special:Contributions/Nsullivan"/>
	<updated>2026-10-02T22:30:24Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.7</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Oscillating_Spindle_Sander&amp;diff=12049</id>
		<title>Oscillating Spindle Sander</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Oscillating_Spindle_Sander&amp;diff=12049"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:33:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Wood Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Wood&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Grizzly Industrial&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=G1071&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=1709690&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Spindle Sander.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Spindle Sander.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Oscillating Spindle Sander&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1204&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are several hazards you need to be aware of when using a spindle sander.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Never make contact with the rotating spindle. The sand paper is very aggressive and could cause serious injury.     &lt;br /&gt;
* The spindle is rotating at a high rate of speed and can grab your work piece.     &lt;br /&gt;
* Hold onto material firmly and keep it against the table.  This will help prevent the material from getting pulled out of your hands. If material catches on the spindle it can starts rotating quickly and create a dangerous situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Grizzly vertical spindle sander is for sanding curved surfaces square to the table.  The machine contains a 1HP motor and has 10 different sanding spindles ranging from 1/4&amp;quot; to 4&amp;quot; in diameter.  The cast iron table has an opening that provides clearance for the spindles to oscillate up and down. The oscillating action will give you a smooth sanded surface at 1725 RPM. The 4&amp;quot; dust port connects easily to any dust collector. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Exi3raTmaNQ}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Table Insert-''' A metal plate that covers the opening between the spindle and table.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Sanding Spindle-''' A metal shaft with a rubber section that supports a sand paper sleeve.  These come in a variety of sizes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:G1071_m.pdf|Oscillating Spindle Sander User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The spindle sander is normally used for sanding inside corners. There are various spindles that range from 1/4&amp;quot; to 4&amp;quot;. If you need to change out the spindle ask the supervisor on shift for assistance. Make sure the spindle taper is clean before installing a new spindle.  Only hand tighten the spindles during installation so they can be removed.  The spindle also oscillates up and down as it rotates to produce a smooth finish. The machine has an on/off power switch located on the control panel. Make sure the material you are cutting is free of all foreign objects. Do not sand materials that may have nails or screws as they will damage the drum and may cause injury to you. Also, if the material contains a loose knot it can break free and create a safety hazard. Do not sand plastics, rubber, metal or any other materials other than natural woods.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your material looks good, the next step is to make sure you have the appropriate spindle installed. You will also want to hook up the adjacent dust collector to the rear of the machine, make sure it is plugged in, and turned on. The dust collector must be used with the sander to help keep the dust out of the air. As you sand, it is imperative that you keep the material firmly against the table and gently push the material into the spindle to make the surface perpendicular to the table. Hold firmly onto the material as it could get pulled out of your hands. If you are sanding the inside of a circle and the material pulls out of your hands do not attempt to grab the spinning part. If you can safely reach the power switch shut off the machine and wait for the part to stop moving. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the sander is set up you are ready to work. Turn on the sander and gently push the material into the drum, making sure to keep your hands a safe distance from the spindle. Do not force material into the drum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the spindle sander and create a smooth radius. Remember to use the appropriate drum size. You will need to draw a guide line to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Inside Radius'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ensure that the material you are sanding is at least 4&amp;quot; long and no nails or foreign objects.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Sketch a radius onto your material using pencil.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Make sure the spindle in the machine fits the radius you have drawn.  If the spindle needs to be changed ask the supervisor on shift for help.     &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Connect the dust collector to the port on the back of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Turn on the power switch on the front of the sander and the dust collector.  Make sure nothing is making contact with sanding drum.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Gently feed the material into the sanding drum while firmly holding onto the material.  Keep your fingers away from the spinning drum.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Carefully remove material as you keep an eye on the reference line. Slowly remove material up to the line. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. When all of the material has been removed take the work piece off the table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Turn off the power switch for the sander and the dust collector. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Make sure to reset the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Wood Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*As sanding sleeves are used they will &amp;quot;gum up&amp;quot; with saw dust. If not removed, the saw dust will harden and reduce the life of the sanding sleeve.  As needed, a abrasive cleaner should be used on the sleeves.&lt;br /&gt;
*The taper end of the sanding spindles should be lubricated with a light oil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Waterjet_Cutter&amp;diff=12048</id>
		<title>Waterjet Cutter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Waterjet_Cutter&amp;diff=12048"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:32:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=OMAX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=ProtoMAX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=8100202&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1303&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:waterjet_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Waterjet Cutter Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:waterjet_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:waterjet_cutter_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The ProtoMax Waterjet Cutter&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Used for precision cutting of tough materials.&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has QR code=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet can be a very dangerous machine if not used properly so here are some important safety items to keep in mind. First, Jesus forgives, but 30,000 psi doesn't. So pay attention to these precautions and be safe while operating this machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEVER, EVER, EVER, EVER, EVER turn on the machine without first turning on the water!  You could destroy the machine...and your reputation.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you see water squirting out the side of the machine while running a cut, don't touch it!  It is the fountain of &amp;quot;Bye Bye Fingers.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Wear rubber gloves while dealing with the water in the tank.  The water in there is a nasty pool of bacteria and chemicals just waiting to crawl into your open wounds.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have true &amp;quot;talent&amp;quot; and manage to run the water jet while your hand is underneath it, you have the opportunity of going to the ER and taking with you a medical card that tells the doctors how to treat you so you don't die.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet Cutter is a machine that uses highly pressurized water with a flow of an abrasive material to perform computer controlled cuts on a wide variety of materials, including 1&amp;quot; steel. This is helpful for creating parts with intricate designs for car engines, mounting brackets, and decorative plates. Another benefit of the waterjet is that there is minimal temperature change during the process which makes it perfect for cutting temperature sensitive materials. Check out the video below to see the waterjet in action.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UE4Fz8v0Lms&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* Tool path - The path that the waterjet will follow when cutting out a part. This includes more than just the outline of the part because the waterjet must pierce through the material before performing a cut.&lt;br /&gt;
* ProtoMAX LAYOUT- This is the software used to set up a tool path for the water jet and can be found on the laptop that is used with the waterjet.&lt;br /&gt;
* MAKE - This is the software that directly communicates with the waterjet to perform a cut from a tool path. It can also be found on the waterjet's laptop. &lt;br /&gt;
* Holding posts - The adjustable aluminum rods that are used as mounts for the holding arms. &lt;br /&gt;
* Holding arms - These come in several sizes and are used to clamp the material in place while performing a cut. &lt;br /&gt;
* Abrasive - This is a sand like substance, in this case garnet, which is mixed with the water to improve cutting.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Mixing tube - The tip of the nozzle assemble which mixes the water and abrasive together.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== User Manuals ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Waterjet Cutter ProtoMAX Manual.pdf|Waterjet Cutter User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet cutter is an amazing tool that can be used on a wide variety of materials including 1&amp;quot; steel!  However, it is limited to a 12&amp;quot; by 12&amp;quot; cut area with a 1&amp;quot; thickness being its maximum. Make sure the waterjet cutter is capable of handling your part and your material before going through all of the setup procedures. Like cutting many other two dimensional cutting tools, the cutting process should begin with a DXF file created from Solidworks or a similar software. Once a DXF fie has been created it can then be used to create a tool path using ProtoMAX LAYOUT. The detailed steps to do do this can be found in the general procedure but the most important step is to ensure that the waterjet pierces the material outside of the part outline. After the tool path is created and the machine has been properly set up, the job can be posted to the MAKE software, which is installed on the waterjet's laptop computer, to perform the cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete knowledge of the waterjet, the student will design a part in ProtoMAX LAYOUT, create a tool path for the part, and then cut it out. As part of the process the student will also perform the correct set up and shut down procedures. The part for this demonstration can be found in the procedure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Part Design in ProtoMAX LAYOUT:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Open ProtoMAX LAYOUT. Your screen should look something like this. [[File:ProtoMAX_LAYOUT.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool from the &amp;quot;Draw&amp;quot; menu on the left of the screen and create a 2&amp;quot; square with a 1&amp;quot; square notch in the top right corner. To do this, click anywhere on the screen to start the first line. This will bring a popup &amp;quot;Specify Dimensions&amp;quot; box where you will enter 2 into the &amp;quot;Rise (dy)&amp;quot; box. This will create a 2&amp;quot; vertical line. Select the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool again at the top of the first line and enter 1 into the &amp;quot;Run (dx)&amp;quot; box. This will create a 1&amp;quot; horizontal line to the right. Repeat this process until the box looks like this. The last line at the bottom can by created by selecting both open edges with the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool. [[File:Basic_shape_of_box.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;quot;Circle&amp;quot; tool and choose the intersect option from the bottom of the screen. Click the top, left corner of the square and enter 0.5 for the diameter of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the circle using the &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; tool from the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; menu on the left of the screen (make sure to select the top and bottom of the circle). Next, select the &amp;quot;Move&amp;quot; tool from the left side of the screen and choose the &amp;quot;Intersect&amp;quot; option from the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the center of the circle where the corner of the square is and enter 0.5 and -0.5 for the &amp;quot;Run&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Rise&amp;quot; of the movement. Your screen should look something like this. [[File:Box_with_circle.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tool Paths''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the time, you will not be using ProtoMAX LAYOUT to design a part. Thankfully, this program can accept &amp;quot;.dxf&amp;quot; files, but you still have to create the tool paths. If using a &amp;quot;.dxf&amp;quot; file, import the file to skip the last section and start here to give it a tool path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before showing you how to create a tool path, there are a couple of things that you must keep in mind.  When the waterjet cuts it has a kerf which means it will take away some of the material it is cutting and you do not want it to be taking material away from your part. Instead, you want to remove material from the scrap that is not critical to the part's function and as a result the tool path must be created with this in mind. To do this, you must first keep in mind that the waterjet will always cut on the left side of the tool path lines. This changes based on the direction the nozzle is traveling; for example if the nozzle travels clockwise around a circle it will remove excess material outside of the circle and if it travels counterclockwise it will remove excess material from the inside of the circle. Because of this, you must control the direction that the nozzle will travel. For an outside cut, you want it to cut on the outside of the line to preserve the proper dimensions of the part. For and inside cut, you want the opposite of that. For a ring, you would want the nozzle to travel clockwise for the outside cut and counter-clockwise for the inside cut.  To control the direction of the nozzle, place lead-in and lead-out lines to specify the start or end of a cut and the cut direction. It is better to cut the inner bits first and then the outer bits last; and don't let the nozzle travel over any holes that are already cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Zoom in closer to the circle. Select the &amp;quot;Lead i/o&amp;quot; tool from the &amp;quot;Draw&amp;quot; menu on the left of the screen. Select the bottom edge of the circle and move the cursor upwards and click to create a lead in and out from the center of the circle. This will tell the waterjet to cut on the inside of the circle. Looking at this picture, you can see that one line is longer than the other. This longer line is the lead-in line. The nozzle will penetrate the material from the beginning of the long line and work its way down to the bottom of the circle. Once the nozzle hits the bottom, it will start counter-clockwise because the lead-in line is positioned at a slight angle to make counter-clockwise and easier direction than clockwise. This is how you tell the nozzle which direction to cut.[[File:Lead_i-o.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Next, place a &amp;quot;Lead i/o&amp;quot; near the bottom of the left wall on the square moving your cursor to the left and clicking to tell the machine to cut on the outside of the box.[[File:Lead_io2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool and connect the long, lead-in line of the box to the short, lead-out line of the circle. This is a traverse line telling the machine to move from the circle to the box after it has finished cutting the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use the line tool and click on the long, lead-in line for the circle.  Place the other end of the line so that it is at least 1/8&amp;quot; past both the left and bottom edge of the part. This will be the origin for the part and the cut. It should look something like this:[[File:Design_with_traverse_lines.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you get to decide the quality of each cut. Select the button at the bottom of your screen labeled &amp;quot;Quality&amp;quot;. You should see a range from 1 to 5, a Traverse, and Lead i/o. The range of 1 to 5 will change the machines cutting speed. The higher quality is 5 (slower) and the lowest quality is 1 (faster). Choose a quality of 5 for the circle by clicking &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; and then selecting every part of the circle. Do the same for the outer edge but with a quality of 1. Your part should look like this. Leave the traverse lines as green. This indicates where you don't want the machine to cut. [[File:Quality_lines.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Sometimes there are extra points or lines that are unnecessary. To remove these points, click &amp;quot;Clean&amp;quot;, click &amp;quot;start&amp;quot; on the popup window, and &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; on the second popup window. Doing this will insure a tidier cut.&lt;br /&gt;
# The last step is saving the file to be cut. Click &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; on the right of your screen. If you have not saved yet, this will ask you to save your drawing; do so. It will then bring you to a window asking you to &amp;quot;Pick Start&amp;quot;. Select end of the traverse line that you defined as the origin.&lt;br /&gt;
# A window will popup showing the tool path. Zoom in closer to your part and inspect where the tool path is. The program will display cuts as a thick red line. Make sure that these projected cut lines are on the proper side of the line that you specified. If all looks well, hit &amp;quot;save&amp;quot; on the bottom, left of your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Waterjet Operation :'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the water valve located on the wall behind the waterjet. It will be open when the handle is parallel to the water pipe. Be sure to only turn in on BEFORE powering the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
# Check the pressure gauge to verify that the water pressure is 40 psi or greater.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill the tank to the top of the metal ribs with the water hose on the right side of the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
# Check the garnet hopper. If it is low, fill it up.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the computer and plug in the USB.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the waterjet cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Zero the waterjet cutter head using MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Push the clear plastic hose into the hole located on the side of the nozzle. This hose is called the abrasive feed tube and is used to mix abrasive into the water.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the nozzle between two of the metal ribs, close the lid, and test the nozzle using MAKE. When closing the lid, the support bar on the right side of the lid must be lifted otherwise it will not close. There are two things that should be checked when performing the nozzle test. First, check that the water is flowing through the nozzle. This is necessary because the nozzle can get clogged. Second, check that there is abrasive flowing through plastic tube. It flows quickly but can be identified by a sparkling in the tube as it flows.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the lid, position the material in the machine, and clamp it down. To clamp down the material, first slip the clamping post into the slot on the crossbar and the twist clockwise to tighten it into place. Then slide the material clamp over the post and push down to tighten. Repeat this process with any other clamps that are needed to secure the material. The clamping system can be seen below.[[File:Waterjet_clamps.jpg|none|thumb|479x479px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Load the cut file into MAKE, select the material being cut, and enter its thickness.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the origin point for the machine in MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the nozzle over the material and adjust the height of the nozzle very carefully making sure the adjustment tool has enough room to wiggle up and down. Do this by loosening the knob on the side of the nozzle with one hand while holding the nozzle with the other. Be very careful not to drop the nozzle onto the material as it could be broken. Slide the adjustment tool, pictured below, under the nozzle and then carefully lower the nozzle onto it. Tighten the knob once the nozzle is positioned correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue to fill the tank with more water so that there is about 1/8&amp;quot; of water above the surface of the material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Execute a dry run using MAKE while ensuring that the nozzle will not collide with anything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the orange rubber cone down, run the cut. While the cut is running look for material excess floating up; pieces of cut material floating up and getting wedged between the nozzle and other material or clamps could cause a catastrophic failure. If you see any of these things, pause the cut and remove any obstructions before resuming.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Waterjet Shutdown:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the material and clamps from the work area. &lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the abrasive feed tube from the nozzle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the nozzle between two of the metal ribs and run a nozzle test to clear any remaining abrasive from the nozzle and prevent future clogging. Also known as purging the nozzle of garnet. &lt;br /&gt;
# Bring the nozzle back to its home position. &lt;br /&gt;
# Close MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Shut down the laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn off the waterjet. &lt;br /&gt;
# Push down on the drain tube to begin letting water out of the tank. Do not pull on the drain tube because it can pop off. &lt;br /&gt;
# Drain the tank till it is half full or less. While the water is draining, use the hose to wash off any abrasive in the work area or stuck to the side of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Close the lid. &lt;br /&gt;
# Close the water valve so that the handle is perpendicular to the pipe. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
====ProtoMAX Layout====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WaterJet_Error_Message.png|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different types of errors that can show up after you post &lt;br /&gt;
*Collision error&lt;br /&gt;
*Possible offsets to wrong side&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside radii is smaller than offset&lt;br /&gt;
If your program has a collision error, the paths are probably overlapping. try situating the i/o lines so that they do not overlap.&lt;br /&gt;
If your program has a possible offsets to wrong side error, it means it is cutting on the wrong side. One way to fix that is to change the lead in angle so that it leads into the direction you want to cut in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Water Jet Cutter====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few common issues you may run into when using the waterjet. First, there may be an issue reaching the proper water level for your material. This is caused by the drain tube on the right side of the tank being at the incorrect height and can be fixed by pushing the drain tube up or down to remove water or allow more to enter. Make sure to wear gloves when doing this to protect from bacteria and never pull on the tube because it can be pulled off. If the tube does pull off don't panic; wait for the water to drain low enough to push the tube back on and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another issue is that the abrasive may not be flowing through its tube when performing the nozzle test. If this is happening do not perform a cut until the abrasive if flowing properly. The first thing you should check is the abrasive tube. Make sure that it is completely pushed into the nozzle so that it can be pulled out of the hopper by the vacuum within the nozzle. If this does not fix the issue then there is most likely water in the hose and maybe even in the hopper which causes the abrasive to stick to the feed tube tube instead of flowing through properly. Remove the hopper splash guard, pull the feed tube out of the feed block, and then use an air hose to blow through the feed to clean out any moisture. These components can be seen in the image below. Sometimes the water will travel into the hopper itself and cause the abrasive to clump together. When this happens either wait a day for everything to dry out or carefully disassemble the hopper system and dry it out with the help of an ACE and the [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401434/nozzle-clog.htm?tocpath=MANUALS%7COPERATION%20GUIDE%7C_____11 user manual]. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Waterjet_Abrasive.jpg|none|thumb|799x799px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Water in the abrasive feed tube is most often caused by the nozzle being clogged. Unclogging the nozzle is a fairly intensive and delicate process and should be done with the help of an ACE.  Always reference the manufacturer's [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401434/nozzle-clog.htm?tocpath=MANUALS%7COPERATION%20GUIDE%7C_____11 nozzle clog procedure] for the complete process (video included). Before unclogging the nozzle, remove the yellow rubber cone and raise the nozzle as high as it can go while being careful not to let it drop onto the material. [[File:Waterjet_Nozzle.jpg|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Once this is done, use the included torque wrench to loosen the set screw holding the mixing tube (1) in place. Make sure to hold onto the tube when doing this so it does not drop out.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the tube and reinsert it upside down so that the pointed end is facing upward.&lt;br /&gt;
# Very carefully tighten the set screw to 15 in-lb using the torque wrench. The torque wrench will click when 15 in-lb is reached but it is very faint so tighten slowly or the entire tube will be crushed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Run a nozzle test using MAKE and make sure water is flowing through the tube. &lt;br /&gt;
# Using the torque wrench, carefully remove the mixing tube and reinsert it in its proper position with the pointed end facing down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the yellow rubber cone and then run a nozzle test to check that the clog is gone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet has several items that need to be maintained by the student or the ACE. Please refer to the table below to see each procedure and how often it should occur. The details of each procedure can be found below as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Completion&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General washing&lt;br /&gt;
|After each use &lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Change pump oil&lt;br /&gt;
|After first 50 hrs of use and every subsequent 500 hrs of use &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Change water filter &lt;br /&gt;
|When the filter gauge approaches 25 psi or lower while the pump is running&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Remove material from tank bottom&lt;br /&gt;
|Whenever garnet abrasive reaches the bottom of the garnet collection bins or when excessive water turbulence is noticed during cutting&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace table slats &lt;br /&gt;
|Rotate monthly or more frequently if needed; replace when excessively scored and no longer stable&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate x-y axis &lt;br /&gt;
|After 500 cutting hours or if squeaking&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace nozzle filter &lt;br /&gt;
|After approximately 80 cutting hours or more frequently if needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Rotate mixing tube&lt;br /&gt;
|Rotate 90 degrees (one quarter turn) every 8 hours of cutting to even out wear&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# General washing - This consists of washing off any abrasive from the inside of the machine into the bottom of the tank using the water hose, including the lid. &lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the pump oil click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/change-pump-oil.htm?tocpath=MANUALS%7CMAINTENANCE%20GUIDE%7CPump%20Maintenance%7C_____2 here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the water filter click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/change-water-filter.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on cleaning the tank click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/clean-catcher-tank.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the table slats click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/change-water-filter.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on lubricating the y axis click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/lube-y-lead-screw.htm here] or [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/lube-x-lead-screw.htm here] for the x axis.&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the nozzle filter click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/replace-nozzle-filter.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# To rotate the mixing tube, first loosen the set screw with the torque wrench while holding the tube in the other hand. Twist the tube a quarter turn and make sure it is pressed all the way up so that it is seated properly. Tighten the set screw with the torque wrench set to 15 in-lb while looking out for the faint click which signifies the proper tightness. Make sure to set the torque wrench to 0 when finished.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=TIG_Welder&amp;diff=12047</id>
		<title>TIG Welder</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=TIG_Welder&amp;diff=12047"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:32:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Welding Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make= Miller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Syncrowave 250DX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=MJ430071L&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:TIG welder.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc= Tig Welder&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Syncrowave 250 DX TR.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc= Miller 250 DX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1270&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't exceed gas pressure past specified value&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't weld with gas off&lt;br /&gt;
* Always use a welding helmet and proper PPE  &lt;br /&gt;
* Don't weld in wet gear or standing water&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't unscrew regulator adjusting screw all the way out&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure ground clamp is connected to work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
TIG stands for tungsten inert gas and is technically called gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW). The process uses a tungsten electrode located in a hand held torch that delivers the current to the welding arc. The tungsten and weld puddle are shielded and cooled with argon gas. A filler rod is used to manually add material to the weld puddle. During the welding process the tungsten should never touch the work piece. When this happens you will need to remove the tungsten and regrind the tip. Depending on the material being welded, TIG welding can be performed using either AC or DC current. Some of the advantages of this type of welding include strong high quality welds and many material options. One disadvantages of TIG welding is the speed is much slower compared to some of the other welding methods. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of TIG welding and some good basic information.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IfJG4cMhIOc&amp;amp;list=PLhEXQudI6XCS3Rev1aaEwy0n4-68YdNTe&amp;amp;index=14&amp;amp;t=0s}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?list=RDCMUCTRI9Us8zLiywY29vsW3kKg&amp;amp;v=tNYmo2_DI6c&amp;amp;feature=emb_rel_end}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KvI0177YgrA}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:O359H MIL.pdf|TIG Welder User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Squarewave technology was developed by Miller Electric in 1976 to improve your weld quality and make TIG (tungsten inert gas) welding easier. Miller Squarewave technology provides arc stability when welding aluminum, prevents arc rectification and eliminates tungsten erosion.&lt;br /&gt;
*CFH-Cubic Feet Per Hour&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Balance control-The balance control is adjustable to provide additional oxide removal (more cleaning) or less cleaning based on the condition of the material being welded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Syncro Start-This allows the choice of Soft, Standard or Hot TIG starts based on the application, lead lengths and tungsten size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Digital welding meters-Display both amperage and voltage for viewing of the actual and preset values for greater accuracy and repeatability in your welding procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Last procedure recall-Simplifies changing your Syncrowave back and forth from aluminum TIG to stainless TIG to Stick welding. One switch makes all the control panel changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Adaptive Hot Start-Stick welding features such as Adaptive Hot Start™ provide good arc strikes without sticking. Once welding, the DIG control makes dynamic adjustments to the welder to ensure smooth E7018 and deep penetration E6010.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some general setup rules of thumb:  &lt;br /&gt;
*The CFH gas setting should be roughly 2x the weld cup size.  If you were to use a #7 cup the gas flow should be set to 14 CFH.&lt;br /&gt;
*The tungsten stick-out from the cup should be no more than the cup diameter.  Using a #7 cup would allow for a maximum tungsten stick-out of 7/16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The demonstration consists of two parts.  For the first part you will need to setup the welder and safely attempt to weld a bead.  The second part will require you to show knowledge of safely using the grinder and successfully grind a point on a tungsten rod.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Place the fume hood over the area you will be welding &lt;br /&gt;
# Select electrode that is adequate for your application of material&lt;br /&gt;
# Grind electrode to a point. (This gives a smaller and more directed arc)&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert the electrode into the collet of the torch&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach ground clamp to table (ensure ground contact surface is clean)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the adjusting screw on the tank regulator is loose (Do not unscrew all the way)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open cylinder valve all the way&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the adjusting screw (clockwise) to increase flow to 15 CFH.  The gas will only flow after the pedal is depressed and will stop after the post-flow time has been reached. &lt;br /&gt;
# Identify material type, and thickness that is going to be welded&lt;br /&gt;
# Refer to TIG welding chart for specified adjustments, specific to your application&lt;br /&gt;
# Clean material to remove any oxidizing and or oil residue&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the welder and adjust----------&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the electrode in your dominant hand (ensure it can move freely)&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold electrode about an 1/8 inch away from the metal&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the foot pedal to control the voltage, start off with the foot pedal half way down to start a puddle on the material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once a puddle is started let off the foot pedal to maintain a steady puddle without burning through the material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the puddle is formed, dab the filler rod into the puddle&lt;br /&gt;
# Moving along the material, walk the electrode back and forth across the puddle while dabbing the filler into the pool&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Shutting down:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Close gas cylinder valve&lt;br /&gt;
*Back out adjusting screw on regulator (Do Not unscrew all the way)&lt;br /&gt;
*Turn off the welder&lt;br /&gt;
*Remove ground clamp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Welding Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*No arc or weak arc:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check that the machine is powered on and set to the correct mode.&lt;br /&gt;
**Inspect torch connections, cables, and work clamp for tightness and damage.&lt;br /&gt;
**Verify correct electrode type, size, and that it’s sharpened properly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Porosity in welds:&lt;br /&gt;
**Ensure proper shielding gas flow and check for leaks in hoses or fittings.&lt;br /&gt;
**Keep tungsten electrode clean and free of contamination.&lt;br /&gt;
**Avoid drafts that disturb the shielding gas.&lt;br /&gt;
*Tungsten sticking to workpiece:&lt;br /&gt;
**Maintain correct arc length (keep tungsten slightly above the workpiece).&lt;br /&gt;
**Check polarity settings and use proper tungsten type for material.&lt;br /&gt;
*Overheating torch or cables:&lt;br /&gt;
**Reduce amperage or duty cycle; allow cooling breaks.&lt;br /&gt;
**Inspect cables and torch for damage or poor connections.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inconsistent or wandering arc:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check gas flow rate and nozzle cleanliness.&lt;br /&gt;
**Ensure tungsten is properly sharpened and aligned.&lt;br /&gt;
**Verify correct polarity and current settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*Excessive spatter (rare in TIG but possible with AC on aluminum):&lt;br /&gt;
**Check machine settings and electrode exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
**Clean workpiece thoroughly before welding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The welding torch and cables should be inspected on a regular basis. Look for any signs of cracking or cuts in the cables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Check Argon Tank Pressure &lt;br /&gt;
|Before Use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student/Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Check Coolant Flow&lt;br /&gt;
|Before Use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspect collet &amp;amp; Cup&lt;br /&gt;
|Before Use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student/Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_400&amp;diff=12046</id>
		<title>Speedy 400</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_400&amp;diff=12046"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:31:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is laser cutter equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Trotec&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Speedy 400&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=S4-2209 / 01422-11690 &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Speedy400_Laser.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Laser Engraver Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:laser_cutter_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Speedy 400.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Trotec Speedy 400 Laser Engraver&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1212&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has view license key=0009999KWTSZCF9F &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has activation license key=00099992K2C69A5B&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Trotec Speedy 400 laser engraver is used to engrave and cut materials based on specified images and shapes.  The working area of the laser is 40&amp;quot; x 24&amp;quot;. This is useful for making enclosures out of acrylic, engraving designs into many materials, creating trophies, and cutting any two dimensional shape out of a variety of materials. It also has a rotary attachment which enables cylindrical objects such as drinking glasses and hydro flasks to be engraved with detailed designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QCwJ8xWRpIE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
The Speedy 400 uses the same software and general setup as the Speedy 300, however it has a larger bed and a few backend setting differences. Should be able to train on either the 300 or 400 and use both machines. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Currently, the Speedy 400 should not be used for acrylic**. There are some issues with settings/airflow that cause acrylic to often catch fire while cutting (which, as you would imagine, is bad)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
** If you know what you are doing and are very careful, small (&amp;lt;10 inches) pieces of 1/4&amp;quot; or 1/8&amp;quot; acrylic allow for sufficient airflow to avoid catching fire. Small pieces of 1/2&amp;quot; acrylic can often work as well, as long as you are careful. If the fumes light fire while cutting, pause the print IMMEDIATELY (the same button as start), or, if needed, stop it entirely (although this will abort the cut and you will not be able to continue). Often pausing allows the fire to go out and the acrylic to cool down, so for small cuts you may be able to continue, carefully, after pausing. If you must cut large sheets of acrylic, remove the paper from the area you are cutting, as close to the size of your cut as possible. Although it is not the paper that is burning, removing it seems to reduce the possibility of fire. Try not to remove any more paper than absolutely necessary, as the paper keeps the acrylic clean and protected from scratches when in the stock pile.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Inkscape - The program you will be using to design is Inkscape. It allows you to type in words, edit logos, make your own logos and such to engrave or cut out of your material.&lt;br /&gt;
* Trotec Ruby - The program that interacts with the laser cutter to perform a cut. Trotec Ruby lets you set up/create Material Profiles, change between the HoneyComb Table and the Rotary tool (mostly used for Hydroflasks), and choose a location to cut on your material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Focusing tool - Used to focus the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Stroke - This is the type of line that should be used when cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Repeat Cut Line - Can be used in JobControl to reproduce the same cut line that was just cut. &lt;br /&gt;
* Outline Job - Can be used in JobControl to trace the job that is going to be cut to show where job extends. &lt;br /&gt;
* Bitmap - Representation of an image as bits of information (pixels); used to allow logos/stencils to be changed into colors. &lt;br /&gt;
* Vector - Representation of an image as shapes, rather than bits; used to allow logos/stencils to be modified as objects. &lt;br /&gt;
* Trace Bitmap - Can be used on a bitmap to to turn it into a vector. &lt;br /&gt;
* Honeycomb Table - This is the honeycomb shaped metal tray that holds flat material during a cut. It is used for most cut jobs.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Rotary Tool - When engraving water bottles or glasses, this accessory is used to hold the object in place as well as rotate it while performing a cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Material Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:TrotecMaterials 2022.09.07 10.58.14.xml|Speedy 400 Material Settings 7 SEP 2022]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Manuals====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:JobControl-Manual-EN.pdf|Job Control Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:Speedy-400-Manual-EN.pdf|Speedy 400 Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing a cut or engrave with the laser will always begin with Inkscape by opening/importing an image, pdf, DXF, or similar file. If you do not have a file yet then it can also be used to create geometries. When you use SolidWorks to generate a .dxf file the correct face must be selected prior to saving the file. Once a file has been brought into Inkscape, it must be adjusted so that Trotec Ruby can distinguish between what should be cut out of the material and what should be engraved. A cut is indicated by a hairline red stroke (in the RGB color scheme) and an engrave is indicated by the color black. After the graphic is prepared, it is transferred to Trotec Ruby by dragging and dropping the .dxf file into Trotec. Then you need to go under the design tab. The you should see what you want to be cut/engraved on the screen with the correct corresponding colors. Once this is done go under the prepare tab. All you need to do is to click the proper material that you will be using. DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS WITHOUT TALKING TO A SUPERVISOR FIRST. Finally, go under the produce tab and start the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, import a George Fox logo into Inkscape and set it up so that the logo is an engrave with a cut circle surrounding it. Once this is done, print the job to Trotec Ruby and run the job on a piece of scrap material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:trotec_laser_engraving.mp4|thumb|none|400px|This video shows the complete process of completing an engrave. See below for details on doing this. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Setting up a Job&lt;br /&gt;
## First off, to get your design, just copy an image and paste it into Inkscape or find a pdf version of the file and open it. If you are cutting a part from a Solidworks file it must be saved as a dxf before importing to Inkscape.&lt;br /&gt;
## To open a dxf file go to [File] &amp;gt; [Import]. If a dxf file is being used feel free to skip to step 7.&lt;br /&gt;
## Measure the size of your material, and set the page in Inkscape to those dimensions. You can alter the dimensions of the page you are putting the image on by selecting [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties], and even the width (W) and height (H) image itself in the top. If you want to keep the image dimensions consistent, but just scale it down, click the lock button between these dimensions. If you want to make your own design using text, squares, circles, etc, you can find everything you need in the column on the far left of the client.[[File:...gfuLogo.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Once you have your design, we need to alter the colors a little bit so the Laser Cutter can understand what you want it to do. It goes like this: a red stroke will cut, and anything that is black will engrave. A stroke is merely an option that outlines the object you select.&lt;br /&gt;
##In order to do this, we need to split up the image into different pieces. This is called vectoring, where it will divide the image into different pieces based on shapes and color. Just select the logo, right click, and select Trace Bitmap. You will be given options shown in the picture below. For this application,we want to separate the colors from each other, so we select the Colors option. The number of scans you have selected will define how closely the vector output will replicate the actual photo (the bitmap) or how many colors you want the vector to tape. Since this is a simple logo and we have 3 colors/shades to take, 3 scans will be enough. If the detail is not good enough, try the other options and have some fun. Once this process is finished, the vector will appear directly on top of the original image, so make sure to drag it off and separate the two before beginning.[[File:...traceBitmap.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Since there are a few separate parts to this vector, it is possible to break apart these and alter the image however you want. Select the image, right click and go to Ungroup. Now you can mess with each individual part! You can take either of these designs and delete them, essentially they will cut out and engrave the same design. Let's go with the one on the right. [[File:...separateParts.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Now we can manipulate the colors. Select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Fill and Stroke] (usually it will already be open on the right sidebar). You will see Fill, Stroke Paint, and Stroke Style on the top right. Fill changes the color of a piece, Stroke Paint changes the color of a stroke, and Stroke Style changes the thickness and style of a stroke. You will see values for R, G, and B, where all colors can be made using these. When each color has a 0 next to it, it will be fully black. When the red has a 255 next to it and the others have 0, it will be fully red. Make sure you check these bit values before continuing, since the machine is set to cutting material ONLY when it sees 255, 0, 0, and it will engrave material ONLY when it sees 0, 0, 0. Everything else, make it white, which is 255, 255, 255. Be sure to make each a Flat Color so that the color is constant throughout the entire object.[[File:...Stroke.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Once you have finished your design, it’s time to send it to the Laser Cutter! Hit print, make sure it is sending to Trotec Engraver but do not click [OK] yet.  &lt;br /&gt;
## Select [Preferences] to open the engraver properties. You will want to make sure the [Minimize to Job size] option is NOT selected and that the [Height] - [Width] values match the page size selected in Inkscape. DO NOT have [Enhanced Geometries} selected because it causes the curved parts of your design to be unrecognized once it is uploaded to the Trotec Ruby.[[File:...printing.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Then you can save these settings by selecting the button that shows the JC logo near the bottom of the Printing Preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
## Select Print to send the design to Trotec Ruby.&lt;br /&gt;
# Setting up the Laser Cutter&lt;br /&gt;
## Turn on the machine using the power switch located on the back of the machine in the left corner. The machine will go through a startup procedure where the cutting bed lowers and the laser travels to its home position. Note that the lid must be closed for the startup procedure to begin and there will be some beeping coming from the machine which is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
## Place your material onto the honeycomb table, preferably in the upper left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
## Now it’s time to focus the laser onto your material. Begin by moving the laser head over the middle of your material; then place the focusing tool on the laser head and slowly raise the table until the the focusing tool falls off. Raise the bed extra slow when reaching the focusing tool so the bed can be stopped the moment the tool falls off. Reference the images below for proper focusing tool placement and laser head controls.[[File:Laser Focus Tool.png|none|thumb|404x404px| Proper placement of the focusing tool. ]][[File:Laser Controls.png|none|thumb|296x296px| Laser control pad. (1) Raise and lower the bed. (2) Move the laser head (5) Air assist. Make sure it is always on to vent fumes properly.   ]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Remove the focusing tool and return it to its home.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cutting with Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
There are four tasks you will need to complete in order to cut/engrave using Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
## First, you need to get the image from inkscape into Trotec Ruby. This can be done by simply downloading the file and dropping it into Trotec Ruby. &lt;br /&gt;
## Second, you will click onto the design tab. All you need to do is verify that everything is the correct color that you need and everything looks fine. Once completed. Click on the blue &amp;quot;Create Job&amp;quot; button. This will allow you to move on. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex1.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Third, you will need to prepare your cut/engrave. To do this you will need to align the laser with where you want to cut by dragging the grey square box. Then you need to select the material that you will be using to cut/engrave. DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM SUPERVISOR. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Finally, to produce the image press the &amp;quot;Push to Laser&amp;quot; button, this will open the next tab&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex4.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## To start the cut/engrave just press the play button. Remember to RESET THE SPACE once your cut/engrave is don't and not to leave any material in the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
* Always make sure the material you are using is safe to use. There is an especially high risk when engraving plastics. Fumes from plastics can be toxic. Make sure you find the specific material you are using and check to see if it produces toxic fumes when burned. Never attempt to engrave PVC as it produces chlorine gas (the stuff they used in WWI).&lt;br /&gt;
* Once the laser is focused do not touch the button that raises the bed or the laser will crash into the machine which causes damage to the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
* Be careful when moving the laser head when using the rotary tool because it has protruding parts that will harm the laser cutter if a crash occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep an eye on active cuts because fires can be started when cutting wood or acrylic with paper covering.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you feel unsure about anything located in the laser cutting procedure make sure to consult the supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut List==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved Materials===&lt;br /&gt;
* Acrylic&lt;br /&gt;
* Wood&lt;br /&gt;
* Vegetable tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
* Paper / Cardstock&lt;br /&gt;
* Cardboard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DO NOT CUT===&lt;br /&gt;
* Any plastics containing PVC (polyvinyl chloride)&lt;br /&gt;
* Chrome tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to cut a material not listed here, please talk with the Maker Hub staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - Laser Cutters (Speedy 300/400) Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}} (this module satisfies requirements for both the Speedy 300 and the Speedy 400). The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
'''First of all, check your export settings'''&lt;br /&gt;
* There are multiple combinations of settings that will work for export; which means that depending on who was using the machine last, settings may be different. These are the settings I (the ace) have found to work most consistantly: Set your Inkscape document to square by going to File &amp;gt; Document Properties (or press Ctl+Shift+D) and set both the Height and Width fields to the same value, bigger than your shape. Why this is an issue is yet unknown, Inkscape just doesn’t like exporting non-square documents with the other settings to follow. Print the document with File &amp;gt; Print or Ctl+P. Click preferences and check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “image mode” is set to “color.” These settings will fix most common issues.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not being made'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Some export settings may be incorrect. Verify that your settings are set to those described above. These settings will fix most issues of lines not cutting. &lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that all stokes are set to red with a stroke width between 1pt and .25pt (.25pt recommended) &lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that your print is entirely within the canvas of Inkscape. &lt;br /&gt;
* In Preferences, within Print options, verify “image mode” is set to “color.” Otherwise, your red stokes will not be read as color, and not be seen by the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The cuts did not go all the way through the material'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Are you using the correct material profile? If not, rest the job (described below) and repeat the cut with the correct material profile. If it appears that the cut went partway through the material you may want to use a setting that is less powerful than your material would normally use (again, described below) &lt;br /&gt;
* You should always place your material in a corner. This way, if the cuts do not go all the way through you can reposition it easily. DO NOT MOVE THE JOB in JobControl! If you put the material in a corner, should be able to place the material back where it was, and then reset the job in JobControl by right clicking on the job in JobControl and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Next, run the cut again on the smallest thickness setting for your material. For example, if you are cutting 1/4 inch acrylic and it does not cut all the way through, repeat the cut with the 1/8 inch acrylic setting. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser went really fast leaving a sort of light engrave rather than a cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
* You did not select the correct material, and the job ran with the ‘standard’ setting. DO NOT MOVE THE MATERIAL! You can reset the job by right clicking on the job in Trotec Ruby and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Then, select the correct material in the upper left dropdown menu and run the job again. This way you do not need to reposition the material or job, which you will almost never do perfectly. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser repeated the cut multiple times'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Some material profiles, such as half-inch, acrylic are set to repeat the cut line multiple times, as to get a cleaner product. If the cuts look good, this is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
* Are you importing from SolidWorks?  For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The acrylic is melted or blackened'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that you are using the correct material profile. If you are, for example, cutting 1/4 acrylic with the 1/2 setting, the acrylic will be melted and not give clean cuts. &lt;br /&gt;
* Are you importing from SolidWorks? As mentioned above, “''For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.”''&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not clean'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Is the machine focused properly for your material? If you’re not sure, or even if you are (you may have bumped the bed control buttons accidentally) refocus it. &lt;br /&gt;
* Check the lens for dust because this can interfere with the laser. If it is dirty, see the maintenance section on how to clean it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The material is being cut in unintended places''' &lt;br /&gt;
* Check your Inkscape file and make sure there are no red stokes in places you did not want&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure there are no other jobs on the work area (grey rectangles in the honeycomb area of Trotec Ruby). If there are, drag them back into the list on the right side or delete them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To keep the laser cutter running and cutting smoothly, the mirror and lens should be periodically cleaned. This is on top of the general cleaning that should be done to keep the machine dust and scrap free. There are also filters in the exhaust system that must be changed once the activated carbon has been used up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General cleaning &lt;br /&gt;
|As needed after a cut&lt;br /&gt;
|Student &lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Mirror &lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Lens &lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Change Filters &lt;br /&gt;
|When filter usage reaches 100%&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# The honeycomb should be removed and the metal bed itself should be should be swept/cleaned more or less daily. Cleaners are available to help in this process. Green is general cleaning use this for the bed and metal surfaces. Blue is glass cleaner, use this for the plexiglass surfaces. The front door of the Speedy 300 may be removed using the spring loaded pin on the right to remove cut pieces stuck in the door. The air vents at the rear of the machine should be kept clean of debris. Clean in a manner similar to the bed.&lt;br /&gt;
# The lense, mirror, and cone should be inspected daily or more often as needed, especially after wood or other “dusty”/”smokey” materials are cut. The lense will need cleaning when particles are visible on the surface (hold up to light if need be). The lense may be removed using the threaded nut below the lense (see photo). First use the air bulb to blow any dust off of the lense, prior to cleaning with the lense paper and cleaner available in the kit (lasercutter drawer) on both sides. Put some cleaner on the lense and gently rub the paper over the surface of the lense. The cone itself threads into the assembly below the lense nut. The cone may be cleaned with a paper towel and water or another cleaning agent. The mirror should be inspected and cleaned in the same manner as the lense.&lt;br /&gt;
# See above.&lt;br /&gt;
# The air filter to the right of the Speedy 300 will occasionally need maintenance. The most common issue is a full pre-filter. This will be indicated on the filter itself by poor airflow/suction. When replacing this, use a face mask and gloves (close the lab when doing this). Open the top of the air filter with the large 10mm hex wrench in the kit. Remove the prefilter and place it in a bag for disposal. Insert a new prefilter and close the lid. Pre-filters are used to increase the lifespan of other, harder to replace and more expensive filters in the system. Less often, other filters will need replacing. These include the larger box filter, additional pre-filter-type mat filters, and activated carbon. This should not need to happen as often. Follow the above procedure for pre-filter and the [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yJkCgAVbAEU&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be video] to replace the full filter setup. Be careful not to spill activate carbon if doing a full replacement, it is difficult to clean up.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_300&amp;diff=12045</id>
		<title>Speedy 300</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_300&amp;diff=12045"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:31:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is laser cutter equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Trotec&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Speedy 300&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=140801D83D63 / 01411-05631 (Air Filter)&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:laser_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Laser Engraver Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:laser_cutter_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:laser_cutter_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Trotec Speedy 300 Laser Engraver&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1223&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Trotec Speedy 300 laser engraver is used to engrave and cut materials based on specified images and shapes. This is useful for making enclosures out of acrylic, engraving designs into many materials, creating trophies, and cutting any two dimensional shape out of a variety of materials. It also has a rotary attachment which enables cylindrical objects such as drinking glasses and hydro flasks to be engraved with detailed designs. &lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9qF8dHQPy6o}}[[File:Hydrowiki.jpg|thumb|400x400px|none|Example of an engraved Hydroflask. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Inkscape - The program you will be using to design is Inkscape. It allows you to type in words, edit logos, make your own logos and such to engrave or cut out of your material.&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Control - The program that interacts with the laser cutter to perform a cut. Job Control lets you set up/create Material Profiles, change between the HoneyComb Table and the Rotary tool (mostly used for Hydroflasks), and choose a location to cut on your material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Focusing tool - Used to focus the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Stroke - This is the type of line that should be used when cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Repeat Cut Line - Can be used in JobControl to reproduce the same cut line that was just cut.&lt;br /&gt;
*Outline Job - Can be used in JobControl to trace the job that is going to be cut to show where job extends.&lt;br /&gt;
*Bitmap - Representation of an image as bits of information (pixels); used to allow logos/stencils to be changed into colors.&lt;br /&gt;
*Vector - Representation of an image as shapes, rather than bits; used to allow logos/stencils to be modified as objects.&lt;br /&gt;
*Trace Bitmap - Can be used on a bitmap to to turn it into a vector.&lt;br /&gt;
*Honeycomb Table - This is the honeycomb shaped metal tray that holds flat material during a cut. It is used for most cut jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotary Tool - When engraving water bottles or glasses, this accessory is used to hold the object in place as well as rotate it while performing a cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Material Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:LICENSE KEY S3-4397.pdf|License Key Information]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:TrotecMaterials 2022.09.08 10.40.55.xml|Speedy 300 Material Settings 8 SEP 2022]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User Manual====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:JobControl-Manual-EN.pdf|Job Control Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:8011-speedy300-manual-en.pdf|Speedy 300 Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing a cut or engrave with the laser will always begin with Inkscape by opening/importing an image, pdf, DXF, or similar file. If you do not have a file yet then it can also be used to create geometries. When you use SolidWorks to generate a .dxf file the correct face must be selected prior to saving the file.  Once a file has been brought into Inkscape, it must be adjusted  so that job control can distinguish between what should be cut out of the material and what should be engraved. A cut is indicated by a hairline red stroke (in the RGB color scheme) and an engrave is indicated by the color black. After the graphic is prepared, it is transferred to job control using [File] &amp;gt; [Print] and making sure trotec is selected as the device. It will then pop up in the job list on the right hand side of JobControl. At this point the laser cutter should be set up by turning it on, placing the material on the honeycomb table, and then raising the table to focus the laser. The final steps are then to click the USB icon in job control to connect to the laser cutter, drag the job onto the to scale honeycomb table, set the correct material properties, and then click the play button to perform the cut/engrave. When performing an engrave on a cylindrical object, the set up process in Inkscape is the same but there are a few differences in job control and laser cutter itself. Primarily, the honeycomb table must be exchanged for the rotary tool, which must be done while the laser cutter is OFF. The laser cutter should automatically recognize that the rotary is attached. The only change in job control is that the accessory should be changed in the settings from the honeycomb table to the rotary tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A Training Venture (TV) that uses the Laser Cutter is the [[Windchimes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, import a George Fox logo into Inkscape and set it up so that the logo is an engrave with a cut circle surrounding it. Once this is done, print the job to job control and run the job on a piece of scrap material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:trotec_laser_engraving.mp4|thumb|none|400px|This video shows the complete process of completing an engrave. See below for details on doing this. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Setting up a Job'''&lt;br /&gt;
##First off, open a new document in Inkscape on your own machine or one of the lab computers (File &amp;gt; New, or Ctrl + N). Next, you’ll want to set the dimensions of your page by going to [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties] (Ctrl + Shift + D). Your page can be as big as you like, as long as it’s larger than the shape you’re working with. However, always '''make sure that the document is square.''' There’s some weird quirk with the software that makes this necessary, keeping the document square will keep you from running into a lot of problems later on. Under the “Custom Size” section in document properties, set your hight and width to something larger than the longest dimension of your object. When you export the shape to the laser cutter, Inkscape will export anything within the document canvas and ignore anything that extends beyond it’s borders.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now you’re ready to create a shape to be cut or engraved.   a.)     If you’re importing a shape from SolidWorks, the file should be saved as a .DXF file. Simply drag the file onto your Inkscape document or import it via [File] &amp;gt; [Import] (Ctrl + I). If prompted to select scaling options, choose “read from file” and click OK. Next, select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Ungroup] (Ctrl + Shift + G). This will allow you to select the text objects that make up the SolidWorks watermark and delete them. While you’re here, make sure that there is only one copy of each line, as SolidWorks often likes to make duplicates. Finally, you may want to select all of the remaining objects and regroup them with [Object] &amp;gt; [Group] (Ctrl + G). Skip to step 5.  b.)     If you want to cut or engrave from an image, the best way to do so is from a vector image file. Vector graphics files store the lines, shapes, and colors that make up an image rather than storing data based on pixels as in a typical raster image. These lines, shapes, and colors is what the laser cutter interprets when cutting and engraving. If you’ve designed something in Adobe Illustrator, Inkscape, or other vector-based drawing applications, you can save your image directly to this format. If you’re looking for images online, search for vector images. These will most commonly be in the format of .SVG, .EPS, and some types of .PDF. You can import these types of images into your Inkscape document by simply dragging them onto the canvas or importing them via [File] &amp;gt; [Import] (Ctrl + I). Skip to step 5.   c.)    If you want to engrave or cut a raster (pixel-based) image, you will need to convert it to a vector shape. Drag your image onto the Inkscape canvas and proceed to step 3. [[File:...gfuLogo.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Inkscape can convert an image into vectors based on the composition of the source image. To do this, select your image, right click, and select Trace Bitmap, (Alt + Shift + B). You will be given several options shown below. Check the “Live Preview” box which will give you a better idea what’s going to happen. For the George Fox logo, we want to separate the colors from each other, so we’ll select “Colors” under the “Multiple Scans” section. The number of scans you specify correlates to the number of objects that Inkscape will create based on the different parts of the image. Since our example is a simple logo with 3 colors, 3 scans will be sufficient. Depending on your image, you’ll have to play around with these settings a bit. For a back and white image, you’ll probably want to use “Brightness Cuttoff” under “Single Scan” and adjust the “Threshold” value until the preview looks correct. Once you click OK, the vector will appear directly on top of the original image, so make sure to drag it off and move or delete the original image. [[File:...traceBitmap.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##You will now have a vector object that consists of several parts. Separate them by right-clicking the vector and selecting “Ungroup” (Ctrl + Shift + G). Now you’ll be able to alter each part of the object. In our example, we’ll go with the one on the right and delete the one on the left.  [[File:...separateParts.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Now we can manipulate the colors. Select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Fill and Stroke] (usually it will already be open on the right sidebar). You will see Fill, Stroke Paint, and Stroke Style on the top right. Fill changes the color of a piece, Stroke Paint changes the color of a stroke, and Stroke Style changes the thickness and style of a stroke. You will see values for R, G, and B, which control color. When each color has a 0 next to it, it will be fully black. When the red has a 255 next to it and the others have 0, it will be fully red. The machine will cut material ONLY when it sees a stroke that is 255, 0, 0, and it will engrave material ONLY when it sees 0, 0, 0. Set these values on your object depending on what you want to engrave or cut, and make sure these values are exact before continuing. Anything that you do not want to cut or engrave, either delete or set to white, which is 255, 255, 255. Be sure to make each a “Flat Color” so that the color is constant throughout the entire object.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now that you have an object with the correct fill and stroke, you’ll want to resize it to the size you want. Select your object, and in the top bar of Inkscape you’ll see options for height and width. If you want to scale the object without altering it’s height and width ratios, lock the two together by clicking the lock icon. Measure your material and set the height and width accordingly, or set the values to your desired size. If you imported your file from SolidWorks you shouldn’t need to change these dimensions, just verify that they match the size of your object in SolidWorks. [[File:...Stroke.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Once you have finished your design, it’s time to send it to the Laser Cutter! Go to [File] &amp;gt; [Print] (Ctrl + P) and make sure it is sending to Trotec Engraver but do not click [OK] yet.&lt;br /&gt;
##Select [Preferences] to open the engraver properties. Check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as it is in Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “Image Mode” is set to “Color” and “Enhanced Geometries” is not selected. '''NOTE''': “Take From Application” will only work if your Inkscape canvas is square. Make sure to set this correctly, or else set the print size to something larger than either dimension of your print (so long as “Minimize to Jobsize” is enabled.)[[File:...printing.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Save these settings by selecting the button that shows the JC logo near the bottom of the Printing Preferences and select Print to send the design to Job Control.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Setting up the Laser Cutter'''&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn on the machine using the power switch located on the back of the machine in the left corner. The machine will go through a startup procedure where the cutting bed lowers and the laser travels to its home position. Note that the lid must be closed for the startup procedure to begin. You will hear be some beeping coming from the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
##Place your material onto the honeycomb table. '''ALWAYS''' place it in a corner, snug against two sides of the bed. This way if something doesn't go quite perfectly in the cutting process you can return the material back to that corner and try again without having to scrap the entire piece.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now it’s time to focus the laser onto your material. Begin by moving the laser head over the middle of your material. Place the focusing tool on the laser head and slowly raise the table until the the focusing tool just barely touches the material. Be sure to raise the bed extra slowly when approaching the focusing tool, so that you can stop the moment you are at the correct height. Use cation, as there is also no safety in place to prevent the material from crashing into the head and damaging this delicate, expensive assembly. The focusing tool will likely fall off the head; this is fine so long as you didn’t overshoot the point at which it first touched. Reference the images below for proper focusing tool placement and laser head controls.[[File:Laser Focus Tool.png|none|thumb|404x404px| Proper placement of the focusing tool. ]][[File:Laser Controls.png|none|thumb|296x296px| Laser control pad. (1) Raise and lower the bed. (2) Move the laser head (5) Air assist. Make sure it is always on to vent fumes properly.   ]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Remove the focusing tool and return it to its home.&lt;br /&gt;
##Press the USB icon found in the bottom right corner of Job Control to connect to the laser cutter. The laser should beep a few times and then a the background of job control will change to a honeycomb pattern to represent the actual honeycomb table. Also, the USB icon will change to a play icon.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cutting with Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
There are four tasks you will need to complete in order to cut/engrave using Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
## First, you need to get the image from inkscape into Trotec Ruby. This can be done by simply downloading the file and dropping it into Trotec Ruby. &lt;br /&gt;
## Second, you will click onto the design tab. All you need to do is verify that everything is the correct color that you need and everything looks fine. Once completed. Click on the blue &amp;quot;Create Job&amp;quot; button. This will allow you to move on. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex1.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Third, you will need to prepare your cut/engrave. To do this you will need to align the laser with where you want to cut by dragging the grey square box. Then you need to select the material that you will be using to cut/engrave. DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM SUPERVISOR. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Finally, to produce the image press the &amp;quot;Push to Laser&amp;quot; button, this will open the next tab&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex4.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## To start the cut/engrave just press the play button. Remember to RESET THE SPACE once your cut/engrave is don't and not to leave any material in the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Cutting with the Rotary Tool'''&lt;br /&gt;
##The Rotary Tool lets you cut and engrave cylindrical objects, the most popular of these being Hydroflasks. This part applies after you have already sent the file from Inkscape to the Laser Cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn OFF the machine, remove the honeycomb table, and plug in the rotary tool. The rest of the laser cutter setup is the same as above.&lt;br /&gt;
##Continue As though you were cutting/engraving anything else until you hit the design tab. Hit the rotary button. It looks like a cylinder. &lt;br /&gt;
##Enter the diameter of your bottle (using the Calipers in the lab), as it tells the Rotary Tool how fast to turn as it engraves. Do not mess this up, or you will have a stretched/squeezed image.    [[File:R3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Once you click OK/apply, the window background will look like the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
##Double click/drag the job onto the window. Make sure to rotate the graphic to the proper orientation that you want it as. This can be done with the rotation button.  [[File:R2.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
##If you click view it will show you an animation of what the bottle will look like to give you an idea of how to position your image. &lt;br /&gt;
##Next, pick the material Hydroflask → Black Mug for a Hydroflask, or one of the glass profiles if engraving glass, and now you are ready to engrave your thing!&lt;br /&gt;
##When you are finished, RESET THE SPACE! Put the Rotary Tool away and replace it with the HoneyComb Table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Always make sure the material you are using is safe to use. There is an especially high risk when engraving plastics. Fumes from plastics can be toxic. Make sure you find the specific material you are using and check to see if it produces toxic fumes when burned. Never attempt to engrave PVC as it produces chlorine gas (the stuff they used in WWI).&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the laser is focused do not touch the button that raises the bed or the laser will crash into the machine which causes damage to the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
*Be careful when moving the laser head when using the rotary tool because it has protruding parts that will harm the laser cutter if a crash occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Keep an eye on active cuts because fires can be started when cutting wood or acrylic with paper covering.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you feel unsure about anything located in the laser cutting procedure make sure to consult the supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut List==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved Materials===&lt;br /&gt;
* Acrylic&lt;br /&gt;
* Wood&lt;br /&gt;
* Vegetable tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DO NOT CUT===&lt;br /&gt;
* Any plastics containing PVC (polyvinyl chloride)&lt;br /&gt;
* Chrome tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
* Hardboard (Masonite)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to cut a material not listed here, please talk with the Maker Hub staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - Laser Cutters (Speedy 300/400) Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}} (this module satisfies requirements for both the Speedy 300 and the Speedy 400). The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
'''First of all, check your export settings'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are multiple combinations of settings that will work for export; which means that depending on who was using the machine last, settings may be different. These are the settings I (the ace) have found to work most consistently: Set your Inkscape document to square by going to [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties] ( Ctl+Shift+D) and set both the Height and Width fields to the same value, bigger than your shape. Why this is an issue is yet unknown, Inkscape just doesn’t like exporting non-square documents with the other settings to follow. Print the document with File &amp;gt; Print or Ctl+P. Click preferences and check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “image mode” is set to “color.” These settings will fix most common issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not being made'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some export settings may be incorrect. Verify that your settings are set to those described above. These settings will fix most issues of lines not cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that all stokes are set to red with a stroke width between 1pt and .25pt (.25pt recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that your print is entirely within the canvas of Inkscape.&lt;br /&gt;
*In Preferences, within Print options, verify “image mode” is set to “color.” Otherwise, your red stokes will not be read as color, and not be seen by the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The cuts did not go all the way through the material'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you using the correct material profile? If not, reset the job (described below) and repeat the cut with the correct material profile. If it appears that the cut went partway through the material you may want to use a setting that is less powerful than your material would normally use (again, described below)&lt;br /&gt;
*You should always place your material in a corner. This way, if the cuts do not go all the way through you can reposition it easily. DO NOT MOVE THE JOB in JobControl! If you put the material in a corner, should be able to place the material back where it was, and then reset the job in JobControl by right clicking on the job in JobControl and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Next, run the cut again on the smallest thickness setting for your material. For example, if you are cutting 1/4 inch acrylic and it does not cut all the way through, repeat the cut with the 1/8 inch acrylic setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using the correct material profile for your material and cuts are not going all the way through, please email me and let me know so that I can take a look and fix the settings. ZCogswell18@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser went really fast leaving a sort of light engrave rather than a cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You did not select the correct material, and the job ran with the ‘standard’ setting. '''DO NOT MOVE THE MATERIAL!''' You can reset the job by right clicking on the job in Job Control and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Then, select the correct material in the upper left dropdown menu and run the job again. This way you do not need to reposition the material or job, which you will almost never do perfectly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser repeated the cut multiple times'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some material profiles, such as half-inch, acrylic are set to repeat the cut line multiple times, as to get a cleaner product. If the cuts look good, this is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you importing from SolidWorks?  For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The acrylic is melted or blackened'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that you are using the correct material profile. If you are, for example, cutting 1/4 acrylic with the 1/2 setting, the acrylic will be melted and not give clean cuts.&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you importing from SolidWorks? As mentioned above, “''For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.”''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not clean'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Is the machine focused properly for your material? If you’re not sure, or even if you are (you may have bumped the bed control buttons accidentally) refocus it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the lens for dust because this can interfere with the laser. If it is dirty, see the maintenance section on how to clean it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The material is being cut in unintended places''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the above does not work, contact the lab supervisors or Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To keep the laser cutter running and cutting smoothly, the mirror and lens should be periodically cleaned. This is on top of the general cleaning that should be done to keep the machine dust and scrap free. There are also filters in the exhaust system that must be changed once the activated carbon has been used up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed after a cut&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Mirror&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Lens&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Change Filters&lt;br /&gt;
|When filter usage reaches 100%&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The honeycomb should be removed and the metal bed itself should be should be swept/cleaned more or less daily. Cleaners are available to help in this process. Green is general cleaning use this for the bed and metal surfaces. Blue is glass cleaner, use this for the plexiglass surfaces. The front door of the Speedy 300 may be removed using the spring loaded pin on the right to remove cut pieces stuck in the door. The air vents at the rear of the machine should be kept clean of debris. Clean in a manner similar to the bed.&lt;br /&gt;
#The lense, mirror, and cone should be inspected daily or more often as needed, especially after wood or other “dusty”/”smokey” materials are cut. The lense will need cleaning when particles are visible on the surface (hold up to light if need be). The lense may be removed using the threaded nut below the lense (see photo). The lense should be cleaned with the lense paper and cleaner available in the kit (lasercutter drawer) on both sides. Put some cleaner on the lense and gently rub the paper over the surface of the lense. The cone itself threads into the assembly below the lense nut. The cone may be cleaned with a paper towel and water or another cleaning agent. The mirror should be inspected and cleaned in the same manner as the lense.&lt;br /&gt;
#See above.&lt;br /&gt;
#The air filter to the right of the Speedy 300 will occasionally need maintenance. The most common issue is a full pre-filter (P/N 37722). This will be indicated on the filter itself by poor airflow/suction. When replacing this, use a face mask and gloves (close the lab when doing this). Open the top of the air filter with the large 10mm hex wrench in the kit. Remove the prefilter and place it in a bag for disposal. Insert a new prefilter and close the lid. Pre-filters are used to increase the lifespan of other, harder to replace and more expensive filters in the system. Less often, other filters will need replacing. These include the larger box filter (P/N 41041), additional pre-filter-type mat filters, and activated carbon. This should not need to happen as often. Follow the above procedure for pre-filter and the [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yJkCgAVbAEU&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be video] to replace the full filter setup. Be careful not to spill activate carbon if doing a full replacement, it is difficult to clean up.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Mug_Press&amp;diff=12044</id>
		<title>Mug Press</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Mug_Press&amp;diff=12044"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:31:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Hub&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Vinyl&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Heat Press Nation&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=HPN-SIG-MUG&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=HPN-SIG-MUGWHB260USJL-3-009&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Mug_pressIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:mug-press.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Heat Press Nation HPN Signature Series Automated Sublimation Mug Heat Press&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1314&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* This machine uses heat to operate so be aware of the heating element when it is running to avoid burns.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Do not leave the heating element on any longer than necessary if there is nothing inside it. Long periods of time without something in the press can damage the heating element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The HPN Signature Series Mug Cup Heat Press machine is a professional grade mug press designed to easily and efficiently heat transfer custom images onto almost any size and shape of mug. From small sized graphics such as names and logos to full wrap, edge to edge images. This machine is to be used with transfers from the sub dye printer. When transferring an image to a mug you need to make sure the material used is compatible. Mugs used with the sub dye process have a special coating.  Here is an example of transferring an image:&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vndbNZ8wCIM}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* SV - Stands for set value and is used to indicate the parameters that the press should be operating at.&lt;br /&gt;
* CV - Stands for current value and indicates the present value of the heat press parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Manual-hpn-transfer.pdf|Mug Press User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The operation of the mug press is pretty simple. First, select a heating element that fits your glass or mug and fasten it into place using the black screws. There is no formula for selecting the correct element other than putting your mug inside and making sure it fits snugly. Adjust the pressure using the large black knobs so that there is a firm, even pressure over the mug. Next, set the time and temperature. Feel free to experiment with different values as there is not an exact formula, but for dye sublimation set the temperature around 385°F for 190 seconds. The paper should have a light tan look after removing it from the press. If the paper appears burnt the temperature should be decreased. After the time and temperature are set, place the mug in the element and clamp down. The timer will beep once the transfer is complete. For complete details see the general procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A mug or glass is required in order to perform a transfer on this machine which makes it difficult to perform simple test or demonstration transfers. Consequently, the demonstration will be pressing a graphic of choice onto a mug or glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Select a heating element. Heating elements come in different sizes with their own connection cord.  This is not an exact science, simply slide the mug into the element and make sure it can wrap around it with a snug fit. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use the black set screws to secure the heating element into the press, and plug it into the controller. Make sure to screw in the plug as well to ensure a good connection.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the heating element is installed you will want to adjust the pressure applied to the mug using the four large pressure adjustment knobs. The pressure should be evenly and firmly distributed across the mug's surface, but without risk of crushing it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the time and temperature. 385 °F for 190 seconds is recommended as a starting point, but feel free to try new things to improve the results. See the image below for details on changing the time and temp. [[File:Mug press temp.png|none|thumb|799x799px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Place the graphic onto the mug. High temp tape should be used so that the graphic does not shift after it is placed in the press.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Put the mug into the press and clamp down. Leave it until the timer beeps.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the mug from the press and wait about 30 seconds (or longer) before removing the paper. The mug will be very hot.&lt;br /&gt;
# Reset the space by turning off the machine, throwing away any scraps, and wiping any debris off the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the paper looks really dark/black on removal the temperature needs to be reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only maintenance needed on this machine is general cleaning. Use a paper towel and cleaner if necessary to wipe of any dust and vinyl debris. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Metal_Laser_Cutter&amp;diff=12043</id>
		<title>Metal Laser Cutter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Metal_Laser_Cutter&amp;diff=12043"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:30:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Metal&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=FabLight&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Tube and Sheet FL4500&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=10021.02-0076-301&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Metal_laser_cutterIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:FabLight.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=FabLight Laser&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1316&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some safety instructions for the {{PAGENAME}}. Remember... SAFETY FIRST!!!&lt;br /&gt;
*Laser cutting or engraving of many materials can create hazardous fumes. These fumes may be dangerous to breathe and can damage the FabLight. Consult Manufacturer’s Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials before laser cutting. The user of the FabLight is responsible for exhaust ventilation and removing cutting fumes from the working area. Before operating the FabLight, make sure that the exhaust system is working properly.&lt;br /&gt;
*There are often sharp edges left on the material from the cutting process. Be careful handling a fresh cut piece and use the deburring tools to remove any sharp edges. &lt;br /&gt;
*On a similar note a fresh cut piece is usually hot so check the temperature with the back of your hand before picking it up.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure to use tabs to prevent collision damage with the cutting head. &lt;br /&gt;
*Before opening any covers, turn off the machine power and remove the key to make sure no cutting operations will happen while you are working inside the the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FabLight FL4500 is a versatile and powerful laser cutter that is capable of engraving and cutting sheet and tube metal. It will cut and engrave on square, rectangle, and round tubes up to 2&amp;quot; diameter as well as sheet metal. Internal features on tubing such as complex holes, slots, notches, and other features along the tube are also very easy to cut. It is equipped with an industrial-quality IPG fiber laser and precise mechanical control, you can make just about anything metal you can think of, including: custom signs, furniture, panels, enclosures, industrial components, jewelry &amp;amp; art. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=t5qoiouFq50&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PPpDD0U3Hps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* Engrave - Removes a thin layer of material from the surface of the metal along an established line. This has great accuracy but only produces a thin line.&lt;br /&gt;
* Raster - Very similar to an engrave but a raster is used to engrave a large area by passing over the area repeatedly. This works great for things like lettering and designs, but it does lose a little accuracy around the edges.&lt;br /&gt;
* FabCreator - The software used to set up a cut from a DXF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== User Manual ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:FabLight Operator Manual v4.3.pdf|FabLight Metal Laser Cutter User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:FabCreator Manual 2.2.0.XX.pdf|FabCreator Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:3D Fab Plugin Manual v2.1.pdf|3D Fab SolidWorks Plugin Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.reddit.com/r/lasercutting/comments/1jkckqd/fabcreator_software_from_fablight/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Fablight is a simple machine to use for cutting flat stock. A part is saved as a DXF file and then imported to FabCreater where features can be set to cut, engrave, raster, or just be reference geometry. In FabCreator, the material properties are set and tabs are added - so that the material doesn't fall to the bottom of the machine. Once the part is set up correctly it is saved to a USB drive to be transferred to the machine. Most of the interactions with the machine happen through the touchscreen which makes previewing and cutting the job a simple task. Cutting tube stock is more intricate. The Fablight Solidworks Plugin is used to make a 2D DXF out of the 3D Solidworks model by essentially unwrapping the tube until it is one flat piece. This DXF is then wrapped back up into a 3D part in FabCreater before being sent to the machine. Only use the Fablight Solidworks Plugin when cutting or engraving tube stock. When cutting tube stock you will want to cut as close to the chuck as possible to avoid waste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FabLight Tutorial YouTube Playlist: https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLpj81hTIgjFffXWzEtQGfXVJJ12mU_lJY&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the demonstration, you are required to engrave your own design on flat stock. This design should include a cut, engrave and raster. If no design is available use a George Fox logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
'''For Flat Stock:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up the file:&lt;br /&gt;
# Export the desired part as a DXF (a DWG will also work). It does not matter what software was used to create it as long as it can be exported as a DXF.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the FabCreater software.&lt;br /&gt;
# Import the DXF using [File] &amp;gt; [Import] and make sure to select the correct units when prompted.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [Edit] tab to select and delete any unwanted lines.&lt;br /&gt;
# Alternatively, line types can be adjusted in the [Part] tab to be cut, engraved, a raster, or a reference line. This can be helpful to see what the entire part looks like if when you are cutting a smaller piece for it.[[File:FabCreator.png|none|thumb|627x627px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [Properties] tab and select the correct material properties such as material type, thickness, and stock type.&lt;br /&gt;
# While in the [Properties] tab, select the [Move to Origin] option to properly align the part where the laser will begin cutting. If there are multiple parts, align one with the origin and then orient the rest based on that.&lt;br /&gt;
# Hit [Accept].&lt;br /&gt;
# If there are any small parts, tabs can be added to prevent them from falling through the rack by going to the [Process] tab and the clicking the [Tabs] button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the file to a  USB drive by going to [Job] &amp;gt; [Make]. Note: Make sure this is not saved in a folder of the  USB drive so the laser can find the job.&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up the laser cutter:&lt;br /&gt;
# Slowly open the nitrogen canister so that the system is not filled to quickly and then adjust the regulator to 150 psi. Do not exceed 150 psi because the pressure in the canister is enough to rupture the hose to the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the Fablight by flipping the switch found on the left side of the machine and then turning the key.[[File:Fab light panel.png|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Once it is on select the machine home feature on the touchscreen to move the laser head to its starting position.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the door on the front of the machine and check that the adjustable chuck is slid all the way to the right so the material tray will not hit it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Slide out the material tray so that the cutting material can be loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
# Place the cutting material anywhere on the tray and slide the tray back in. Make sure a click is heard to signify that the tray is in the correct position. There are two places where it will click you want to stop at the first one. The second one is at the very back of the machine and is where the tray goes when using the chuck.&lt;br /&gt;
# Close the door.&lt;br /&gt;
Performing the cut:&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert the USB drive on the right side of the panel. [''not to be confused with the &amp;quot;Key Switch key&amp;quot;'']&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the touch screen, press [New Job] &amp;gt; your file name &amp;gt; [Select Job]. A preview window will then open up where the model can be checked to make sure everything is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
# Hit the green checkmark to exit the preview.&lt;br /&gt;
# Hit the green checkmark again to move to the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the origin by moving the x and y slider bars. The laser head will move with the sliders and the exact position can be seen by the red guide laser. The location of the red dot will be the origin used in the FabCreater software and it should be placed where the use of material can be maximized (usually the corner of the material, furthest away from the chuck.).&lt;br /&gt;
# Press [Run Job] on the touchscreen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the [Start] button to the top of the touchscreen to begin the cut.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the cut is completed wait a minute or so to let fumes dissipate and the material to cool.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the material from the machine using the door on the front.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset the Space==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reset The Space HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how you can reset the space for the {{PAGENAME}}. Always reset the space!!!&lt;br /&gt;
* Turn off the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* Turn off the compressed air.&lt;br /&gt;
* Turn off the exhaust switch.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ask the technician if you should complete a general cleaning of the machine and check the video linked in the general maintenance section of the Metal Laser Cutter wiki page.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut List==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved Materials===&lt;br /&gt;
* Steel&lt;br /&gt;
* Stainless steel&lt;br /&gt;
* Aluminum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DO NOT CUT===&lt;br /&gt;
* Wood&lt;br /&gt;
* Plastics&lt;br /&gt;
* Fabrics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Use the CO2 lasers for these materials.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to cut a material not listed here, please talk with the Maker Hub staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
* The job runs but machine does not cut. Most likely the dry run process selected. Toggle dry run off. &lt;br /&gt;
*  The machine does not cut, many sparks visible. The process table is not set correctly or the cutting head or optics are dirty. Ensure correct focal offset, cut speed, cut height, and gas pressure in process table. Check that the nozzle tip is clean, wipe off slag with Scotchbrite.&lt;br /&gt;
*  If the machine doesn't cut all the way through a part, a possible reason is that the wrong profile was selected in FabLight. &lt;br /&gt;
*  Incorrect or the cutting head/optics are dirty. Verify cut process parameters including cut speed, cut height, and gas pressure. Check nozzle tip is clean, wipe off slag with Scotchbrite.&lt;br /&gt;
*  Cut does not go all the way through material. Select correct process. Reduce cut speed. Increase assist gas pressure up to 145 PSI. Verify process table is correct. Verify beam centering and focus test. Inspect nozzle tip.&lt;br /&gt;
*  If your machine has a rotary you may encounter two homing errors. If the touchscreen says, “Idler (the chuck that holds the right side of the tube) not homed. Move idler to home”, open the door and move the idler all the way to the right. There is a sensor that detects when the idler is in its home position. Once the idler is in the home position, close the message and repress HOME THE MACHINE. If you encounter an error message saying that the rotary is locked; simply pull out the red pin, close the message, and repress HOME THE MACHINE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like any other machine tool, the FabLight must be cleaned regularly for optimal performance. Lack of regular preventive maintenance (PM) will lead to damaged machine components, a reduction in part quality, and machine downtime. Cleaning the entire machine takes on average 10 minutes to complete and is easy to do with a single person. Even if the machine does not appear to be dirty, over time metal particles can build up; for optimum machine performance you must adhere to the recommended PM schedule, even if the machine “does not appear to be dirty.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nHSUXOYKm5Y}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning &lt;br /&gt;
|Every 1-2 Weeks depending on usage rate&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean Window&lt;br /&gt;
|Once a month&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate drawer slides &lt;br /&gt;
|Quarterly &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Apply WD-40 to rails &lt;br /&gt;
|Quarterly&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Empty clean out drawer &lt;br /&gt;
|Once a month&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# Vacuum out entire machine and wipe down the encoder strips with a paper towel. See [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nHSUXOYKm5Y&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be this video] for details. Also wipe off the cutting head with a paper towel. &lt;br /&gt;
# Wipe down the inside of the window with a microfiber cloth, not the vacuum or a paper towel.&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply grease to the drawer slides to keep them operating smoothly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Spray the rails with WD-40 to lubricate and keep them clean.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the drawer, remove any large parts by hand, and then vacuum out the rest.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Markforged_3D_Printer&amp;diff=12042</id>
		<title>Markforged 3D Printer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Markforged_3D_Printer&amp;diff=12042"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:30:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Markforged&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Mark II&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=70a3238c-d43a-412a-814b-3f2d8758c8b9&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Mark 2 3D printer.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:mark_two.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Mark II machine by Markforged.&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1241&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=3D Printers&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mark Two is a desktop professional 3D printer capable of reinforcing parts with composite fiber, affording them durability and strength. It can print in a range of materials, including Nylon, Carbon Fiber, Fiberglass, and Kevlar.{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2o02D94B4y8&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be&amp;amp;t=26}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
Inlay - embedding pieces of a different material into another, in this case embedding carbon fiber or another&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fiber - A non-plastic material which in this case comes in a strand/spool and is inlayed into the base plastic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Composite Materials - material made from two or more constituent materials with significantly different physical or chemical properties that, when combined, produce a material with characteristics different from the individual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dry Box - dry box is a storage container in which the interior is kept at a low level of humidity, in this case in order to prevent the material from being damaged&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eiger - Software used to set up prints on the Mark Two, accessible from most browsers (i.e. Chrome). Account-based, requires an account to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purge - Rapid printing of excess material which has been sitting in the machine lines for a long period of time. This helps ensure a print will be of acceptable quality by removing any potentially humidity compromised material from the lines&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onyx - Markforged prefered primary printing material. It is a vinyl base with chopped carbon fiber in the filament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Desktop Printer UserGuide.pdf|Markforged 3D Printer User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Desktop Printer QuickStartGuide.pdf|Markforged 3D Printer Quick Start Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.rdmag.com/article/2018/10/understanding-role-carbon-fiber-3d-printing Brief on Carbon Fiber Printing]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mark II is a [[Prototype Lab#FDM Printing|FDM Printer.]] See the main page for more background on the Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) process. What sets the Mark II apart is its ability to inlay various materials in the print using a second nozzle. These materials include carbon fiber, fiberglass, and kevlar. These smaller materials are located on the second, smaller spool in the rear of the build space. The inlaying of these materials can be customized in Eiger (the printing software for the Markforged). The main materials for the printer are nylon and onyx, this material is contained in the dry box (black box behind the printer) in order to limit moisture contamination. Don't open this unless you need to change the material. Nylon is a typical plastic filament, which provides a clean finish and some flexibility. Onyx is nylon with chopped carbon fiber. This provides more strength and a little less flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prints on the Markforged must be started by a manager, as the software is account based.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete understanding of the Mark II, student will perform the setup and shut down procedures for printing a Coiler Winder.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Software&lt;br /&gt;
## The Mark II utilizes cloud-based print software Eiger. This means that the software can be accessed from any browser, but an account is required to do so. As such, prints will need to be started by management.&lt;br /&gt;
## After login, the main screen returns to library. From this page, you can view and modify previous prints for reprinting or import a new STL for printing.&lt;br /&gt;
## Once imported or selected, print material may be selected (Onyx in this case) reinforcement type may be selected and orientation may be edited in the pane on the right. Clicking a part face will orient that face to the build plate. Reinforcement and material settings may be edited with drop-down menus (these are generally best done in the internal view). Brims and support may be toggled on or off from the Part Settings drop-down menu. All these options are available from part view.&lt;br /&gt;
## From internal view, density (number of layers of carbon fiber) may be viewed and edited using the slider at the bottom of the page (Blue is carbon fiber, White is main material).&lt;br /&gt;
## Material costs and totals may be viewed in the upper left of the part screen. It's worth noting the dramatic change in cost with addition of Carbon Fiber inlay.&lt;br /&gt;
## All Mark II prints should be okay-ed with Justin Johnson (the shop supervisor) before being started. Once setup is completed and the printer is on, prints are sent to the printer via the &amp;quot;Print&amp;quot; option. Generally, select the option to start the print from the machine, rather than automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
# Printer Setup&lt;br /&gt;
## The printer may be turned on with a switch on the rear of the machine. The machine will boot up and may need to update, let it complete this process. &lt;br /&gt;
## Before starting the print, glue needs to be applied to the build plate. Simply lift the build plate off the mount and apply the glue stick (found in the Markforged drawer/box) to the area where the print is located in the software (be sure to account for extra width due to the brim), the back of the plate where the machine will purge a line of material (print excess material which has been sitting in the lines and exposed to air), and the corner where the purge tower is located in the image below. [[File:Mark II Build Plate.jpg|thumb|A Mark II build plate with purge tower and purge line.|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Place the plate back on the mount. The Mark II is ready to print! &lt;br /&gt;
# Printer Shutdown&lt;br /&gt;
## Upon completion of the part, select clear bed on the touchscreen and remove the build plate from the mount. The purge line and tower should be easily removable by hand. &lt;br /&gt;
## For the part itself, take the putty knife found in the Markforged drawer/box and carefully remove the part. This may take quite a bit of force to accomplish. Make sure the blade of the putty knife and your hand will never come into contact if you slip (i.e.: brace the plate on the table and push the knife away from you along the plate). Work the knife along the perimeter of the part's attachment to the build plate and avoid prying with the knife when possible. [[File:Removing Parts from Mark II Build Plate.jpg|thumb|Removing parts from the Mark II build plate.|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## After the part is removed, wash the plate with warm water only. When the plate is clean, dry it with a paper towel and place it back on the mounts.&lt;br /&gt;
## The plate is ceramic, avoid dropping it. The plate will absorb oil, it is normal to see fingerprints, etc. on the plate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
# Please take care when removing parts from the plate so as to NOT CUT YOURSELF with the putty knife. FDM printers use heating of material to form a 3D model, like a hot glue gun. As such, the extruder head of the printer will be warm. DO NOT TOUCH THE EXTRUDER when it is hot. Doing so will result in burns. &lt;br /&gt;
# Although this should be a non-issue, fiber strands are fairly thin and sharp. DON’T IMPALE YOURSELF. &lt;br /&gt;
# The top of the printer may be opened for maintenance and inspection. This leaves the gantry with the print head on it exposed. DO NOT PUT YOUR HAND IN THE MOVING MACHINERY. Doing so may result in pinching, crushing, cutting, “ouch”-ing, crying, and other unpleasant “-ings”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Approved Filaments==&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
See the  the [https://support.markforged.com/hc/en-us/categories/115000131204-Mark-Two Support Page] for troubleshooting guides.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All maintenance will be performed by the Ace of the Mark II or managers. Specific maintenance tasks are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Changing Materials&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed, Use the key located in ask managers or Justin to unlock the dry box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow [https://support.markforged.com/hc/en-us/articles/208342553-Unload-Plastic Unload Plastic] instructions to remove what is left of current primary material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow [https://support.markforged.com/hc/en-us/articles/115000403824-Set-Up-and-Load-Plastic Set Up and Load Plastic] instructions to insert new primary material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow [https://support.markforged.com/hc/en-us/articles/115000543824-Unload-Fiber Unload Fiber] instructions to remove what is left of current inlay material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow [https://support.markforged.com/hc/en-us/articles/208198473-Set-Up-and-Load-Fiber Set Up and Load Fiber] instructions to insert new primary material.&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Managers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Calibration and Setup&lt;br /&gt;
|Follow [https://support.markforged.com/hc/en-us/articles/207896386-Level-the-Print-Bed Level the Print Bed] instructions to level the print bed and set the correct nozzle heights.&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or managers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Additional Calibration and Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
|See the [https://support.markforged.com/hc/en-us/categories/115000131204-Mark-Two Support Page] for additional maintenance and operation guides.&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or managers&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=MIG_Welder&amp;diff=12041</id>
		<title>MIG Welder</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=MIG_Welder&amp;diff=12041"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:30:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Welding Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Miller Electric&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Millermatic 210&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=LC520348&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:mig_welder_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Add description&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:mig_welder_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Millermatic 210.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Millermatic 210&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1267&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Touching live electrical parts can cause fatal shocks or severe burns. The electrode and work circuit is electrically live whenever the output is on. The input power circuit and machine internal circuits are also live when power is on. In semiautomatic or automatic wire welding, the wire, wire reel, drive roll housing, and all metal parts touching the welding wire are electrically live.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don’t weld lead, zinc, copper, cadmium, or beryllium or any coated metals. Welding these materials can be harmful if not equipped with proper safety gear and training.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Don’t weld in wet gear or standing water because this could create a new path for the electrical current to travel and cause a severe electrical shock.&lt;br /&gt;
*Always turn gas and the welder off when you are done in the welding shop to ensure there are no leaks that could cause asphyxiation (suffocating from lack of oxygen).&lt;br /&gt;
*Never weld without a welding helmet. Arc rays from the welding process produce intense visible and invisible (ultraviolet and infrared) rays that can burn eyes and skin. Be aware that sparks fly off from the weld.&lt;br /&gt;
*Never weld without gloves. Gloves protect your hands from the heat as well as the arc rays. No bare skin should be exposed.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don't weld with the vent hood off. Welding produces fumes and gases. Breathing these fumes and gases can be hazardous to your health. Asphyxiation can also occur due to the confined nature of the welding shop and the use of welding gasses.&lt;br /&gt;
*Always weld with the door open to lower the risk of asphyxiation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don't weld with the gas off. This can damage the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don’t unscrew the regulator adjusting screw all the way out.&lt;br /&gt;
*Please avoid touching the hot metal surrounding the weld, even if you are wearing welding gloves. You could get burned and the heat may damage the gloves.&lt;br /&gt;
*Avoid stepping on or kinking the cable attached to the  gun. This can interfere with the wire feeding system and cause permanent damage.&lt;br /&gt;
*Never weld alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Millermatic 210 is a wire feed metal inert gas (MIG) welder that is meant for light industrial use. Metal inert gas is a welding process in which an electric arc forms between a consumable MIG wire electrode and the base metal, which heats the base metal, causing them to melt and join. Along with the wire electrode, a shielding gas feeds through the welding  gun, which shields the process from contaminants in the air. This is the easiest and most common type of welding which makes it perfect for those learning to weld. It uses 72/25 CO2 and Argon gas mixture to shield the molten weld from oxygen. If the weld pool is exposed to oxygen, it can create a handful of problems such as porosity and excessive spatter in the bead. This welder is capable of welding carbon steel as well as stainless steel. Below is a short video explaining MIG welding. Before completing the training on this machine you must complete the [[Virtual Reality Welding Station]] training and spend some time practicing with it to get a feel for the welding process. The purpose of this wiki is to explain the operation of the Millermatic 210. Basic welding technique should be learned on the VR Welder. {{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=twUAa5LWUvk}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MIG Welding - Metal inert gas is a welding process in which an electric arc forms between a consumable MIG wire electrode and the base metal, which heats the base metal, causing them to melt and join. Along with the wire electrode, a shielding gas feeds through the welding  gun, which shields the process from contaminants in the air.&lt;br /&gt;
*Gun - The piece that is held while welding and feeds the weld metal into the base metal.&lt;br /&gt;
*Base Metal - The metal pieces that are being joined together.&lt;br /&gt;
*Filler Metal - The material added to the weld from the weld spool.&lt;br /&gt;
*Coupons - Small pieces of metal used to practice welding.&lt;br /&gt;
*Contact Tip - The metal tube connected to the gun that guides the wire and transfers the current to the filler metal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:O1325a mil.pdf|MIG Welder User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Note:''''' Before completing training for the MIG Welder, you must first be trained and practice on the [[Virtual Reality Welding Station]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MIG welding may be the simplest welding method to learn, but that does not mean it is easy. First, it is important to wear the correct safety gear, i.e. closed shoes, pants, a welding coat, a welding helmet, and welding gloves, otherwise you will be burned by the UV light emitted by the welding arc (think of a really bad sunburn). You must also make sure the machine is set up properly. To do this, the gas cylinder valve should be opened all the way and the regulator adjusted to roughly 15 CFH. Depending on the material you are welding the voltage and wire feed speed will vary. You can find a settings chart located inside the cover of the welder. Secure your work pieces using clamps and magnets to hold them in position. Make sure to clamp the ground clamp to the work piece or the metal table near the welding position. If you clamp the ground to the table make sure the work piece has good contact with the table near the ground clamp. The most difficult piece is keeping the correct  gun angle, keeping a consistent travel speed/pattern, and maintaining the correct distance from the work piece. If you have spent time on the welding simulator then the  gun angle and travel speed/pattern should be simple to replicate. It is more difficult to visually reach the correct distance from the material but if the welder is making a nice sizzling (just like frying bacon) sound then it should be correct. If there is a lot of popping the the gun is too far away and if there is more of a bubbling sound then it is too close. When you have completed the welding process reset the space by putting away any scrap metal and putting everything back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the first part of the demonstration you will need to show how to setup the welder and perform safe operation. The second part of the demonstration will be performing a sample weld on a coupon. To start demonstrate how to weld several 1 inch weld lines a weld coupon and choose one of the following joints to weld: lap, butt, or Tee joint. These should be performed on the coupons found in the weld shop. See the image below to see the different types of welds.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Weld Types.png|none|thumb|748x748px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to Welding:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Place the fume hood over the area you will be welding and make sure it is on. The power switch is located on the wall next to the door and light switch.&lt;br /&gt;
#Attach the ground clamp to the metal bench your work piece will be on. Ideally, place the ground clamp on the base metal itself to create the smoothest path for the electrical current.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure the work piece is touching the conductive surface of the table. This is critical if the clamp is not touching the base metal.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure the adjusting screw on the tank regulator is loose (Do not unscrew all the way).&lt;br /&gt;
#Slowly open cylinder valve all the way. Suddenly opening the valve could cause damage to the regulator.&lt;br /&gt;
#Slowly turn the regulator screw (clockwise) to increase pressure to 25 CFH. At first it will spin freely but you will begin to feel resistance as the pressure begins to increase on the leftmost pressure gauge.&lt;br /&gt;
#Identify the material type and thickness that you will be welding.&lt;br /&gt;
#Determine the wire feed rate and voltage to fit your material and wire size. To do this, refer to MIG welding chart for specified adjustments specific to your application. A welding chart is included below for reference and the same chart is mounted inside the cover of the welder. This chart also depends on the wire size which is usually 0.035&amp;quot;. [[File:Welder Chart.jpg|none|thumb|706x706px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn on the welder and adjust wire speed and voltage to match the parameters layed out by the welding chart. Refer to the image below to see the controls for doing this. [[File:MIG Controls.png|none|thumb|837x837px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure you are wearing all necessary protective gear. This should include closed shoes, pants, a welding coat, a welding helmet, and welding gloves. There should be no skin exposed to the welding arc or it will cause burns.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure the welding  gun has proper amount of wire protruding from tip (about ¼ inch) and that the  gun nozzle is clean of any debris. You can use pliers to scrape off any debris in the nozzle. If too long, trim excess with the welding pliers. If to short, pull the trigger while the  gun is not in contact with anything and more wire will be fed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perform a Weld: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Set up the work pieces in your desired configuration. Magnets and metal clamps are helpful for doing this and can be found on the tray below the tabletop.&lt;br /&gt;
#Tack the pieces together in a few places by holding the  gun at the proper angle and holding down the trigger for 2-3 seconds. Before pulling the trigger make sure to say &amp;quot;welding&amp;quot; to let everyone in the room know you are about to start. If you do not know the correct angle to hold the  gun go practice some more on the [[Virtual Reality Welding Station]] until you are comfortable with the  gun.&lt;br /&gt;
#Perform as many welds as needed. If you are doing everything right the noise should sound like sizzling bacon. Also, you may need to periodically trim the wire between welds to keep the correct distance from the work piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Welding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Close gas cylinder valve.&lt;br /&gt;
#Bleed any remaining gas by depressing trigger until regulator drops to 0. Make sure the  gun is not in contact with anything while doing this.&lt;br /&gt;
#Back out adjusting screw on regulator (Do Not unscrew all the way).&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn off the welder.&lt;br /&gt;
#Carefully coil the  gun and return it to the welder. Make sure it does not get kinked.&lt;br /&gt;
#Remove the ground clamp and clean up any scraps and slag from the work area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Welding Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Wire feeds from the  gun but welding doesn't occur - Check that the ground clamp has solid contact with the work piece and that there is solid contact with the table if the clamp is on the table.&lt;br /&gt;
*The welding process is burning through the work piece - Double check the welding parameters chart to ensure the wire speed and voltage are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
*Trouble starting the weld at the correct distance - Trim the wire to around 1/4&amp;quot; so that the gun can be closer to the work piece.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inconsistent arc - Check that your workpiece is clean of thick mill scale. The contact tip may also need replacing, contact supervisor or tech.&lt;br /&gt;
*Wire feeding at an erratic rate - Contact the supervisor or tech if you experience this issue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welding environments are often dirty so the {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}} holds up well to to dust by design and it is not critical to have it squeaky clean as a result. However, it is still recommended to wipe down the machine on occasion to prevent an excess of dirt buildup. It is important to clean slag buildup from the nozzle of the gun to increase its longevity and to inspect/repair the weld cable. To clean the nozzle, twist it off and then scrape away any slag with a pair of pliers. At this point you can apply a light coat of nozzle gel to the end of the nozzle to help prevent slag from sticking (this is found on the table to the left of the welder). Another routine maintenance procedure is the lubrication of the drive motor so that the wire feed system will keep functioning properly. For details on doing this refer to the user manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Completed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean slag from the gun nozzle&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspect/Repair cracked weld cables&lt;br /&gt;
|Every 3 months&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean and tighten weld terminals&lt;br /&gt;
|Every 3 months&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Blow out or vacuum inside of welder&lt;br /&gt;
|Every 6 months&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Remove drive roll and carrier and lubricate&lt;br /&gt;
|Every 6 months&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace contact tip&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Leatherworking_Station&amp;diff=12040</id>
		<title>Leatherworking Station</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Leatherworking_Station&amp;diff=12040"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:29:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Vault&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Leather&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has redirect={{FULLPAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Various&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Various&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=Various&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Leatherworking Station Icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Leatherworking Station Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:Leatherworking Station Icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Leatherworking Station 2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Leatherworking Station&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Leatherworking Station&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1226&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|500px|right|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some safety instructions for the {{PAGENAME}}. Remember... SAFETY FIRST!!!&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not laser cut chrome-tanned leather; this will produce toxic fumes (cyanide gas). Only vegetable-tanned leather is ok to laser cut. If you don't know which type of leather you are using, check with the Maker Hub staff before using the laser cutters.&lt;br /&gt;
* You must wear safety glasses when performing any type of hammering at the leatherworking station. Anyone else within a 6-foot radius of you should put on safety glasses too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Apply leather dyes and finishes in the finishing room to minimize breathing their vapors.&lt;br /&gt;
* Remember that there are many sharp and pointy tools at the leatherworking station that are specifically designed to cut and puncture cow skin. If it can cut/puncture cow skin, it can certainly cut/puncture your skin. Treat the tools with respect, and exercise good judgment when cutting and puncturing to keep yourself out of the tool's path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many leatherworking techniques do not require a high level of skill to get started. With a basic familiarity of the tools and what each one is used for, a large variety of leather projects become accessible. The main goal of this training course is to show you a wide range of tools and give you an opportunity to practice with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Awl.jpg|Awl&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Burnishing Cloth.jpg|Burnishing Cloth&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Dobbers.jpg|Daubers&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Dye.jpg|Leather Dye&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Edger.jpg|Edge Beveler&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW End Punch.jpg|End Punch&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Hole Punch Set.jpg|Hole Punch Set&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Manual Leather Sewing Machine.jpg|Manual Leather Sewing Machine&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Neatsfoot Oil.jpg|100% Pure Neatsfoot Oil&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Rawhide Hammer.jpg|Rawhide Hammer&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Revolving Punch.jpg|Revolving Punch&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Rivet Setter.jpg|Rivet Setter&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Sewing Awl.jpg|Sewing Awl&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Leather Shears.jpg|Leather Shears&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Stitching Chisel.jpg|Stitching Chisel&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Stitching Groover.jpg|Stitching Groover&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Stitching Pony.png|Stitching Pony&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Strap Cutter.jpg|Strap Cutter&lt;br /&gt;
File:LW Swivel Knife.jpg|Swivel Knife&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Vegetable-tanned Leather''' is tanned with natural vegetable tannins to alter the protein structure of the hide, causing it to become leather. This type of leather typically takes a longer amount of time to create. Approximately 10% of all leather is vegetable-tanned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Chrome-tanned Leather''' uses chemicals to tan and is a faster, less costly process. Chrome-tanned leather comes in a large variety of colors and is often less stiff than untreated vegetable-tanned leather. Approximately 90% of all leather is chrome-tanned. Do not laser cut chrome-tanned leather.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an excellent explanation on the differences between vegetable-tanned leather and chrome-tanned leather, watch [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6D3TrHqhJHw| this video from Gentleman's Gazette].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Awl''' - An awl is a tool with a metal point used for marking, piercing, punching, or sewing leather.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Burnishing Cloth''' - A canvas-like material that will burnish (to seal, smooth, and make shiny through rubbing friction) the edges of your leather workpiece. These can also remove char after using a laser engraver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Wood Burnisher''' - A wooden piece with grooves that is used to smooth and harden the edges of leather through applied friction and pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Daubers''' - Daubers are used to apply oil or dye to your leather workpiece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Leather Dye''' - Leather dye will stain your vegetable-tanned leather. We have a variety of colors available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Edge Beveler''' - An edge beveler is a tool with a sharpened metal notch that is used to remove the square corners from the edges of leather goods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''End Punch''' - An end punch is used to cut smooth and clean tips on belts and straps up to 2&amp;quot; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Hole Punch Set''' and '''Revolving Punch''' - Leather punches are hole punches specifically for making holes of various sizes in leather. They are great for setting rivets or making holes in belts and collars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Manual Leather Sewing Machine''' - A heavy duty, hand-cranked sewing machine. Please receive proper training on threading and operation before using.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Neatsfoot Oil''' - Neatsfoot oil is an oil finish for leather that comes from the shin bones and feet of cattle. It's used to soften, condition, and preserve leather products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rawhide Hammer''' - A rawhide hammer (also called a leather maul) is a striking tool used for stamping, tooling, setting rivets, and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rivet Setter''' - A set of tools used for setting rivets in leather.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Leather Shears''' - Heavy duty scissors that cut through leather quite easily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stitching Chisel''' - Stitching chisels are tools that are used for marking and creating holes in leather--usually for hand-sewing purposes. They are built with equally spaced metal points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stitching Groover''' - A tool that marks a groove around the edge of your workpiece by applying downward pressure as you drag the tool. The guide can be adjusted for different depths of inset grooves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stitching Pony''' - A device that keeps leather securely in place while hand-sewing, stitching, or lacing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Strap Cutter''' - A tool designed to cut leather strips up to 4&amp;quot; wide as the leather is pushed/pulled across a small blade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Swivel Knife''' - A swivel knife is used to outline and cut a design into the surface of leather as an initial stage to tooling the leather with decorations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Collectively, the leatherworking station is treated as a single piece of equipment--comprised of an assortment of tools. Each tool has a specific purpose, and half of the battle is just knowing what each tool does. The General Procedure section explains the process of various techniques you'll perform in the demonstration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The demonstration for the leatherworking station will be an overview of the tools and techniques. Take a piece of scrap leather and perform the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
*Take the strap cutter and cut a 0.5&amp;quot; strip of leather&lt;br /&gt;
*Practice punching a couple holes with either the rotary punch or the hole punch set&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the stitching groover to run a groove around the edges of your leather strip&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the edge beveler to round the top and bottom edges&lt;br /&gt;
*Burnish the edges of your leather strip with the wood burnisher, the burnishing cloth, or the burnishing attachment for the Dremel tool&lt;br /&gt;
*Prepare the leather for some hand-sewing by puncturing it with an awl or a stitching chisel&lt;br /&gt;
*Secure your leather strip in the stitching pony and attempt to sew using a saddle stitch in a few of the stitching holes you made&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many more skills associated with leatherworking; this demonstration is only designed to cover the basics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cutting Leather''' is one of the first things you’ll do for your project. And this is something that’s pretty easy, but there’s a right way to cut and a not-so-right way. Because cutting out the leather is generally the first step in making a leather item and your cuts affect the difficulty of the steps that follow. Clean cuts ensure that burnishing is easy and your stitching lines are straight. Getting a clean cut is all about scoring, using a ruler that won’t slip and having a sharp knife or rotary cutting tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Hand-Stitching''' is one of the harder skills to learn, but it's still easy to pick up. Stitching a leather project together is a multi-step process. It involves marking out your stitching lines, punching your stitching holes, and finally saddle stitching the item together. Saddle stitching is a hand stitch that is widely used in leatherworking due to its durability. See the steps below along with the video to learn how to saddle stitch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, mark your stitching lines with a groover. If you’re not sure how far in to set your stitch, a general rule of thumb is to have the distance between the stitching and the edge be the same as the thickness of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, punch your stitching holes using a stitching chisel. Use the rawhide hammer to pound the stitching chisel with a scrap wood block underneath to avoid damaging the table. The main trick to this technique is to make sure that your chisel is perfectly perpendicular to the leather. A slight angle one way or the other will make it so the stitching on the backside doesn’t line up. This is especially a problem on thicker projects, like belts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much thread do I need? This depends greatly on the thickness of the leather and the style of stitch. For saddle stitching, it's recommended to cut thread that is between 4-lengths (for thinner projects) and 8-lengths (for thicker projects) of the total stitching length on the piece of leather. How tight you pull the thread will also make a big difference in how much thread is needed. No need to pull with all your might, but definitely don't leave your stitches loose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now to the hard part: saddle stitching. Once you have the needles through the first hole, take the needle on the left side and push it through the leather. Then, with the right needle, come behind the left needle to make a cross. Next, with the right needle still behind the left needle, pull the left needle through and rotate your hand toward you so that the left needle is now facing you and the right needle is facing the stitching holes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, put the right needle through the same hole you just pulled the left needle through. If you used a diamond chisel, each hole will be a diamond shape. This means that each hole has a high point and a low point. For your stitching to look uniform you need to consistently put the right needle back through the hole at the same point in the diamond, ideally the point of the diamond that is closest to you (assuming you are stitching towards yourself using the stitching pony). Once the needle is through, pull both tight. At that point, you’ve finished your first saddle stitch. On to the next one. Once you’ve completed your entire stitching line, you’ll need to backstitch. Back stitching is a saddle stitch that goes backwards 2-3 holes to make sure the thread won’t come loose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a video that shows the saddle stitching technique.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4QS2jPZCLCg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Threading a Needle''' is actually a skill too. Here's a quick aside on how to do it with waxed thread. Click on each image to see more detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Thread1.jpg|Cut the thread to the needed length&lt;br /&gt;
File:Thread2.jpg|Roll or flatten the tip of the thread to put it through the eye of the needle&lt;br /&gt;
File:Thread3.jpg|With the thread extending 1-2&amp;quot; beyond the tip of the needle, pierce the center of the thread with the needle&lt;br /&gt;
File:Thread4.jpg|Pull the pierced section of thread beyond the eye of the needle to create a knot&lt;br /&gt;
File:Thread5.jpg|Pull from both sides of the thread to tighten the knot&lt;br /&gt;
File:Thread6.jpg|Slide the knot to the top of the eye, and now you are ready to stitch&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why do we need a knot around the eye of the needle? It keeps the thread from falling out of the eye of the needle as you pull it through the leather. Why not just tie a regular old knot to secure the thread to the eye of the needle? This type of knot is low-profile and won't unnecessarily enlarge the holes you made for stitching as you pull the knot through the leather.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Burnishing''' the edges of your leather will give your project a finished, professional look. Burnishing finishes the edges by melting the loose fibers together with heat created through friction. Basically, that just means you rub the edges with a wood burnisher or burnishing cloth until it looks good. A simple burnishing process includes: beveling the edges, sanding them, dyeing them, burnishing them, and then finishing the edge with glycerin soap or wax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Simplified+Burnishing+Edge+Prep.png|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you’ll need to bevel your edges. The reason for this is that the surface of the leather will start to fold over as you sand the edge. Beveling basically removes the part that would fold over. Beveling is super easy. All you need to do is run the beveler smoothly and consistently along the edge with a moderate amount of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, you’ll need to get the edges nice and smooth. First, start with a 200 grit sandpaper; this will even out any part of the edge that is not flat with the rest. Then, sand off loose fibers with a 600 grit sandpaper.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the edges are smoothed out, it’s time to decide whether to dye the edge or not. Dying the edge isn’t something you have to do. If you want your edge to be a natural color, then don’t dye it. Typically though, you can dye the edge with the same color used to dye the surface. Burnished edges will naturally darken, so using the same dye provides a darker shade of the same color, which always looks good. Make sure to apply any dye in the [[Finishing Room]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, it’s time to actually burnish. To do this, dip your finger in water and lightly wet the edges. Make sure not to soak the edges though. Leather becomes very pliable when soaked and can be molded. This is great for other things, but not so much when your burnishing. Once you’ve put water on the edges, rub a wood burnisher or burnishing cloth across it briskly until the edges start to darken and shine. You’ll know you’re done when you start to hear a tacky sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And finally, apply some glycerin soap or wax to the edge. This helps keep the leather water-resistant and seals the edges. After applying the glycerin soap or wax, buff the edges again with a burnishing cloth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Dyeing Leather''' is tricky. Getting a nice even coat of dye on leather takes not only the know how, but also the skill that comes with lots and lots of practice. There are many different ways to dye leather. Here is one recommended method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, all leather dyeing must occur in the [[Finishing Room]] with proper ventilation. The fumes from leather dyes are not good for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, put on gloves. Leather dye does not come off of your hands easily. A glove station is located in the Machine Shop just to the left of the Finishing Room door.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can dye any unfinished vegetable-tanned leather. In fact, you can probably dye pre-dyed veg tanned leather... but why? Just be aware that there are waxes on top of finished leathers that will not allow the dye to penetrate the leather well. Regardless of your skills with dyeing, be aware that dyeing often reveals various marks and inconsistencies in the leather grain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before dyeing, wipe down your leather piece with a cloth or paper towel to remove any dust or contaminants. This will help create an even coat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is &amp;quot;cutting a dye&amp;quot; and why would I bother doing it? Cutting a dye reduces its potency by mixing the dye with a dye reducer. This allows you to apply several coats for a smooth and uniform finish. The more coats you do, the smoother your dye is going to look. At the same time, the more coats you do, the darker the finish will be. So, if you achieve the color you want on your first pass of dye but the finish isn't as smooth/uniform as you want, you won’t be able to apply more dye to help even out the finish. Instead, you’ll get a very marbled look... which is ok if that’s what you’re going for. If you don't cut the dye at all, it will be quite concentrated. A little dye will go a long way. Start with super light and thin strokes with the dauber. Avoid drenching your leather workpiece in the dye as this can produce some unwanted results (like your blue dye turning copper-colored). The following procedure assumes you have cut the dye.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For your first coat (or base coat), apply the dye in a circular motion. This is easily the most important coat. First you’ll dip your dauber, cloth, or sponge into the dye. Start with a very light pressure and slowly increase pressure in your circular motions as the dye absorbs into the leather. Then allow it to dry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few tips for applying this coat evenly and consistently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first set your dauber, cloth, or sponge onto the leather it is going to be loaded up with dye, and if you apply pressure when you first set it onto the leather that one spot is then going to be loaded up with dye. When you first start, apply little to no pressure. As you keep going and less dye is being released from the dauber/cloth/sponge, begin applying more pressure to release an equal amount of dye as before. When the dye starts getting spotty, reload the dauber/cloth/sponge with dye. Basically when the area you just passed over isn’t completely covered in dye, it’s time to get some more. As you dye with circular motion, overlap half of your previous circle with your new circle as you go. Don’t shy away from the edges. Make sure you dye the leather on something you don’t mind getting dye on, because you should be dyeing beyond the edge of the leather. If you treat the edge of the leather like the end of where you should dye, you’ll approach it timidly and the edges will look less dyed than the rest of the project. You can get a piece of cardboard from the low fidelity prototyping station to use as a platform for dyeing in the Finishing Room. Let your base coat dry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply your second and third coats diagonally. The second coat can go back and forth diagonally to the right; the third coat can go back and forth diagonally to the left. Make sure to go beyond the edge of the leather piece for an even coat. Always allow time for drying between coats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this 3-coat method, the grain of the leather has been hit with dye from every direction, and there should be no spotty or undyed parts. You can buff the finish with a burnishing cloth once it has dried.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this final coat has dried, you need to put a finish on the leather. If you decide to skip this step, whoever is using the item you made will end up with leather dye on their clothes. This is bad, so use a finish. While a finish won't completely prevent dye rub off, it will greatly reduce it when applied to the leather properly. Fiebing's Tan Kote works well as a finish, which can be purchases as either a gloss of matte finish. This can be applied in one coat; just work it into the leather using the same circular motion from before. Once you’ve worked it in evenly, leave it alone and let it dry. Touching it at all during the drying process will ruin the finish. After the finish has had time to dry, buff it with a cotton cloth. Finally, the dyeing and finishing process is complete!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Vault - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Practice makes perfect. Don't expect your first leatherworking project to be a masterpiece. Many of these leatherworking techniques simply need to be practiced to gain proficiency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional info, check out these websites: [https://www.instructables.com/Introduction-to-Leatherworking/ Instructables], [https://www.manmadediy.com/4482-it-s-easier-than-you-think-a-simple-straightforward-guide-to-getting-started-in-leatherworking/?chrome=1&amp;amp;A1c=1&amp;amp;D2c=1 MMDIY].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manual sewing machine and the tooling are the only parts of the leatherworking station that need periodic maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate the Manual Sewing Machine&lt;br /&gt;
|Yearly&lt;br /&gt;
|Maker Hub Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Sharpen the Tooling&lt;br /&gt;
|Yearly&lt;br /&gt;
|Maker Hub Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Injection_Molding_Machine&amp;diff=12039</id>
		<title>Injection Molding Machine</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Injection_Molding_Machine&amp;diff=12039"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:29:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Vault&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Pim-shooter&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=150A &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=D00709&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Injection Molding Machine (1).png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Model 150a.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=LNS 150A&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1280&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Model 150A PIM-SHOOTER™ by LNS Technologies is a bench model injection molder designed for production of thermoplastic parts in quantities required for making prototypes and low-volume production (or higher-volume production of small parts). Due to the machine’s small size it is limited to producing small parts, but it is capable of producing these parts efficiently, accurately (as accurate as the mold is), and repeatedly.  The plastic shot size is 1.1 cubic inch Max.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5_UnthpIA0w&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-LU3Dzl0iGg&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flash -''' This is when the two halves of a molding tool are not properly sealed, causing molten plastic to leak out of the part cavity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sprue -''' The main channel guiding the molten plastic from the nozzle of the injection molder into the part cavity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Runners -''' Subchannels that branch off from the sprue and into the part cavities. These are used for mold tools that contain multiple part cavities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Gate - '''The thin section connecting a runner or sprue to the part cavity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Shot -''' The volume of material needed to fill the mold cavity. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:...injectionMolderTerms.png|none|thumb|469x469px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Manual_InjectionMolder.pdf|Injection Molding Machine User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The injection molder works by melting plastic pellets within a heated barrel to a specific temperature, and using a ram plunger to force the molten plastic through a nozzle, into a mold cavity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the injection molder demonstration, a pre-existing mold will be provided and the person must successfully injection mold the part. They should demonstrate proper adjustment of height to fit the mold, setting up for injection (filling the hopper, setting the temperature, and aligning the mold under the nozzle), injecting, and removal of the mold and part from the mold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Setup&lt;br /&gt;
## You will need to setup the molding machine using the following steps and charts. Temperatures for different plastics can be found in the table below. Make sure to wear gloves and safety glasses while using this machine.[[File:...injectionTemperatureChart.png|none|thumb|373x373px]] [[File:Temp_Controller.JPG|600px|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## First we need to adjust the height for the mold being used by following these steps. &lt;br /&gt;
### Set the mold clamps to measure the gap. &lt;br /&gt;
### Loosen the height adjustment bolts on the top holder using a 6mm Allen Wrench.&lt;br /&gt;
### Loosen both tension nuts, and turn the lower tension nut to move the top holder up and down the main post. This will determine the height of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
### Raise or lower the top holder so that there is a gap between the nozzle and the mold sprue (this allows adding and removing the mold), but of no more than ½”.&lt;br /&gt;
### Tighten height adjustment bolts, and verify that the nozzle aligns well with the mold sprue. &lt;br /&gt;
### Tighten the upper and lower tension nuts.&lt;br /&gt;
# Molding&lt;br /&gt;
## Turn on the power switch.&lt;br /&gt;
## Make sure the SV value is correct on the temp controller for the type of material you are using. Adjust the temp controller using the setting buttons if the SV value needs adjusting.  &lt;br /&gt;
## Wait for the PV value to reach the SV value. &lt;br /&gt;
## Now add pellets to the feeder.  &lt;br /&gt;
## Wait several minutes for the pellets to melt.  If you want to preheat the mold now is the time.  &lt;br /&gt;
## You should see a small amount of plastic ooze from the nozzle&lt;br /&gt;
## Make sure the mold is clamped tight and the nozzle nipple is aligned with the mold sprue.  &lt;br /&gt;
## Scrape away any oozing plastic from the nozzle using a screwdriver or similar tool.  This helps keep plastic chunks out of the mold.  &lt;br /&gt;
## With a smooth linear motion push down on the handle and fill the mold.  &lt;br /&gt;
## Hold pressure on the handle for an extra few seconds. This will help reduce shrinking of the plastic in the mold.   &lt;br /&gt;
## Retract the handle all of the way to remove the plunger and give access to load more pellets. &lt;br /&gt;
## You can now remove the mold and separate the halves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Making a Resin Mold for the Injection Molder=====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mold:&lt;br /&gt;
* Find/make a 3D model of the object you want to mold.&lt;br /&gt;
* Follow the instructions in the linked video to turn the object into a 3d model on SolidWorks:&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jm9b_8kYKuQ}}&lt;br /&gt;
* Save the SolidWorks file as an STL file.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then follow the steps in the maker-hub wiki to print this STL file on the Formlabs resin 3D printer. Make sure to use the HIGH TEMP RESIN in the Formlabs and not another type of resin as this kind is the best for injection molding.&lt;br /&gt;
** TIP: Curve the edges of the mold to better fit inside the mold casing&lt;br /&gt;
The Aluminum Casing (x2):&lt;br /&gt;
* Find a piece of aluminum stock that is larger than one-half of your mold in every dimension.&lt;br /&gt;
* Next, cut down the piece using the mill until the aluminum block is somewhere between 1/8”-1/4” larger than the piece of your mold. This will allow a wall of that thickness around your mold.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then mill out a cavity in the block of aluminum that is around the size of your mold. This cavity will be for press fitting half of the mold into, but it shouldn’t be too tight or else the mold might break. The depth of this cavity should be the same distance as the thickness of the mold piece, so when press fitted the casing and mold faces are flush.&lt;br /&gt;
* Then, drill out a hole at the top of the mold for the spout where the plastic will be injected into.&lt;br /&gt;
* The printed mold will then be press fitted into the cavity but be careful not to crack the mold when press fitting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery mode=&amp;quot;packed&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Resin Mold 1.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Resin Mold 2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Resin Mold 3.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
*Parts of the injection molding machine get very hot and could burn you. You need to wear gloves while working with the machine and molds.&lt;br /&gt;
*Never attempt to use PVC or other materials not approved for use with this machine. PVC will produce toxic fumes when heated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Vault - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
It may take some time to learn how much pressure to apply to the handle when filling a mold.  If you press too hard you will end up with lots of plastic flash on your finished piece as material will ooze out between the mold halves.  If you don't press hard enough you could end up with an air pocket left in the mold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you run into an issue with the material not flowing properly make sure that you are heating the material to the correct temperature and allowing enough time for the plastic to melt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine should to be cleaned on a regular basis and mechanical parts should be checked for wear as well as loosening of any parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean up plastic overflow&lt;br /&gt;
|When used&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Formlabs_3D_Printer&amp;diff=12038</id>
		<title>Formlabs 3D Printer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Formlabs_3D_Printer&amp;diff=12038"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:29:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Formlabs&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Form 3&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:formlabs_printer_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Formlabs 3D Printer Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:formlabs_printer_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Formlabs Form 3 3D Printer&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=(???)&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1237&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=3D Printers&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Form 3.webp|450px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Form 3 is Formlab's 3rd generation printer boasting a whole range of new features including a new peeling mechanism, heated tank, touchscreen display, wireless controls and an automated resin system. The resulting prints that come off of the Form 3 have consistently been among the highest quality objects to come off of any desktop 3D printer. This machine is best used with the [[Form Wash and Cure]] &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Description adapted from [https://www.3dhubs.com/3d-printers/form-2 3dhubs].&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Form 3 employs [[Prototype Lab#SLA Printing Anchor|SLA Printing]] (Stereolithography Apparatus). Due to friction caused by de-laminating every layer, every part should be canted in its orientation. This means the part should be angled in the PreForm software to reduce the cross sectional area needing to be shifted to de-laminate each layer. This ensures the wiper blade in the resin tank doesn't remove the print from the build plate. When reviewing the supports in PreForm, check to make sure all supports are created in areas from which they can be easily removed, or that supports created in inaccessible areas won't interfere with the print's intended function. Also check to make sure no supports are created on hard edges, as any placed supports will break up the edge, and removing them properly takes longer than necessary and can potentially damage the print.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xf9oBcTzMFo}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=s94KgsbGmzc}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dLIRAkXa6t8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Touchscreen.png|Touchscreen&lt;br /&gt;
File:...resinCartridge.jpg|Resin Cartridge&lt;br /&gt;
File:...form2BuildPlate.jpg|Build Platform&lt;br /&gt;
File:...ResinTray.png|Resin Tank&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://support.formlabs.com/s/article/Quick-Start-Guide-Form3?language=en_US Quick Start Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://formlabs.com/3d-printers/form-3/ Product Home Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://formlabs.com/blog/form-3-review-roundup Review Roundup]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://support.formlabs.com/s/article/Design-specifications-for-3D-models-form-3?language=en_US/ Design Specs]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Form 3 is most useful for its ability to print incredibly accurate parts, with layers as thin as .025mm thick, depending on the resin selected. Due to the size of the Form 3, it can only be used to print smaller pieces, and the extra layering for detail combined with the de-lamination process also causes the Form 3 to generally be the slowest printer in the lab. Unless an exception is made, a model with supports included should be no larger than 30mL worth of resin. If specific material properties are needed for a print, the Form 3 is a good option to look into thanks to the many differing resins available for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete understanding of the Form 3, students will prepare a part, upload it to the Form 3, and print it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Setting up PreForm&lt;br /&gt;
##PreForm is the software we will use to import or model to the printer.  When connecting to PreForm you need to make sure the wifi is enabled and connected to Bruin Secure. Make sure the correct printer is selected as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
##To begin with, make sure the print is under the approved cost/size cutoff ($7), or the person printing has special approval to exceed this limit.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##If a window pops up saying the print is broken, hit the repair button then proceed as normal.&lt;br /&gt;
##Parts must be shrunk to fit within the build area, further size edits can be made in the Size tab.&lt;br /&gt;
###The goal is to reduce the horizontal area covered with each pass of the wiper. Start with auto-orienting the part using the 'Orient Selected' button in the Orientation tab, this is a good place to start and will make it easier to see if the part needs further orientation.[[File:Size set.jpg|none|thumb| Image 1-Model too big for build plate--Image 2-Model shrunk to fit build plate]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Don't place supports on hard edges (right angles) or in inaccessible places. This will cause the print to be unprintable.&lt;br /&gt;
##Every part that needs support should have support - PreForm will highlight unsupported areas in red, place supports until the red areas go away. '''Check the part thoroughly because PreForm will not let you print with unsupported areas.'''&lt;br /&gt;
##Supports can be added, edited, and removed in the PreForm Supports tab.&lt;br /&gt;
###Support density should be between .5 and .7. This setting determines how many supports are placed per unit area of your print's surface. &lt;br /&gt;
####Higher density → more supports, stronger holding power, better for tall, heavy, or delicate parts, but harder post-processing.&lt;br /&gt;
####Lower density → fewer supports, easier cleanup, less resin use, but higher risk of part shifting or warping.&lt;br /&gt;
###Support point size should be between .6mm and .8mm.&lt;br /&gt;
###These values can be edited if necessary to ensure printability, just use common sense when adjusting values.&lt;br /&gt;
##The Layout tab can be used to add additional copies of a part.&lt;br /&gt;
##Ensure you are connected to Bruin Secure wifi with the proper printer and resin type selected in Preform prior to printing. Additionally, make sure that the resin you want is already installed in the printers. If the resin needs to be changed to the one that you want, ask a Lab Volunteer to help you.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choosing a Resin Type&lt;br /&gt;
##Go through each of these resin types to evaluate which material you will make your part out of. Once you have finished, you can send the file from the computer to the Formlabs printer&lt;br /&gt;
##Black/grey standard: the Standard Resins section of [https://support.formlabs.com/s/article/Choosing-the-Right-Material?language=en_US Choosing the Right Material].&lt;br /&gt;
###Pros: high detail, matte surfaces, good for small, intricate features.&lt;br /&gt;
###Cons: not particularly strong, stretchy, or flexible.&lt;br /&gt;
##Tough: [https://support.formlabs.com/s/article/Using-Tough-Resin?language=en_US Tough]&lt;br /&gt;
###Pros: good for hard edges, snap fits, and high-stresses.&lt;br /&gt;
###Cons: bad for fine details and rigid prints, will not stretch as much as Durable.&lt;br /&gt;
##Durable: [https://support.formlabs.com/s/article/Using-Durable-Resin?language=en_US Durable]&lt;br /&gt;
###Pros: low-friction, high impact strength, good for parts that are both rigid and flexible.&lt;br /&gt;
###Cons: bad for fine detail parts.&lt;br /&gt;
##Flexible: [https://support.formlabs.com/s/article/Using-Flexible-Resin?language=en_US Flexible]&lt;br /&gt;
###Pros: can simulate rubber when uncured, good for functional prototyping.&lt;br /&gt;
###Cons: bad for fine detail or applications when rigidity or hardness are required.&lt;br /&gt;
##See the respective links for each resin for in-depth descriptions of each resin's properties and suggested applications, or look at [https://support.formlabs.com/s/article/Choosing-the-Right-Material?language=en_US Choosing the Right Material] for a shorter overview. Most resins do not handle high temperatures or constant loading well.&lt;br /&gt;
#Operating the Touchscreen&lt;br /&gt;
##You will be able to start your print using the touchscreen on the Form 3. If it is sleeping, just press the button and it should wake up.&lt;br /&gt;
##When it wakes up, you will likely see this screen. It displays the most recently prepared job and gives you the option to print now by pressing the blue button on the bottom right of the screen.[[File:Touchscreen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##There are two other buttons you can press on the left screen. The USB button will take you to the settings of the printer, so you will not need to go here. The checklist button brings a list of every job that has been uploaded to the printer, so you will want to be selecting this one to find your print. When you find your print, select &amp;quot;print now&amp;quot;. The printer will make sure that you perform the appropriate setup before it starts printing, such as inserting the tank in the back of the printer and assuring that the build plate is cleared of other printed parts.&lt;br /&gt;
##The print will begin its process once you hit Print Now! A time estimate will be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
#Removing Prints&lt;br /&gt;
##Your part should now be finished! Follow these steps to clean it up.&lt;br /&gt;
##Finished prints&lt;br /&gt;
###Use a scraping tool to remove the print and any extra material from the build plate, taking care to not scratch the build plate. Go as carefully and as slowly as needed to prevent damaging the print.&lt;br /&gt;
####The build plate stand can be used for easier removal.&lt;br /&gt;
###Wash the print in the Form Wash.&lt;br /&gt;
###If the print is being cured, only remove support material after it has been run through the Form Cure.&lt;br /&gt;
###Supports should be clipped off, and any leftover support material can be sanded down if desired.&lt;br /&gt;
##Failed prints&lt;br /&gt;
###Follow the same process for finished prints for removing.&lt;br /&gt;
###'''When a print fails, the build plate must be cleaned and run through the Wash''' before a new print can be started, as leftover residue from the failed print can cause subsequent prints to also fail. You will also need to check the resin tank for clumps as well as double check the model orientation.  Don't forget to update the job log as well.&lt;br /&gt;
#Washing and Curing Prints&lt;br /&gt;
##See the [[Form Wash and Cure]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Changing Resin&lt;br /&gt;
##If the Formlabs Printer resin tray does not contain the resin you want, allow Lab volunteers to provide the desired resin.&lt;br /&gt;
##Remove, clean, and replace the build plate.&lt;br /&gt;
###Pull lever holding build plate in place up, allowing the build plate to be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
###Place the build plate on the holding rack in the Form Wash. Run the build plate through the Wash to remove resin. For the build plate, the Wash should be set to 10 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
###Let the build plate air dry before replacing, secure by flipping lever down.&lt;br /&gt;
##Remove and replace resin tank and wiper.&lt;br /&gt;
###Firmly pull tank back towards the touch screen until it pops loose of the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
###Place the tank in the appropriately labeled tank storage container in the cabinet under the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
###Remove the desired tank from the storage container and place the container back in the cabinet.&lt;br /&gt;
###Slot the new resin tank into place in the printer by putting it in and sliding it towards the back of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
###Use a scraping tool to dredge bottom of new resin tank for any hardened resin or loose bits of material, remove any found bits.&lt;br /&gt;
###Be sure to clean up any resin that spills during this process.&lt;br /&gt;
##Remove and replace the resin cartridge in the back of the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
###Close the lid of the cartridge if it's open.&lt;br /&gt;
###Pull cartridge out of the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
###Wipe dry the resin drip on the bottom of the cartridge, then store.&lt;br /&gt;
###Insert new resin cartridge, '''of the same resin as the tank'''.&lt;br /&gt;
###Open lid on resin cartridge before starting a print, and close after.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
The most dangerous part of using the Form 3 is taking the part off of the build plate. The scraping tool could hurt your little fingers, so make sure you do not hit them. Also, the alcohol used to clean the print is not for drinking purposes. It is both against the lifestyle contract and very harmful to you if you drink it, so do not do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Approved Resins==&lt;br /&gt;
Please use the available resins:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Photopolymer Resin&lt;br /&gt;
**Durable&lt;br /&gt;
**Tough&lt;br /&gt;
**Elastic&lt;br /&gt;
**Tough 1500 V1&lt;br /&gt;
**Tough 2000 V1&lt;br /&gt;
**Flexible 80A V1&lt;br /&gt;
**Flexible V2&lt;br /&gt;
**High Temp V2&lt;br /&gt;
**Gray V4&lt;br /&gt;
**White V4&lt;br /&gt;
*Ceramic&lt;br /&gt;
*Castable Wax&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you have a different resin that you would like to use, please talk to Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If a print fails, the most likely cause is contamination of the resin. Before proceeding, see the procedure for Failed Prints. Contamination of the resin involves leftover material on the build plate, or particulates in the resin tank. Before attempting a new print, thoroughly clean the build plate, and dredge the resin tank for any loose particles. Another cause is incorrect orientation of the print. Check the print file in question, and ensure it has been canted accordingly to prevent the de-laminating process from removing the print from the build plate. Make sure to also update the job log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Old resin and resin tanks can also present issues.  '''Don't ever mix resin types.''' If a resin tanks is particularly cloudy on the bottom, the laser will be prevented from being able to penetrate the tank, and cause adhesion issues for the print. Resin can also go bad after sitting for long periods of time or being used heavily. This can be evidenced by discoloration of the resin or separation of the resin into unmixed layers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Dredging: Every few prints the resin tank should be checked and dredged with a scraping tool to search for any hardened resin or loose bits of material, as well as when resin tanks are switched out, and when a print fails. Remove any found bits. Dredging is done by sweeping a scraping tool back and forth across the bottom of the resin tank, essentially mixing up the resin to stir up any loose bits. Take care while dredging to not scrape the tank. See a resin's particular page on the Formlabs website for additional cleaning instruction. If the tank is not cleanable, switch out the resin tank. If the problem persists, it's possible the resin cartridge needs to be switched out as well.&lt;br /&gt;
#Alcohol in the Form Wash must be changed once a certain threshold of washed-off resin enters the tank. See the [[Form Wash and Cure]] page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
#Old resin and resin tanks will occasionally need to be changed out&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://support.formlabs.com/hc/en-us/categories/115000003904-Form-2 Form 2 Sources and Help]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Dredging&lt;br /&gt;
|Every few prints&lt;br /&gt;
|Lab Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Changing Alcohol&lt;br /&gt;
|Once a certain threshold of washed-off resin enters the tank. See the [[Form Wash and Cure]] page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
|Lab Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|Before and after each use. Reset The Space!&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resources==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Form Wash and Cure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Prototype Lab#SLA Printing Anchor|SLA Printing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Link to shop [[Equipment]] page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Welding_Shop&amp;diff=12037</id>
		<title>Welding Shop</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Welding_Shop&amp;diff=12037"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:28:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Welding Shop Logo.png|300px|frameless|left]][[File:Welding_Shop.jpg|400px|thumb|right|The Welding Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Welding Lab has multiple welders including a TIG, MIG and Plasma cutter. The welding shop consists of a 280 sq. ft room.  It contains a Welding Table, MIG Welder, TIG Welder, Spot Welder, Plasma Cutter, Blasting Cabinet as well as a Fume Boom for ventilation.  There is a first aid kit located on the east wall. One of the first things you should do when walking into the lab is turn on the fume extractor and light switch.  When you leave the space make sure to turn off all the machines, close all gas valves and reset the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current Aces of the {{PAGENAME}} are '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 | is facility = True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1263&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Schedule=&lt;br /&gt;
The welding shop is open by appointment only.  Please email Makerhub@georgefox.edu for access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Equipment Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::true]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Welding Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has make=Company&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has model=Model |+width=10em&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has ace.Has name=Current Ace&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=broadtable&lt;br /&gt;
 |mainlabel=Name&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Equipment by Icon==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]][[Has icon::+]] [[Is located in facility::Welding Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon=Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=plainlist&lt;br /&gt;
 |template=EquipmentIconGallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |outrotemplate=EquipmentIconGalleryOutro&lt;br /&gt;
 |limit=100&lt;br /&gt;
 |link=none&lt;br /&gt;
 |sort=Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[3 commandments]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 1. Safety First ===&lt;br /&gt;
Safety First is the rule we hold highest of the three. This rule applies to both the safety of you as well as others. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keeping yourself safe in the Welding Lab is very important, as there are possibilities for accidents if you don't follow the safety guidelines. The following rules must be followed at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Safety glasses must be worn at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
*A face shield is required when operating the pedestal grinder. &lt;br /&gt;
*When producing sparks pay attention to their direction.&lt;br /&gt;
*Never stand on or kink any of the equipment leads.&lt;br /&gt;
*No horseplay in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don’t do anything distracting to yourself or others while operating equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not wear any loose clothing, jewelry, or lanyards.&lt;br /&gt;
*No open toed shoes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Hair will not extend bellow the collar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Gloves and helmet must be worn when welding is in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
*No bare exposed skin when welding or cutting. Leather welding jacket is to be worn if welding or cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Food or drink is not allowed in the Welding Lab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to operate equipment that you have not been certified on by GFU engineering personnel.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not argue with volunteers or shop staff. Contact Justin Johnson if you have issues that need to be resolved.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not operate welding equipment without a buddy present. Never operate equipment alone in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
*Reset the space. A clean space is a safer space.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you see a safety violation inform the person immediately and encourage them to comply with the policies.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don’t do anything that would require an additional rule to be added to this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2. Reset the Space ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Welding Lab has a specific organization to it. Put whatever you use back where it belongs. There is a place for everything and everything has a place. This rule applies to everything in the space. If you use a tool, put it back. If you use a pen, put it back. Do not leave your projects in the Welding Lab unless you have made prior arrangements. Throw away your trash and recycling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we understand that sometimes you need to leave projects out. Maybe you are in the middle of a large project and you need something left overnight. In cases like this, it is okay, but you NEED to make prior arrangements  with Nick or Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please put back the equipment the way you found it. Make sure the welding gas is SHUT OFF. The welding cables should be neatly wrapped back onto the welders after they have been allowed to cool. Never step on or kink the welding cables and lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always put any unused materials back on the storage shelf, and throw away unusable scrap.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sweep the floor and welding table when done. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure to shut off the lights and room ventilation before leaving. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always leave the space better than you found it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3. Be Professional ===&lt;br /&gt;
This commandment has two sides to it. It covers the idea of acting like professional (which Webster’s defines as “exhibiting a courteous, conscientious, and generally businesslike manner in the workplace”). The term also describes the standards of education and training that prepare members of the profession with the particular knowledge and skills necessary to perform their specific role within that profession. Hopefully, you are learning both of these as part of your education at George Fox University. In the Welding Lab we expect you to develop as a courteous, conscientious, and skilled craftsman, understanding the tools and equipment in the Maker Hub and how to use them effectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Being a professional has some obvious ramifications in terms of behavior. First, be Christlike. Think of others better than yourselves. Share. If you have been welding  for a prolonged time and someone else is waiting for the machine, let them use the machine for a while. This is being a professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are learning to weld, and you can't get something to work the way you want - ASK SOMEONE! Learn! Become a professional. Learn the craft. This is an educational space. You might think it will be quick and you can just get it done “your” way and not learn how to do it correctly. Be a Professional and learn the proper way, and then be available to teach others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very important, and likely difficult part of being a professional is to correct others when they are not being professional. It is your responsibility to speak up when you see somebody doing something inappropriate. If you see somebody doing something unsafe, not resetting the space, or being unprofessional, the professional thing to do is to remind them of the three commandments and ask them politely to correct their action. This is OUR space, not any individual's. As a group, we expect everyone in the space to keep the space safe, clean, and operable for everyone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If someone acts disgracefully unprofessional to you in the Welding Lab, you are welcome to bring the issue to Justin or Nick's attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Welding Knowledge==&lt;br /&gt;
Welding is the process of joining metals together. It is a form of additive manufacturing. There are several different types of welding, and the Welding Lab uses most of these including spot welding. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Welding Lab, metals are joined together using MIG (Metal Inert Gas), TIG (Tungsten Inert Gas), Stick and spot welding.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each welder has its own special purpose and benefits.  MIG is fast and much easier to learn than TIG welding. Spot welding is only used with sheet metal.  TIG welding produces very clean welds and the heat is more confined to a smaller area.  TIG will also allow you to weld very thin metals. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
These are a few good steps to having a successful weld.  &lt;br /&gt;
* If you experience a fire alarm while working in the Welding Lab turn off the welder power/exhaust fan if you safely can and proceed to the nearest safe exit.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the materials have no coatings. Welding of some coatings like cadmium plating or galvanized metal can produce toxic fumes that could be fatal. &lt;br /&gt;
* Argon acts as an asphyxiant and will displace oxygen. Do not work in a confined space with argon do to the possibility of a low oxygen condition.&lt;br /&gt;
* When setting gas pressure for any of the welders make sure you follow the recommendations listed.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Materials should be properly prepped and clean for best results. &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the process you are using is correct for your material type. &lt;br /&gt;
* Double check the weld settings and use a piece of scrap to practice before welding on your project.&lt;br /&gt;
* Only weld steel and aluminum. Do not attempt to weld unknown materials. &lt;br /&gt;
Here are a couple things to keep in mind:&lt;br /&gt;
* Material will be very hot after welding so always think before touching.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the welder is properly grounded before attempting to weld.&lt;br /&gt;
* Never weld in wet clothes or around water. &lt;br /&gt;
* Never try to weld any type of tank that has ever held flammable liquids. This is very dangerous and can explode! &lt;br /&gt;
* Always check your welding hood settings prior to welding. (start with a darker setting and work your way down.&lt;br /&gt;
* Welding takes lots of practice so don't be afraid to ask for help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ygLbldJF_dc}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Bead Blasting Knowledge==&lt;br /&gt;
Bead blasting is the process of using compressed air to propel small glass beads for ablating and cleaning a material surface.  Different types of blast media are used in industry including Soda, Walnut shells, Sand and many more material types.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
These are a few good steps to having Success with glass beading.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the material is free from heavy grease and dirt. &lt;br /&gt;
* The material needs to physically fit into the blast cabinet.  &lt;br /&gt;
Here are a couple things to keep in mind:&lt;br /&gt;
* Never point the nozzle at the gloves or window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the power switch is turned on before use.&lt;br /&gt;
* Always wait 5 minutes after use before opening the cabinet door. This gives some time for the dust to settle. &lt;br /&gt;
* Never try to bead blast anything flammable. Blasting can sometimes create sparks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep liquids out of the cabinet. &lt;br /&gt;
* Never activate the foot pedal with the cabinet door open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Canvas Certification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;{{PAGENAME}} Certification Quiz Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Welding Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=gallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |imageproperty=Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Prototype_Lab&amp;diff=12036</id>
		<title>Prototype Lab</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Prototype_Lab&amp;diff=12036"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:28:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
  |Has ace=Allison Rodgers;arodgers24@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
  |Is facility = True&lt;br /&gt;
  |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prototype Lab Logo.png|300px|frameless|left]][[File:prototype_lab.jpeg|400px|thumb|The Prototype Lab]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Prototype Lab contains a selection of 3D printers and two CO2 laser cutters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current Maker Hub Student Staff in the {{PAGENAME}} are '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}})&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Schedule=&lt;br /&gt;
View the most up-to-date {{PAGENAME}} schedule &amp;lt;!--[https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1uQO_OlW3LuTuzLFD_FmjB0ALpHC3SB9a1uJUOV2xO_I/edit?usp=sharing Here]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10904.jpg|none|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Equipment Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::true]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Prototype Lab]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has make=Company&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has model=Model |+width=10em&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has ace.Has name=Current Ace&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=broadtable&lt;br /&gt;
 |mainlabel=Name&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Equipment by Icon==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]][[Has icon::+]] [[Is located in facility::Prototype Lab]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon=Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=plainlist&lt;br /&gt;
 |template=EquipmentIconGallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |outrotemplate=EquipmentIconGalleryOutro&lt;br /&gt;
 |limit=100&lt;br /&gt;
 |link=none&lt;br /&gt;
 |sort=Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[3 commandments]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1. Safety First===&lt;br /&gt;
Safety First is the rule we hold highest of the three. Given the delicate nature of our machines, and the different chemicals and materials we use in the Prototype lab, this rule applies to both the safety of you, and the machines.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keeping yourself safe in the Prototype Lab is very easy, as there are very few ways to hurt yourself or the machines. However, proper procedure must be followed at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basic principles of how to implement Safety First in the Prototype Lab:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not touch the extruder heads of the 3D printers when they are running. They will be very hot and will burn you. Wait for the machine to cool off.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use gloves when handling chemicals such as Sodium Hydroxide (use the heat protecting gloves when retrieving items from the Sodium Hydroxide bath), Isopropyl or Denatured Alcohol (use Nitrile gloves if handling extensively after removing from the Form Wash), and Lacquer Thinner (use Nitrile gloves when using lacquer thinner to clean residue off of engraved Hydro Flasks). You may use gloves whenever you feel necessary, but these are circumstances where gloves are absolutely required.&lt;br /&gt;
*In addition to wearing gloves when around the Sodium Hydroxide, you must also wear safety goggles (preferably the goggles, but if those are unavailable then use safety glasses). A lab coat needs to be worn to protect from splashes. All of these items can be found within the lab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure you read through the SDS (Safety Data Sheets) binder mounted by the sink so that you are up-to-date on safety procedures regarding the chemicals within the lab.&lt;br /&gt;
*If chemicals ever get on your skin or in your eyes, follow the SDS. Wash it off or out (there is an eye washing station in front of the Machine Shop about 30 feet feet away). If it is an emergency, do what you need to do to make sure you and those around you are safe.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure you know how to use the spill kit (located to the right of the sink).&lt;br /&gt;
*If there is a chemical spill, we do have a spill kit. First, evacuate the lab and get everyone out. This means the lab should be shut down until the spill has been properly dealt with. Second, call Justin Johnson whose information should be posted next to the Emergency Response Guide (bright yellow and by the door leading to the main space). If Justin does not answer, call the Campus Public Safety office (formerly Security Services) whose information will be in the Emergency Response Guide or can be found online. Third, if you feel it is safe to do so, deploy the spill kit (located to the right of the sink).&lt;br /&gt;
*Be aware that laser cut items can have sharp edges that could cut you.&lt;br /&gt;
*Be careful when trying to remove support material by hand from a print off of the Dimension. When the support material breaks, it leaves sharp edges and shatters extremely sharp shards that will cut you if you are not careful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2. Reset the Space===&lt;br /&gt;
The Prototype Lab has a specific organization to it, even though sometimes it looks like chaos. Put whatever you use back where it belongs. There is a place for everything and everything has a place. This rule applies to everything in the space. If you move a chair, put it back. If you use a tool, put it back. If you use a pen, put it back. Do not leave your projects in the Prototype Lab, take them with you. Do not leave random note sheets that pertain to nothing out. Throw away your trash and recycling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have allowed food and drink in the space. Resetting the Space means that you don’t leave wrappers, or trays, or anything that wasn’t there when you came in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are working/volunteering in the space, this still applies to you. Do not take tools from the Hub and then store them in the Lab. If we need more tools, speak with Allison or Spencer and they can evaluate the situation and, if necessary, they will get more tools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have started your project on a machine, make sure to clear the project from the program on the Prototype Lab computer. If you have a part you want to reuse, place the part inside the Prototype Lab Part Storage Folder on the computers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we understand that sometimes you need to leave things out. Maybe you are in the middle of a large print and you need something to run overnight. In cases like this, it is okay, but you NEED to '''''leave a note''''' on your system so that others know the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When parts finish on a 3D printer, remove them from the build plate and place them in the completed parts bin so that the owner can pick up their part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always put any unused materials from the laser cutter back on the storage shelf, and throw away unusable scrap.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the computer of any files or images left over after completing your project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sweep when needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately clean up any spilled Formlabs resin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always leave the space better than you found it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3. Be Professional===&lt;br /&gt;
This commandment has two sides to it. It covers the idea of acting like professional (which Webster’s defines as “exhibiting a courteous, conscientious, and generally businesslike manner in the workplace”). The term also describes the standards of education and training that prepare members of the profession with the particular knowledge and skills necessary to perform their specific role within that profession. Hopefully, you are learning both of these as part of your education at George Fox University. In the Prototype Lab we expect you to develop as a courteous, conscientious, and skilled craftsman, understanding the tools and equipment in the Maker Hub and how to use them effectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Being a professional has some obvious ramifications in terms of behavior. First, be Christlike. Think of others better than yourselves. Share. If you have been printing a lot or using the laser cutter for a prolonged time and someone else is waiting for the machine, let them use the machine for a while. This is being a professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are working with a machine, and you don’t know the proper way to do what you are attempting - ASK SOMEONE! Learn! Become a professional. Learn the craft. This is an educational space. You might think it will be quick and you can just get it done “your” way and not learn how to do it correctly. Be a Professional and learn the proper way, and then be available to teach others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very important, and likely difficult part of being a professional is to correct others when they are not being professional. It is your responsibility to speak up when you see somebody doing something inappropriate. If you see somebody doing something unsafe, not resetting the space, or being unprofessional, the professional thing to do is to remind them of the three commandments and ask them politely to correct their action. This is OUR space, not any individual's. As a group, we expect everyone in the space to keep the space safe, clean, and operable for everyone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If someone acts disgracefully unprofessional to you in the Prototype Lab, you are welcome to bring the issue to the attention of the Prototype Lab student staff or the Maker Hub staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General 3D Printing Knowledge==&lt;br /&gt;
3D printing is the process of joining material together to create a three-dimensional object using computer control. It is a form of additive manufacturing. Objects are created using a 3D model. There are many different types of 3D printing, and the Prototype Lab utilizes two types which are FDM (fused deposit modeling) and SLA (stereolithography). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Prototype Lab, objects are most commonly printed from an STL file. This means if you create a part in SolidWorks that you must save the file as a .stl instead of a .sldprt . Once the file is in STL form, it can then be processed by a slicer software. The slicer software converts the 3D model into thin layers and produces a G-code file. G-codes communicate with the chosen 3D printer, giving it directions on how to print the object. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different 3D printers will run with different slicer programs. Typically a program will allow you to edit various parts of the process. One common consideration will be the layer thickness. This is the resolution at which the printer will print at. Each printer will have its own range of resolution. The thinner the layer thickness (higher resolution), the more detail you will get, but the print will be created more slowly. The thicker the layers (lower resolution), the less detail you will receive, but the object will be printed more quickly. Another consideration is support. For objects with overhangs, holes, etc., support will be needed. This will give the printer a surface to print on so that it can continue to build the print layer by layer. Each printer uses supports differently. Some printers have break away support while other have dissolvable support material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that '''every print should be recorded in the Job Log'''. This allows the Lab to track the material usages and success rates of the printers, as well as recording the prices of every print. To record your print in the job log, go to the [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/16fEdNcuvR_GSNV2Emy1P7SpJdetXU7ts9uQy-Ok7dRk/edit?usp=sharing Job Log spreadsheet] and fill out the required fields. A good time to fill it out is right after you have finished setting up a print.  &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3Dsupports.png|250px|thumb|right|Example of an object (blue) printed with supports (white)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are common places of potential failure which you should watch for every print. The following points of failure specifically apply to FDM prints.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Adhesion:&lt;br /&gt;
**When the print first starts, it is prudent to ensure that the filament is properly adhering to the build plate.&lt;br /&gt;
**Watch the print until the first dozen layers have been printed to make sure it is starting off successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
**The print can start sliding around the plate at anytime, although it is much more likely to fail toward the beginning of the print.&lt;br /&gt;
**A tall and skinny print is much more likely to struggle with adhesion than a short and stout print. Taking time to discern the best orientation for your print is always a good call.&lt;br /&gt;
**Adding a raft (sometimes called a brim) will also help if you print is struggling with staying adhered to the plate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Clogging&lt;br /&gt;
**Sometimes the extruder will clog causing the print to fail.&lt;br /&gt;
**This typically can be seen when a clump of filament balls up at the end of the nozzle.&lt;br /&gt;
**If this occurs, immediately cancel the print and remove the clumped filament. Make sure that the nozzle is still able to extrude filament, if not, you may need to open up the extruder and clean it. Keep working on it until you are able to extrude filament again.&lt;br /&gt;
*Air Extruding&lt;br /&gt;
**This means that the extruder thinks it is extruding filament when it really is not.&lt;br /&gt;
**Immediately cancel the print. Then restart the print.&lt;br /&gt;
**If the printer is still air extruding, cancel the print and unload the filament. You can try reloading and starting the print again.&lt;br /&gt;
**If the problem persists, you will probably need to take the extruder apart and clean it out before attempting any further prints.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1. Printer Types===&lt;br /&gt;
There are many different types of printers, such as Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM), Stereolithography (SLA), Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Digital Light Processing (DLP), Electronic Beam Melting (EBM), Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM), Binder Jetting (BJ)... Each printer type employs different materials. The Prototype Lab has FDM and SLA machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information about FDM and SLA printers and which machines these are and what materials they can use which. In each printer's page, one can simply link it to this so they don't have to describe materials, just simply state which ones are used with it. Mostly this is all here so I remember to do it or someone else sees it and wants to do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;SLA Printing Anchor&amp;quot;&amp;gt;SLA Printing&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InvertedSLA.png|302x302px|thumb|right|Inverted SLA Process]]&lt;br /&gt;
Stereolithography, SLA, is a part of the manufacturing technology of vat polymerization. This means a light source (laser) is used to cure liquid resin into a hard plastic.&lt;br /&gt;
The Form 2 is the only 3D printer that the Prototype Lab has that is an SLA printer. It utilizes the Upside Down or Inverted orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
The resin tank has a clear bottom with a surface the resin will not stick to. This allows the resin to cure against the bottom of the tank.&lt;br /&gt;
The build platform is lowered into the resin until it is hovering above the bottom surface of the tank, as far away as the height of the layer to be constructed.&lt;br /&gt;
The laser is directed through the bottom of the tank and cures a layer of resin onto the build platform. Then, the resin tank slides over and the build platform raises. The wiper will then sweep across the tank to circulate the resin.&lt;br /&gt;
The build platform will lower again, and the process will be repeated until the print is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
Due to friction caused by de-laminating every layer, every part should be canted in its orientation. This means the part should be angled to reduce the cross sectional area needing to be shifted to de-laminate each layer. This de-lamination also causes the Form 2 to be the Prototype Lab's slowest 3D printer.&lt;br /&gt;
Once a part is finished on the Form 2, it must be removed off of the build plate. Try to avoid scraping the build plate when removing parts. Any excess resin must be washed off using the Form Wash, the part must be air dried so that any isopropyl alcohol from the Wash has evaporated, the part should be cured in the Form Cure, and supports should be clipped off. Any remaining support marks can be sanded off if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
Extra information on SLA Printing can be found [https://formlabs.com/blog/ultimate-guide-to-stereolithography-sla-3d-printing/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;FDM Printing Anchor&amp;quot;&amp;gt;FDM Printing&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) printers use a thermoplastic filament, which is heated to its melting point, then extruded to create layers which then build an object. There are many different types of FDM printers. Some use a modeling material and a support material, some just use a modeling material which when creating support will use a different style of layering that allows the filament to break off easily, some are able to use multiple filaments at once allowing for multicolored objects to be created. [[File:Filament_Spool.jpg|250px|thumb|right|Example of a filament spool for a FDM printer.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Prusa printers use only uses model material for supports, and the Markforge printer only uses model material as well (however it will layer another filament for extra support). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filament for these printers comes in spools (basically thin plastic ropes that are wound up). The filament is fed through an extruder head, heated to the desired temperature, then extruded (similar to what happens with a hot glue gun). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FDM printers can work with various materials, in the Prototype Lab we mainly stick to PLA which is used by the Prusas. The Markforge uses a material called Onyx (nylon and plastic mix) and will layer in another filament such as Carbon Fiber, Kevlar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Laser Cutting Knowledge==&lt;br /&gt;
Laser cutting directs a high-powered laser through optics. The laser cutter follows a predetermined pattern to engrave or cut the material. Laser cutting is a great way to get a professional-looking surface finish. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Can be used for many different materials ranging between wood, glass, rock, plastics, and even engraving Hydroflasks. At this time, the laser cutter in the Prototype Lab is not set up for metal etching.&lt;br /&gt;
*Works best on flat surfaces or cylinders with constant diameters.&lt;br /&gt;
*Performing a cut or engrave with the laser will always begin with an image, pdf, DXF, or similar file.  When using SolidWorks you will need to save your file as a DXF using the selected face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a couple common steps that must be done correctly when using the laser cutter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Always make sure that the lens and cone are clean before starting a print.&lt;br /&gt;
*Correctly focus the laser above the material, using the correct focusing tool for the lens type.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose the correct material profile for the material you are using.&lt;br /&gt;
*Clean the bed of the laser cutter when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Prusa XL]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canvas Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;{{PAGENAME}} Certification Quiz Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Prototype Lab]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=gallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |imageproperty=Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
}}--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=PCB_Lab&amp;diff=12035</id>
		<title>PCB Lab</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=PCB_Lab&amp;diff=12035"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:28:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is facility = True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1288&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PCB Lab Logo.png|300px|frameless|left]][[File:pcb_lab.jpeg|400px|thumb|right|The PCB Lab]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Printed Circuit Board lab contains an electronics station (as in the Hub) with the Metcal soldering station and microscope. It also contains a Voltera V-One PCB Printer (which can print Gerber files onto a board, and can also print solder paste onto normally fabricated boards), a manual Pick-and-Place machine, a Reflow Oven, and a Reflow Station.  The lab is stocked with a good supply of 0603 and 0805 surface mount components.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current Ace of the {{PAGENAME}} is '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name|+index=0 }}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Schedule=&lt;br /&gt;
View the most up-to-date PCB Lab schedule [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1M91j-_Qfp9NXlvt4ZF8QRQ2Hq3x50QioqZylHDnSZmc/edit?usp=sharing on this Google Sheet.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Equipment Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::true]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::PCB Lab]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has make=Company&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has model=Model |+width=10em&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has ace.Has name=Current Ace&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has ace.Has email address=Current Email &lt;br /&gt;
 |format=broadtable&lt;br /&gt;
 |mainlabel=Name&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Equipment by Icon==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]][[Has icon::+]] [[Is located in facility::PCB Lab]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon=Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=plainlist&lt;br /&gt;
 |template=EquipmentIconGallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |outrotemplate=EquipmentIconGalleryOutro&lt;br /&gt;
 |limit=100&lt;br /&gt;
 |link=none&lt;br /&gt;
 |sort=Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Basic Tools=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PTP750W_front.png|thumb|150px]] The PCB Lab has a Brother PT-Touch P750W [https://www.brother-usa.com/products/PTP750W Brother PT-Touch P750W] label maker for labeling items. To use it: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the [https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/brother-iprint-label/id523047493?mt=8 iOS App] or the [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.brother.ptouch.iprintandlabel&amp;amp;hl=en_US Android App].&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the label maker is powered on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Within the app, select the gear to open settings.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Printer.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Set Manually.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the IP Address 10.90.12.132.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Connect.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Check Media.&amp;quot; This will get the correct size of the tape that is currently in the label maker. You should click this button often, especially when you change the tape in the label maker or start a new session of label printing.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; at the top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can now print labels for labeling things in the PCB Lab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=3 Commandments=&lt;br /&gt;
=== 1. Safety First ===&lt;br /&gt;
Safety First is the rule we hold highest of the three. This rule applies to both the safety of you as well as others  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keeping yourself and others safe in the PCB Lab is very important, as there are possibilities for accidents if you don't follow the safety guidelines.  Safety starts with you so don't depend on others to keep you safe.  There is a first aid kit located on the south wall near the Wood Shop door.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The following rules must be followed at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the same safety rules from the machine shop apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Safety glasses must be worn when soldering or running Volter printers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No horseplay in the PCB Lab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t do anything distracting to yourself or others while operating equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Food or drink is allowed when not operating equipment. Wash your hands after soldering or working with solder paste and chemicals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not attempt to operate machinery in the PCB Lab that you have not been certified on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not argue with volunteers or shop staff. Contact Justin Johnson if you have issues that need to be resolved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not operate equipment without a lab supervisor or trained volunteer in the lab with you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset the space. Make the area you are working in ready for the next person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you see a safety violation inform the person immediately and encourage them to comply with the policies&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t do anything that would require an additional rule to be added to this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2. Reset the Space ===&lt;br /&gt;
The PCB Lab has a specific organization to it. Put whatever you use back where it belongs. There is a place for everything and everything has a place. This rule applies to everything in the space. If you use a tool, put it back. If you use a pen, put it back. Throw away your trash and recycling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Please put back the equipment the way you found it. Clean up solder and any spills or messes you make. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Always put any unused materials back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Always leave the space better than you found it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3. Be Professional ===&lt;br /&gt;
This commandment has two sides to it. It covers the idea of acting like professional (which Webster’s defines as “exhibiting a courteous, conscientious, and generally businesslike manner in the workplace”). The term also describes the standards of education and training that prepare members of the profession with the particular knowledge and skills necessary to perform their specific role within that profession. Hopefully, you are learning both of these as part of your education at George Fox University. In the PCB Lab we expect you to develop as a courteous, conscientious, and skilled craftsman, understanding the tools and equipment in the Maker Hub and how to use them effectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Being a professional has some obvious ramifications in terms of behavior. First, be Christlike. Think of others better than yourselves. Share. If you have been using a machine for a prolonged time and someone else is waiting, let them use the machine for a while. This is being a professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are learning to how to use a machine, and you can't get something to work the way you want - ASK SOMEONE! Learn! Become a professional. Learn the craft. This is an educational space. You might think it will be quick and you can just get it done “your” way and not learn how to do it correctly. Be a Professional and learn the proper way, and then be available to teach others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very important, and likely difficult part of being a professional is to correct others when they are not being professional. It is your responsibility to speak up when you see somebody doing something inappropriate. If you see somebody doing something unsafe, not resetting the space, or being unprofessional, the professional thing to do is to remind them of the three commandments and ask them politely to correct their action. This is OUR space, not any individual's. As a group, we expect everyone in the space to keep the space safe, clean, and operable for everyone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If someone acts disgracefully unprofessional to you in the PCB Lab, you are welcome to bring the issue to Justin or Nick's attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General PCB Lab Knowledge==&lt;br /&gt;
Making/repairing circuits can be rewarding and fun as well as time consuming. One of the most used machines in the PCB Lab is the soldering iron. If you have already certified on the soldering irons in the Hub (and your quiz is up to date), that certification transfers to the soldering irons in the PCB Lab. This protocol works in the opposite direction too... if you have certified on the PCB Lab soldering irons, that certification transfers to the soldering irons in the Hub. Granted, the soldering irons in the PCB Lab may be equipped with smaller tips and other accessories that aid with surface-mount soldering. Ask the PCB Lab ace to share best practices in surface-mount soldering. Watch some videos about it to help fill in any knowledge gaps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the PCB Lab, circuits are built and repaired using a variety of prototyping equipment.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The equipment in the PCB Lab has its own special purpose and benefits. The pick n place allows you to quickly place surface mount components. Voltera printers use conductive ink to print out the traces for producing a circuit board. The curing oven quickly heats the paste on a circuit board and bonds the surface mount components to the circuit pads. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
These are a few steps that will help you be successful in the PCB Lab.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Always double check your circuit designs prior to attempting to print. If you can have a second set of eyes look for any issues that is always a good idea.    &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the components you are using can handle the current required. &lt;br /&gt;
* Ask someone knowledgeable if you have questions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Double check the installation direction of your components prior to installation. &lt;br /&gt;
Here are a couple things to keep in mind:&lt;br /&gt;
* Most of the solder in the PCB lab contains lead. Wash your hands after soldering. &lt;br /&gt;
* Use the fume extractors when soldering to prevent inhaling fumes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Be aware of what your fingers are touching when soldering or working with hot equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
* Be aware of people and what they are doing around you. Keep track of where your soldering iron is pointing and touching.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Be aware of what is on the floor around you. Don't trip on any cords or other students stuff.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Wear safety glasses when soldering or working with the drilling head on the Voltera. &lt;br /&gt;
* If something feels like it could be dangerous ask a supervisor before attempting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Canvas Certification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;{{PAGENAME}} Certification Quiz Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click this link to be directed to the [https://makerhub-internal.georgefox.edu/wiki/{{PAGENAMEE}} internal site] for inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voltera Maintenance ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click this link to be directed to the [https://makerhub-internal.georgefox.edu/wiki/{{PAGENAMEE}} internal site] for Maintenance.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Machine_Shop&amp;diff=12034</id>
		<title>Machine Shop</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Machine_Shop&amp;diff=12034"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T23:27:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Asset 1@3x.png|300px|frameless|left]][[File:Machine_Shop.jpg|400px|thumb|right|The Machine Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
With more than 1,500 sq. ft., the machine shop contains a variety of metal working machinery. The capabilities include metal laser cutting, milling, turning as well as sheet metal equipment.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For questions about the {{PAGENAME}}, email one of the shop supervisors: '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}). &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
  |Is facility=True&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has usage type=Normal&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has priority=20&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has span reservation allotment=6&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has span reservation period=14&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1252&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Schedule=&lt;br /&gt;
View the most up-to-date {{PAGENAME}} schedule [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/14WiQypaqa_Y7ZhVRLeUJ3RdiiTvJ-6q6ma2SderZcIM/edit#gid=0 On this Google sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Equipment Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::true]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Machine Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has make=Company&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has model=Model |+width=10em&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has ace.Has name=Current Ace&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=broadtable&lt;br /&gt;
 |mainlabel=Name&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]][[Has icon::+]] [[Is located in facility::Machine Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon=Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=plainlist&lt;br /&gt;
 |template=EquipmentIconGallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |outrotemplate=EquipmentIconGalleryOutro&lt;br /&gt;
 |limit=100&lt;br /&gt;
 |link=none&lt;br /&gt;
 |sort=Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
==[[3 commandments]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[CNC Press Break]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety First===&lt;br /&gt;
Safety First is the rule we hold highest of the three. This rule applies to both the safety of you as well as others  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keeping yourself safe in the Machine Shop is very important, as there are possibilities for accidents if you don't follow the safety guidelines.  Safety starts with you so don't depend on others to keep you safe.  There is a first aid kit located on the south wall near the Wood Shop door.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The following rules must be followed at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Safety glasses must be worn when crossing into the shop area marked on the floor.&lt;br /&gt;
*No horseplay in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
*Don’t do anything distracting to yourself or others while operating machinery. &lt;br /&gt;
*Do not wear any loose clothing, jewelry, or lanyards. &lt;br /&gt;
*No hats or open toed shoes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Hair will not extend below the collar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not wear gloves while operating powered machinery.&lt;br /&gt;
*Food or drink is allowed when not operating machinery and it is kept a safe distance away from the machines.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to operate machinery in the shop that you have not been certified on by GFU engineering personnel. &lt;br /&gt;
*Do not argue with volunteers or shop staff. Contact Justin Johnson if you have issues that need to be resolved.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not operate machinery without a shop supervisor or trained volunteer in the shop with you. Never operate equipment alone in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
*Reset the space. Make the area you are working in ready for the next person using the dust broom and vacuum cleaner.&lt;br /&gt;
*The first aid kit is located in the machine shop, next to the Wood Shop doors.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you see a safety violation inform the person immediately and encourage them to comply with the policies&lt;br /&gt;
*Don’t do anything that would require an additional rule to be added to this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reset the Space===&lt;br /&gt;
The Machine Shop has a specific organization to it. Put whatever you use back where it belongs. There is a place for everything and everything has a place. This rule applies to everything in the space. If you use a tool, put it back. If you use a pen, put it back. Throw away your trash and recycling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we understand that sometimes you need to leave projects out. Maybe you are in the middle of a large project and you need something left overnight. In cases like this, it is okay, but you NEED to make prior arrangements  with Nick or Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please put back the Machinery the way you found it. Clean up chips and any messes you make. NEVER use shop air to clean off the machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always put any unused materials back on the storage shelf, and put small pieces in the scrap box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always leave the space better than you found it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Be Professional===&lt;br /&gt;
This commandment has two sides to it. It covers the idea of acting like professional (which Webster’s defines as “exhibiting a courteous, conscientious, and generally businesslike manner in the workplace”). The term also describes the standards of education and training that prepare members of the profession with the particular knowledge and skills necessary to perform their specific role within that profession. Hopefully, you are learning both of these as part of your education at George Fox University. In the Machine Shop we expect you to develop as a courteous, conscientious, and skilled craftsman, understanding the tools and equipment in the Maker Hub and how to use them effectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Being a professional has some obvious ramifications in terms of behavior. First, be Christlike. Think of others as better than yourself. Share. If you have been machining a for a prolonged time and someone else is waiting for the machine, let them use the machine for a while. This is being a professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are learning to how to use a machine, and you can't get something to work the way you want - ASK SOMEONE! Learn! Become a professional. Learn the craft. This is an educational space. You might think it will be quick and you can just get it done “your” way and not learn how to do it correctly. Be a professional and learn the proper way, and then be available to teach others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very important, and likely difficult part of being a professional is to correct others when they are not being professional. It is your responsibility to speak up when you see somebody doing something inappropriate. If you see somebody doing something unsafe, not resetting the space, or being unprofessional, the professional thing to do is to remind them of the three commandments and ask them politely to correct their behavior. This is OUR space, not any individual's. As a group, we expect everyone in the space to keep the space safe, clean, and operable for everyone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If someone acts unprofessionally in the Machine Shop, you are welcome to bring the issue to Justin or Nick's attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Machine Shop Knowledge==&lt;br /&gt;
Machining is the process of removing material so it is subtractive manufacturing. We have a variety of machines in the shop. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 3 main processes include milling, turning, and drilling.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each machine has its own special purpose and benefits.  The drill press will produce holes quickly but normally has less precision than using a milling machine.  The lathe is normally used for making round parts and drilling.  The metal laser is good for making fast precise cuts in sheet metal. The waterjet can cut steel up to 1&amp;quot; thick but it takes a long time to cut thick materials. The finger brake allows you to make bends in sheet metal.  The shear is good for cutting straight lines in thin sheet metal or making smaller pieces.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Here are a few good steps to being successful in the Machine Shop.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure your workpiece is held securely before making cuts. &lt;br /&gt;
* Metal can be hot and sharp so always be careful when picking up material pieces. &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure you you have been properly trained before attempting to use a machine. &lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hands away from moving parts on machines.&lt;br /&gt;
* Always ask if you have questions on how to do something. &lt;br /&gt;
Here are a couple things to keep in mind:&lt;br /&gt;
* Material can be very hot after machining.&lt;br /&gt;
* Machining can produce very sharp edges.&lt;br /&gt;
* Never try to operate machinery when you are tired. &lt;br /&gt;
* Never work in the shop with loose clothing or items that could get pulled into a machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Canvas Certification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop Certification Quiz Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Machine Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=gallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |imageproperty=Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Virtual_Reality_Welding_Station&amp;diff=12033</id>
		<title>Virtual Reality Welding Station</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Virtual_Reality_Welding_Station&amp;diff=12033"/>
		<updated>2026-09-28T16:39:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Vault&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Miller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Augmented Arc Welding Simulator&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=MJ155089D&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Welding simulator.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:AugmentedArc_Simplified_Package.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Miller AugmentedArc&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1311&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 }}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The virtual reality welder is the industry’s most realistic welding simulation solution for classroom training. For beginner to advanced-level weld students, the AugmentedArc System simulates multiple welding processes, blending real-world and computer-generated images into a unique, augmented reality environment. Below is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?time_continue=193&amp;amp;v=wYRymhZrFmk}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* Base metal - The metal pieces that are being joined together. For the simulator there are several base metal configurations in the form of the blue coupons.&lt;br /&gt;
* Coupons - Small pieces of metal used to practice welding.&lt;br /&gt;
* Weld Metal/Electrode - The metal added to the base metal to create a weld.&lt;br /&gt;
* Torch - The piece that is held while welding and feeds the weld metal into the base metal.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIG Welding - Metal inert gas is a welding process in which an electric arc forms between a consumable MIG wire electrode and the base metal, which heats the base metal, causing them to melt and join. Along with the wire electrode, a shielding gas feeds through the welding torch, which shields the process from contaminants in the air. This is the easiest and most common type of welding and it is recommended that you start with this method. DC or AC current can be used for actual MIG welding but the AR welding station only uses DC current.&lt;br /&gt;
* TIG Welding - Tungsten inert gas is an arc welding process that uses a non-consumable tungsten electrode to produce the weld. The weld area and electrode is protected from oxidation or other atmospheric contamination by an inert shielding gas (argon or helium), and a filler metal is normally used, though some welds, known as autogenous welds, do not require it. This is difficult to master but provides great control when creating a weld. It is also useful for welding many metals besides steel. &lt;br /&gt;
* Stick Welding - A manual arc welding process that uses a consumable electrode covered with a flux to lay the weld. An electric current, in the form of either alternating current or direct current from a welding power supply, is used to form an electric arc between the electrode and the metals to be joined. The workpiece and the electrode melts forming a pool of molten metal (weld pool) that cools to form a joint. As the weld is laid, the flux coating of the electrode disintegrates, giving off vapors that serve as a shielding gas and providing a layer of slag, both of which protect the weld area from atmospheric contamination. This is the oldest form of welding and is still popular; however there is not a stick welder in the maker hub.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:O276533H MIL.pdf|Virtual Reality Welding Station User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The operation of the AR Welding station is simple. First you will select a torch for the type of weld you want to practice and plug in the machine. After that it is a simple matter of setting up an exercise based on difficulty, welding method, and weld type. See the image below to learn how to adjust different weld parameters and navigate the software. It is recommended that you start with the pre-programmed exercise to begin and then move on to custom exercises as you become more experienced. The general weld type is determined by what piece is being welded; the options include liner and cylindrical butt, lap, and T joints. Before the exercise begins you will have to calibrate the AR helmet. The calibration process occurs at the beginning of the exercise and is completed by following the instructions given by the AR helmet. After the calibration is completed complete the exercise, view the results, and then repeat. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the virtual reality welder, students will get the idea as to how the welding machines work, whether that be arc, MIG, or TIG welding. Once students earn a score of 90 or higher on the simulation, they have the opportunity to work with the actual welders in the welding shop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up Simulator&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug in extension cord (make sure it won’t trip anyone) for power.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip switch on back of machine to turn on. &lt;br /&gt;
# Press power button on the front of the machine and wait for the system to start up.&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach welding process of your choice (see welding processes section down below).&lt;br /&gt;
# At login screen, select user. Guest works well. &lt;br /&gt;
# Select right or left handed. This is important because it affects the angle the torch should be held at when performing an exercise. &lt;br /&gt;
# Open an exercise. There are four choices for creating an exercise: Open, GMAW (MIG), GTAW (TIG), SMAW (Stick). If you know what type of weld you want to practice go for the open exercise because it will allow for the most weld customization such as wire feed speed (WFS), wire diameter, and weld pattern. If this is a new experience, select the type of weld you are practicing and roll with one of the preset courses. &lt;br /&gt;
# On the top of the screen the welding parameters are displayed and will be in red if they are not set properly. Use the control panel (pictured below) to adjust them as needed. Most often you will need to adjust the voltage, amperage, and gas flow rate. This is to account for the electrode and base metal thickness so that the weld will penetrate properly. [[File:Weld Panel.png|none|thumb|594x594px| (1) Power On/Off Button Use button to turn system on and off. (2) Helmet Light Control Use button to turn helmet light on and off, and change intensity of light. (3) Filler Rod Light Control (TIG) Control not used with latest software.   (4) Volume Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease volume of helmet speakers.   (5) Display (Zoom) Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to magnify images on display screens.   (6) Augmented Reality (AR) Button Use button to turn augmented reality feature on and off.   (7) System Settings Button Use button to access system settings menu. Use the settings menu to change language, units of measure (standard or metric), camera settings and other parameters. After starting an exercise, use the System Settings button to adjust video device settings and optimize AR tracking for the room lighting conditions.  (8) Clean Slag Button Use button to remove slag from augmented reality workpiece when Stick and FCAW welding. Slag must be cleaned for test results to be displayed.   (9) Shielding Gas Flow Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease the shielding gas flow for the MIG and TIG weld processes.   (10) Gun Trigger Selection Button Use button to select either two-step or four-step trigger operation.   (11) Amperage/Wire Feed Speed Selection Button Use button to select the weld parameter (amperage or wire feed speed) to be adjusted (see Item 12).  (12) Amperage/Wire Feed Speed Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease amperage or wire feed speed (see item 11).  (13) AC/Polarity Selection Button Use button to select AC weld output or DCEP or DCEN weld polarity.  (14) Voltage Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease weld voltage.   (15) System Navigation Buttons Use buttons to navigate AR system programs and select menu items.  (16) OK (System Selection) Button Use button to activate selected menu items.  (17) System Cancel Button Use button to stop the AR program or activity in use, or return to the previous screen.  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Place Helmet on head and size to head. &lt;br /&gt;
# Follow instructions in the helmet to calibrate the simulator and then begin welding.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press cancel to exit. There is also an option to view results that is very helpful. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching Welding Processes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MIG:&lt;br /&gt;
# Take the connector of the MIG torch and align the 4 holes with the connecting port on the front of the machine (left side).&lt;br /&gt;
# Twist the threaded end, but do not over tighten.&lt;br /&gt;
# To remove, unscrew the connector.&lt;br /&gt;
Stick:&lt;br /&gt;
# Grab clamp with the small cord attached.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align the pins with the 5 holes of the connector and with the connecting port on the front of the machine (right side).&lt;br /&gt;
# To remove, press the silver button and softly pull straight out (do not twist).&lt;br /&gt;
# See item 8 above, use Clean Slag Button to assure test results will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
TIG:&lt;br /&gt;
# Grab the cable with TIG torch attached.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align the 4 holes of the connector with the connecting port on the front of the machine (left side - same as MIG).&lt;br /&gt;
# Screw in while holding the connector (do not over tighten).&lt;br /&gt;
# To remove, unscrew the connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clean up:&lt;br /&gt;
# Take the helmet off and place it on the 2nd shelf of the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect welding process.&lt;br /&gt;
# Exit out of the exercise.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press power button on front of the machine and wait for screen to be completely blank.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to off on the back of machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Unplug the extension cord and leave it coiled up neatly underneath the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
# Stack work pieces neatly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Coil up all cables of torches used and neatly place on the bottom shelf of the cart; leaving the space better than you found it if possible. &lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure that the cables are not tangled and do not pull on them if they are. This can damage the cables. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t drop the helmet, always place on cart when your not wearing it. It is expensive so take good care of it.&lt;br /&gt;
* When someone enters the room, make sure they know about the extension cord to prevent tripping. &lt;br /&gt;
* Do not aggressively over tighten the connectors of the welding torches or they could be damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure to press silver button when releasing the connector of the stick torch or it could break. &lt;br /&gt;
* Do not cut power to the machine before it is completely shut down.&lt;br /&gt;
* Always lay torches completely on top of the table and avoid sharp bends in the wire to prevent damage to the torches. &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure overhead clamp is secured tightly before using or you could get smacked in the head. &lt;br /&gt;
* Do not scratch the coupons as the simulator needs the markings to read your weld.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Vault - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
* The most common issue with this device is the AR flickering on and off and this is extremely annoying because the welding process is halted each time this occurs. To fix this pay close attention to the red arrows on the side of the screen and move your view angle around until they disappear signify that the helmet is oriented with the coupon correctly. If the problem persists, press the AR button to perform a lighting calibration. You can also experiment with different brightness levels for the lights on the front of the helmet. &lt;br /&gt;
* If at any point an unfamiliar alert pops up on the screen, consult the Ace or the user manual to determine the severity of the error and how to fix it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
Besides occasionally updating software, the only required maintenance is general cleaning. General cleaning consists of wiping dust off the machine when needed, making sure the space is kept neat and tidy, and make sure all cords and torches are in their place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General cleaning &lt;br /&gt;
|After each use or as needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Update Software&lt;br /&gt;
|Whenever a new version of software is released&lt;br /&gt;
|ACE&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Wood_Shop&amp;diff=12032</id>
		<title>Wood Shop</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Wood_Shop&amp;diff=12032"/>
		<updated>2026-09-17T23:51:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Schedule */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Wood Shop Logo.png|300px|frameless|left]][[File:Wood_Shop.jpg|400px|thumb|right|The Wood Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
The wood shop is a 975-square-foot space. It contains all the equipment listed below as well as many power tools, hand tools, and other woodworking items. It also contains a large CNC router. The shop is equipped with compressed air quick connections for powering tools and machines. There are two air filtration units hanging from the ceiling. When producing wood dust, turn on the filtration units with the white remote control. These do a good job of removing a large percentage of the wood dust from the air. The [[Dust Collector|dust collectors]] are not considered equipment, but you should know how to use them if you are working in the wood shop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
  |Is facility=True&lt;br /&gt;
  |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1255&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Schedule=&lt;br /&gt;
View the Fall 2026 {{PAGENAME}} schedule [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1XZn7_O8HZMRscswja6Vd_iMZEjOkYUAUTzfdbcMKJ4Q/edit#gid=?usp=sharing on this Google Sheet.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Equipment Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::true]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Wood Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has make=Company&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has model=Model |+width=10em&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has ace.Has name=Current Ace&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=broadtable&lt;br /&gt;
 |mainlabel=Name&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Equipment by Icon==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]][[Has icon::+]] [[Is located in facility::Wood Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon=Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=plainlist&lt;br /&gt;
 |template=EquipmentIconGallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |outrotemplate=EquipmentIconGalleryOutro&lt;br /&gt;
 |limit=100&lt;br /&gt;
 |link=none&lt;br /&gt;
 |sort=Is located in facility&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
==[[3 commandments]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 1. Safety First ===&lt;br /&gt;
Safety First is the most important of the three facets of professional behavior expected of you while you are in the Maker Hub. This applies to your safety, the safety others, and the safety of the equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keeping yourself safe in the Wood Shop is very important, as there are possibilities for accidents if you don't follow the safety guidelines. Safety starts with you, so don't depend on others to keep you safe. There is a first aid kit located on the south wall near the Wood Shop door.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following rules must be followed at all times:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Safety glasses must be worn at all times in the wood shop.&lt;br /&gt;
* No horseplay in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t do anything distracting to yourself or others while operating machinery.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not wear any loose clothing, jewelry, or lanyards.&lt;br /&gt;
* No hats or open-toed shoes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hair is not to extend below the collar.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not wear gloves while operating machinery.&lt;br /&gt;
* Food or drink is allowed when not operating machinery; it must be kept a safe distance away from the machines.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not attempt to operate machinery in the shop on which you have not been certified by passing the Canvas quiz and training with the Ace for that piece of equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not argue with volunteers or shop staff. Contact Justin Johnson if you have issues that need to be resolved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not operate machinery without a shop supervisor or trained volunteer in the shop with you. Never operate equipment alone in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset the space. Make the area you are working in ready for the next person. Clean up after yourself, using the dust broom and vacuum cleaner. Return any tools (e.g. push sticks, rulers, squares, scribes, etc.) to their proper places.&lt;br /&gt;
* The first aid kit is located in the machine shop, next to the wood shop doors.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you see a safety violation inform the person immediately and encourage them to comply with the policies.&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t do anything that would require an additional rule to be added to this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2. Reset the Space ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Wood Shop has a specific organization to it. Put whatever you use back where it belongs. There is a place for everything and everything has a place. This rule applies to everything in the space. If you use a tool, put it back. If you use a pen, put it back. Throw away your trash and recycling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we understand that sometimes you need to leave projects out. Maybe you are in the middle of a large project and you need something left overnight. In cases like this, it is okay to leave projects out, but you NEED to make prior arrangements with Nick or Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please put the machinery back the way you found it. Clean up chips and any messes you make. NEVER use shop air to clean yourself or the machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always put any unused materials back on the storage shelf, and throw away unuseable scrap.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always leave the space better than you found it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3. Be Professional ===&lt;br /&gt;
This commandment has two sides to it. It covers the idea of acting like professional (which Webster’s defines as “exhibiting a courteous, conscientious, and generally businesslike manner in the workplace”). The term also describes the standards of education and training that prepare members of the profession with the particular knowledge and skills necessary to perform their specific role within that profession. Hopefully, you are learning both of these as part of your education at George Fox University. In the wood shop we expect you to develop as a courteous, conscientious, and skilled craftsman, understanding the tools and equipment in the Maker Hub and how to use them effectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Being a professional has some obvious ramifications in terms of behavior. First, be Christlike. Think of others better than yourselves. Share. If you and someone else are needing to use the same piece of equipment, find a compromise that will honor both your time and theirs. This is being a professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are learning to how to use a machine, and you can't get something to work the way you want - ASK SOMEONE! Learn! Become a professional. Learn the craft. This is an educational space. You might think it will be quick and you can just get it done “your” way and not learn how to do it correctly. Be a Professional and learn the proper way, and then be available to teach others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very important, and likely difficult part of being a professional is to correct others when they are not being professional. It is your responsibility to speak up when you see somebody doing something inappropriate. If you see somebody doing something unsafe, not resetting the space, or being unprofessional, the professional thing to do is to remind them of the three commandments and ask them politely to correct their action. This is OUR space, not any individual's. As a group, we expect everyone in the space to keep the space safe, clean, and operable for everyone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If someone acts disgracefully unprofessional to you in the wood shop, you are welcome to bring the issue to Justin or Nick's attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General Wood Shop Knowledge==&lt;br /&gt;
Woodworking is dangerous. Be careful. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Gluing===&lt;br /&gt;
Glue joints (when done correctly) will create a bond stronger than the wood itself. To create a strong glue joint follow this general procedure. It is worth noting that gluing end grain yields a very weak glue joint and should be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure that both surfaces that you wish to glue are smooth, flat, or mate together well. Often, this requires sanding to at least 120 or 220 grit for a smooth gluing surface. Rough, un-sanded surfaces do not make strong glue joints.&lt;br /&gt;
# Dry fit your glue joint with clamps. This will ensure that your joint fits properly and that all necessary clamps are close by and sized correctly when you go to apply glue.&lt;br /&gt;
# You can never have too many clamps.&lt;br /&gt;
# Get a handful of paper towels to help clean up glue squeeze out and the glue you will get on your fingers. &lt;br /&gt;
# Recognize that once you start applying glue you are on a clock to finish setting up the glue joint before the set time.&lt;br /&gt;
# Apply a bead of glue on one surface of your glue joint. Then, spread out that glue into a thin film using your fingers, a glue brush, or a glue roller. &lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat step 6 for the other surface of your glue joint such that both surfaces have a thin, even film of glue.&lt;br /&gt;
# Quickly use a paper towel to wipe your fingers clean of glue. The goal here is to remove most of the wet glue so it doesn't get spread all over your lumber. Do NOT take the time to clean all of the glue.&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the clamps you already gathered, clamp your glue joint together.&lt;br /&gt;
# Again, you can never have too many clamps.&lt;br /&gt;
# After 5-10 minutes, wipe up the excess glue squeeze out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remember this old saying: &amp;quot;Not enough glue, you lose... too much glue gets on your shoes.&amp;quot; In other words, if you don't see any glue ooze out after clamping (or there are several areas a few inches long where no glue oozes out of the glue seam after clamping), then you probably did not use enough glue and your glue joint will lack strength. If you use too much glue, then lots of glue will ooze out when clamping and make a big mess as it drips everywhere. Ask one of our wood shop volunteers about gluing if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Knowledge===&lt;br /&gt;
* The Table Saw is the center of the shop because it is the most frequently used tool and it provides extra clearance on all sides to cut large pieces of wood.&lt;br /&gt;
* Always inspect materials for nails or metal. Metal debris in wood will damage the equipment and possibly cause injury to you. We have a metal detector available if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the process you are using is correct for your material type.&lt;br /&gt;
* Get help handling larger pieces of wood.&lt;br /&gt;
* When making dust turn on the overhead dust filtration units.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can't learn woodworking on a wiki page... Go to the wood shop and start making things!&lt;br /&gt;
Here are a couple things to keep in mind:&lt;br /&gt;
* Some wood dust can be toxic. Be aware of the type of wood you are working with.&lt;br /&gt;
* Blades and cutters are very sharp so always think before touching.&lt;br /&gt;
* Always be aware of the location of your fingers in relation to blades and cutters. Never let your hands or fingers come close to the blade path.&lt;br /&gt;
* Be aware of people and what they are doing around you.&lt;br /&gt;
* Be aware of what is on the floor around you. Sweep up slippery sawdust and remove tripping hazards.&lt;br /&gt;
* Many of the machines are very loud. Wear ear protection when needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* If something feels like it could be dangerous ask a supervisor before attempting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction to Joinery===&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p1aQQQDXrc8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Canvas Certification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;{{PAGENAME}} Certification Quiz Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is equipment::True]]&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Is located in facility::Wood Shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |?Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |format=gallery&lt;br /&gt;
 |imageproperty=Has icon&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=12031</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=12031"/>
		<updated>2026-09-14T16:09:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Few Word.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Welcome to the Maker Hub Introduction Course!&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Maker Hub users must take this course in order to have access to the Maker Hub. This course should take less than 45 minutes to complete. And we promise, of all the Maker Hub training courses, this one is the longest (except for the soldering irons for some reason). Reading is hard... but somehow, we need to put the necessary training information into your brain so that you can use the Maker Hub's equipment safely and refrain from breaking things. We'll try to convey all of this in as few words as possible (humor aside). For all the &amp;quot;[[TLDR]]&amp;quot; peeps in the house, buckle up...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size:x-large;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To gain basic card-swipe access to the Maker Hub, read this entire page, agree to the Maker Hub Waiver, and pass the Maker Hub Introduction Canvas quiz (with 100%). The link to the Canvas quiz/waiver is found toward the bottom of this page [[{{PAGENAME}}#Certification|here]].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How We Operate==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Maker Hub is available to all members of the GFU family (i.e. undergrad students, graduate students, ADP students, and employees), and that includes non-engineering students! The Maker Hub was born to advance creativity, innovation, and entrepreneurship within the community of George Fox University. One of the main ways we achieve this goal is by providing a space where people can work on academic and/or personal projects. The Maker Hub operates under the guidance of a few GFU employees, a handful of student staff, and a plethora of student aces and volunteers. The student staff, aces, and volunteers play critical leadership roles in overseeing various technical shops and training others to use the equipment. With a diverse user-base and a diverse set of projects running concurrently, there has to be a standardized training system that keeps everyone on the same page. And... that's why you're here reading this epic wiki page anyways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable you to access and maintain this space, you are being asked (OK, required) to take a short training course on the Maker Hub. Through this course, you will become acquainted with the [[Facilities|facilities]] within the Maker Hub, the [[Equipment|equipment]] and [[Tools|tools]] available to you, and the expectations for proper usage of them. The goal of this course is twofold: first, to introduce you to the capabilities available to you in the space, and second, to help you understand the expectations upon you when using the space. Both are crucial if you want to be an active participant in the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any public space, there has to be some set of rules that govern the activity in the space. Ideally, we would just use the clever “Rule 0: Don’t make me make a rule.” But, we felt it was better to come up with some overall guiding principles rather than a list of rules. Clearly, there are some obvious “rules” that get implied from these principles, but, we believe that if you embrace the principles, the rules will take care of themselves. These principles we like to call: &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Three Commandments&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(See what we did there? - Christian school - reference to the commandments? Get it?) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Three Commandments==&lt;br /&gt;
# Safety First&lt;br /&gt;
# Reset the Space&lt;br /&gt;
# Be Professional&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery class=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Safety First Red.png&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Reset The Space Green.png&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Be Professional Blue.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===What Do The Three Commandments Mean?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Safety First====&lt;br /&gt;
This should be the most obvious--and critical--of the commandments. A significant portion of the equipment and tools in the Maker Hub can be quite dangerous. It is imperative that in everything you do, you address safety first. This starts with general behavior (don’t run with scissors - in fact, don’t run at all - unless there is a fire - and you can see now why we are going with principles rather than specific rules). But beyond general behavior, various rooms and machines have very specific safety procedures and violations of these procedures will come with penalties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use the buddy system. It's always a good idea to have a buddy or someone within eyesight or earshot while working anywhere in the Maker Hub. It is IMPERATIVE to have a buddy or someone else present when working in the machine shop, wood shop, or welding shop. Do not use equipment alone in the machine shop, wood shop, or welding shop; it is a serious safety violation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Safety first includes not only your safety and the safety of others, but the safety of the equipment and tools as well. It is a huge privilege to have access to this set of equipment and we need to ensure that the equipment is being properly used and maintained. There is no reason in this space to use a screwdriver as a hammer. We have hammers. Use tools for their intended purposes, not just for your safety, but for the safety of the tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Safety is our number one concern as you use the equipment and tools available in the Maker Hub. In the Maker Hub, there is a very clear distinction between things that are considered [[Equipment|equipment]] and things that are considered [[Tools|tools]]. Equipment is a special category of machines that, by definition, &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;requires&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; certified training before an individual is allowed to use it. Tools have no certification process; they can be used by anyone who has completed this Maker Hub Introduction course and passed the quiz. That does not mean that tools are necessarily less dangerous; equipment just requires more training. Do not use any equipment that you have not been certified on. There are several equipment stations in [[The Hub]] such as the [[Sewing Machine|sewing machines]], the [[Electronics Workstation|electronics workstation]], and the [[Heat Press|heat press]] to name a few. All [[Equipment|equipment]] is marked in the Maker Hub with special icons that are displayed either on, around, or above the equipment. Here's an example icon for the [[Sublimation Printer|sublimation printer]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dye Sublimation Printer.png|150px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equipment that has an icon posted over it, by definition, requires specialized certification training. Without completing this training, you are not authorized to utilize the equipment! Have we beat this dead horse enough yet? Think of these certifications as a “license to learn.” They allow you to utilize the equipment, but you should still feel free to ask for help, at any point, from a shop mentor or technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a condition that makes it unsafe for you to use heavy machinery or if you are taking any medication that recommends against using heavy machinery, you must notify the Maker Hub staff before using any Maker Hub equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Never forget ... SAFETY FIRST!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Reset the Space====&lt;br /&gt;
This commandment is simple enough to understand, but sometimes difficult for ... let’s just say it ... people ... to implement. The idea is very simple. Put things back. Leave the space better than you found it. It's not that hard. There is a place for everything, and everything has a place. There are marks on the floor in the Hub for the tables. These are just there to help remind you. This principle applies to EVERYTHING in the space. If you move a chair, put it back. If you move a table, put it back. If you use a tool, put it back. If you use a rolling computer, put it back. That means you don’t take things from one room and leave them in another. You see, that would not be “putting it back.” You see where I am going with this? If you use a machine in the shop, put the tools away. Use the vacuum to clean up. Make the space look better than you found it. If you want a marker for a whiteboard in the space, go request one from the [[Tool Room]]. They are free for usage in the space. Do not take them from other rooms. Do not take erasers from other rooms. If you use a whiteboard, erase it. I could go on. Sort of want to. But I will contain myself. Ok ... a few more ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We currently allow food and drink in the Maker Hub. Resetting the Space means that you don’t leave food spills, wrappers, or trays, or anything that wasn’t there when you came in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we understand that sometimes you need to leave things out. Maybe you are in the middle of a large test and you need something to run overnight. In cases like this, it is OK, but you NEED to leave a note on your system so that others know the situation. This is just common courtesy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you do, RESET THE SPACE!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Be Professional====&lt;br /&gt;
This commandment has two sides to it. It covers the idea of acting like a professional (which Webster’s defines as “exhibiting a courteous, conscientious, and generally businesslike manner in the workplace”). The term also describes the standards of education and training that prepare members of the profession with the particular knowledge and skills necessary to perform their specific role within that profession. Hopefully, you are learning both of these as part of your education at George Fox University. In the Maker Hub we expect you to develop as a courteous, conscientious, and skilled craftsman, understanding the tools and equipment in the Maker Hub and how to use them effectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Being a professional has some obvious behavioral ramifications. First, be Christlike. Think of others better than yourselves. Share. If you are using a meeting room to do individual work, and a team needs a meeting room, then you should yield the room. Function is more important than who got there first. This is being a professional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are working with a tool or piece of equipment, and you don’t know the proper way to do what you are attempting - ASK SOMEONE! Learn! Become a professional. Learn the craft. This is an educational space. You might think it will be quick and you can just get it done “your” way and not learn how to do it correctly. Be a professional and learn the proper way, and then be available to teach others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very important, and likely difficult part of being a professional is to correct others when they are not being professional. It is your responsibility to speak up when you see somebody doing something inappropriate. If you see somebody doing something unsafe, not resetting the space, or being unprofessional, the professional thing to do is to remind them of the three commandments and ask them politely to correct their action. This is OUR space, not any individual's. As a group, we expect everyone in the space to keep the space safe, clean, and operable for everyone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, it’s time for a brief “family chat” (Nick speaking here). I am primarily addressing our engineering students where I hear of these issues occurring, but this topic certainly applies to all students, all majors, all Maker Hub users, and beyond. I hear reports of sexist comments and crude joking at the expense of one gender or the other occurring in the Maker Hub (albeit far less than reports I hear from other universities). I doubt anyone is surprised to hear me say that this is not professional behavior. Having been college student myself at one point, I am familiar with the type of locker room talk that “gets a laugh out of the boys.” If you actually take a minute to examine the origin/purpose behind such comments, it exposes a significant thread of immaturity. Some who engage in sexism make socially unacceptable statements and cover them up by saying “it’s just a joke.” Some are seeking attention or approval from their peers. Some want to be perceived as funny or edgy by others. Some have a very fragile masculinity or femininity and feel better when they put the other gender down. Some genuinely have a perverted ideology concerning men, women, and gender roles. No matter the intent, sexist remarks are unprofessional and will not be tolerated in the Maker Hub. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a time and place for appropriate humor concerning the whimsical rivalries between various engineering disciplines or even differing majors. Still, such humor should never include elements that would dishonor one gender or the other. And yes, let me be clear: the standard goes both directions. I am well aware that men are the more common offenders, but that does not give women any license or justification to return fire with disparaging remarks. We reject the “eye-for-an-eye” mentality. I speak on behalf of the College of Engineering (and the university as a whole) when I say that one of our main goals is to guide you toward greater levels of maturity and let the transforming love of Christ be the primary thing that informs your thoughts, speech, attitudes, and actions. Insomuch as your interaction with the Maker Hub could contribute toward this goal, the Maker Hub will continue to uphold a professional culture and expect our users to meet the standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much more can be said about this topic, but for the sake of space, I will pause here. Please reach out to nsullivan@georgefox.edu to report violations or engage in further dialogue about this topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BE PROFESSIONAL!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How We Handle Violations===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are The Three Commandments, and they form the rule and order for the Maker Hub. There are similarities to the rule and order in Christianity. As G.K. Chesterton said in his classic book “Orthodoxy,” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The more I considered Christianity, the more I found that while it had established a rule and order, the chief aim of that order was to give room for good things to run wild.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is our hope and expectation that you and other students will be able to run wild and create many wonderful things in this space. These “commandments” are intended to provide that space - and the expectation is that everyone will abide by them. But, as we know, not everyone chooses to do so (1 Tim 1:9-10). We have seen various ways that different schools address these violations, and most use expulsion from the space as the primary penalty. Our penalty system is purposely vague to allow us to handle violations on a case-by-case basis. Some violations (not putting a chair back after moving it) might be comparatively minor, while others are extremely severe. An example of an extremely severe violation would be unauthorized usage of equipment in the machine shop or wood shop, or even authorized usage of a machine shop/wood shop machine without anyone else present. These violations would most likely result in immediate suspension from accessing the Maker Hub. Let's just not go there, please.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ok, moving onward. You might have noticed that the Maker Hub itself and many of the facility doors around the Maker hub are access-controlled. The main doors should not be propped open except for Maker Hub events. Unless a [[Facilities|facility]] is being monitored by the Maker Hub staff, a Maker Hub work study student, or a volunteer/ace, the facility doors should not be propped open. Please leave these doors closed under normal circumstances. Obvious exceptions are the [[Meeting Rooms|meeting rooms]] and [[Computer Lab|computer lab]] (we don't care if you use them with the doors open or closed). Other exceptions are the [[Wood Shop|wood shop]] and [[Welding Shop|welding shop]]; while users are working in these two spaces, the doors must remain propped open for safety reasons. You might be surprised how something so simple as &amp;quot;proper door usage&amp;quot; factors into the SAFETY FIRST and BE PROFESSIONAL commandments. It is a serious liability concern for the Maker Hub and the university if people are using the space without undergoing the proper safety training. If you're unsure if the people walking behind you have access to a certain facility, ask... don't be afraid to introduce yourself and make new friends. Everyone in the space should understand the three commandments and will be expected to adhere to these principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, as a friendly reminder, we have security cameras posted throughout the Maker Hub, so do be on your best behavior. The cameras exist to help protect the space and enforce violations. All public areas are under constant surveillance, and everything is being recorded. This means that, if necessary, the video can be reviewed to help identify nefarious behavior or the cause of an accident. If an accident happens in the Maker Hub, first decide if you need to call an ambulance. Second, notify the Lead Technician and/or Maker Hub Manager. Even if no one got hurt... if you broke something... if something dangerous happened... if a significant malfunction occurred, but then it magically fixed itself later... please notify the Maker Hub employees. It's always better to take initiative in owning your mistakes than for the Maker Hub staff to find out what happened by reviewing the camera footage. If you leave a mess behind, we will find you on the camera footage and exhort you to rectify the mess promptly. Repeat offenders should expect their Maker Hub access to be suspended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's switch gears to a happier topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Things You Need To Know About The Hub==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hub MAP Text 2.png|500px|thumb|right|Map of the Maker Hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Maker_Hub#Facilities|Facilities section on the Main Page]] shows a gallery of the different spaces that comprise the whole Maker Hub. See the map to the right for the layout of the Maker Hub. With the exception of the doors and the Senior Design Space, there are 11 labelled facilities on the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For students, your standard entry and exit point for the Maker Hub will be the main doors. Please do not use the senior design doors, the loading dock doors, or any of the emergency exit doors (unless, for example, there is an emergency or you are receiving a large shipment on the loading dock). This is intentional to funnel our user base through the turnstiles. As of the beginning of the spring semester 2023, the turnstiles next to the front desk are now live. This means that users will now use their GFU ID card at the turnstiles to swipe in on entry '''''and''''' swipe out when exiting the Maker Hub. Anyone who walks through without swiping will set off the alarm, and that would be '''sooo''' embarrassing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A brief explanation of '''why'''... The turnstiles are part of the Maker Hub's data collection initiative. These data will show the collective usage of the Maker Hub and provide quantitative leverage for acquiring funding for new equipment and other developments in the space. We will also be able to analyze usage trends to better serve our current user base and inform our marketing efforts. Your compliance with this new policy benefits the Maker Hub and  creates more opportunities for us to develop the space. Just in case it needs to be stated explicitly: Proper turnstile usage will be expected of all Maker Hub users. Violators should expect consequences... but, we know none of you would be so flagrant. ;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are giving a tour, you can ask someone working at the front desk to temporarily disable the turnstiles so that all of your tour guests won't set off the alarm. The front desk has a regular rotation of work study students that work during the afternoons and early evenings on weekdays. Feel free to ask them for assistance (or Hayley if she is working at the Maker Hub front desk).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Hub===&lt;br /&gt;
The space we call &amp;quot;The Hub&amp;quot; refers to the large central room, which includes the lobby and hallways (the blue area on the map where the Maker Hub logo is). The Hub is a 24/7 general-use area that is meant for designing and making. It has approximately 8 rolling workbenches, some blue rolling carts, 8 computers on wheels, tool racks on the wall, and some semi-permanent stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, there are approximately 8 open workbenches surrounded by tall drafting chairs that are open for general use. Each of these has a permanent home that is marked on the floor. Each workbench has power outlets on each leg, which can be powered by plugging the workbench's power plug into the yellow power outlets that come down from the ceiling. The yellow power outlets have been positioned so that that they hang down directly next to the workbench. These workbenches have locking casters and can be moved. However, when you have finished with the workbench, please reset the space. Ensure that the workbench is placed back inside of the special marks on the floor, and place the drafting chairs (usually 4 of them) around the workbench. When you RESET THE SPACE, it makes it nice for those following behind you. And we want to be nice ... don’t we? Yes is the answer to that question. If you need to leave your project out on a workbench for an extended period, you must mark it as &amp;quot;in use&amp;quot; with a note including your name, date, contact info, and when the project will be moved/cleaned up. There should be a good reason for this because we don't want to lock down a workbench for days. If there are special circumstances, please speak with your project advisor and/or a Maker Hub employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Project storage is at a premium in the Maker Hub. Visit our [[Project Storage]] page to see what storage spaces are available. We do not have a lot of space to store projects. The blue rolling carts that live in the hub are designed for project transportation, not permanent project storage. When you are finished using these carts, please clear them off and return them where you found them. If, for some special reason, you need to use the cart continuously for a short time, mark the cart as &amp;quot;in use&amp;quot; with a note per the description above. This is useful if you want to run overnight tests or you are in the middle of an assembly. However, this is for short term use. Remember, BE PROFESSIONAL. Release the materials for others to use. There are project storage racks in the senior design hallway. If you want to store your project there, label your shelf/materials with your name, the date, and contact info. Do not swipe other people's labeled materials for your own project. Keep in mind that these storage racks are periodically cleaned out each summer, so please take your projects with you at the end of the spring semester or notify a Maker Hub employee if you want your project to stay over the summer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 8 computers on wheels that live up against the wall facing the quad or between the meeting rooms on the south side of the hub. They are all the same as the Computer Lab machines with the exception of number 8. Computer 8 has the Adobe Creative Suite in addition to all the rest of the software. Side note: the other computer in the Maker Hub with the Adobe Creative Suite is the computer connected to the vinyl cutters and the sublimation printer. All of the computers on wheels have a UPS (uninterruptible power supply) that allows you to unplug the machine and move it around the Maker Hub without powering it down. You allegedly have about 15 minutes of power available from the UPS (if anyone actually times it, let us know). Feel free to roll these computers to wherever you want to use them; however, when you are finished, RESET THE SPACE! The computers, when not in use, should always be sitting at their permanent locations plugged into a wall outlet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the wall, there are a couple tool racks. These are available for use within the Maker Hub. As should be obvious by now, when you are done using the tools, return them - RESET THE SPACE. Do not take these tools out of the Maker Hub. That's what the [[Tool Room]] is for. A tool is to the Tool Room as a book is to the library. Check out tools for an extended period of time and simply return them by the due date. The Tool Room hours are posted on the front desk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is A/V equipment in the corner of the hub. Best to just leave it alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Supplies|Low-Fidelity Prototyping Station]] is provided so that students can make quick project mock-ups. Please BE PROFESSIONAL when using this station. While it might be tempting to make pipe-cleaner men as you did in elementary school, these supplies are provided for free to be utilized for projects, not entertainment. We will simply not be able to provide these supplies if they are continually wasted. This station is notorious for being left a mess, so please RESET THE SPACE and clean up when you are finished. Also, there is a small laminating machine located at the low-fidelity prototyping station. The low-fidelity prototyping station and the laminating machine are not considered &amp;quot;equipment,&amp;quot; which means that there is no certification process necessary to use these items. See [[The Hub]] wiki page to see what equipment is located in the hub.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Meeting Rooms===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Meeting Room.jpg|500px|thumb|right|A neat and orderly Meeting Room :)]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are 8 meeting rooms in the Maker Hub (the dark blue areas on the map). The intended function of these rooms is to house meetings (i.e. these are not study rooms, but meeting rooms). Which means, priority will be given to weekly meetings with senior design teams, servant engineering teams, and other teams meeting for classes or projects. When not requested for a team meeting, these rooms can be used by individuals for studying, or by groups for hanging out. If you are acting like a professional, then you will yield the room to others who have a legitimate project-related need for the meeting room. This happens frequently, so do not be surprised or upset if you are displaced by a project team. The meeting rooms fill up fast (because they're awesome), but everyone needs to remember that the meeting rooms serve the primary purpose of housing project-related meetings. If you are studying in a meeting room, consider it a very professional act to offer &amp;quot;your&amp;quot; meeting room to a team that needs to meet and then study elsewhere. Likewise, if a team would like to use a room at an unscheduled time, it would be professional for the team to first look for an empty room, and second, look for a room that has the least effect on others who might be using the room for group study or other activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these rooms is equipped with a wall-mounted flat-screen TV and HDMI connector. There is a whiteboard in each room as well. As with other whiteboards, please do not take the erasers or markers, and always erase the board when you leave the meeting room. If there are no markers or erasers, please obtain them from the Tool Room. When you leave the meeting room, turn off the TV and leave the HDMI cable accessible (not tossed underneath the table). Also, there should be 1 table (haven’t seen anyone take those yet), and 7 short chairs without armrests (these chairs are different from the taller drafting chairs in The Hub), and a clean whiteboard with an eraser and markers. No extra items should be left behind (e.g. computer on wheels). Just like the picture to the right, remember that you should always RESET THE SPACE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are coat hangers on the wall behind the door. These are only for coats, they will not be strong enough to hold backpacks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enjoy the meeting rooms - just remember The Three Commandments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Computer Lab===&lt;br /&gt;
The computer lab is open to all Maker Hub users (the yellow area on the map). The computer lab has 29 computer stations (28 for students and 1 for the instructor). Each of these stations consists of a computer, a keyboard, a mouse, and a chair with armrests. These items form a unit. Which should make it clear that you should never take a keyboard, a mouse, or a chair from this space. There are no chairs with armrests in The Hub or meeting rooms. So, leave the armrest-chairs in the computer lab. The keyboards and mouses are intended for these computers. If a keyboard or mouse is broken, inform the Tool Room. If there is a dire situation where you need to borrow one of these items, as always, RESET THE SPACE. Several classes are held in the computer lab, and we don't want them to waste class-time looking for missing keyboards, mouses, or chairs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The large whiteboards in the computer lab follow the same principles as the whiteboards in the meeting rooms. Don't remove markers or erasers from the computer lab. If the markers are missing or not functional, go to the Tool Room and get new ones. Erase the board when you are finished. If you want to save your whiteboard writing, take a picture. Writing “Do Not Erase” is not an acceptable action for a whiteboard. You can save it yourself and reproduce it quickly later. Again, BE PROFESSIONAL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clean up after yourself; consider this good practice for marriage if indeed you would like to get married one day. This means you need to be sure to clean up any papers, food, and drink. If you have a class in the computer lab and receive a handout, it is your job to study it like your wonderful professor intended. But if you are not going to do that, it is your responsibility to recycle it. Leave the space better than you found it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a set of 72 small storage lockers in this room. Their main function is to hold Maker-Hub-related materials for classes/labs or Maker-Hub-related personal projects. They are not to be used as personal lockers for non-Maker-Hub-related items. Now clearly, if you are already using a locker for Maker Hub reasons, then it is certainly fine to additionally place a textbook or engagement ring in there (preferably in the spring). But don’t secure a locker if you are not actively working on a project or participating in a class/lab. You will need to provide your own lock. At the end of each semester, the lockers should be cleared out and the locks removed. If there are still locks on them, this will give us a chance to use our bolt cutters and sell the locker's contents on the web. That is always a good time. If you need to maintain a locker over the break, you will need to coordinate with the Maker Hub employees. Please do not set things on top of the lockers. These items will be routinely disposed of without warning. Clearly, setting something on top would not be resetting the space, and hopefully you are discovering that this is an important commandment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Material Policy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Maker Hub gladly provides a limited assortment of low-cost materials and consumable items to its users—free of charge. This is true for both academic and personal projects. We want to remove as many monetary barriers as possible as users work on projects. There are two noteworthy areas where the Maker Hub expects that the user cover material costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first scenario is for specialized materials that the Maker Hub does not keep in stock. In this case, we can direct the user to a [[Places to Buy Materials|list of local businesses and online stores]] to purchase materials. If you are unfamiliar with the materials you to plan to use for your project or what materials you &amp;quot;should&amp;quot; use, talk with the Maker Hub staff before purchasing. We might be able to save you a big headache.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second scenario is for projects that require a large quantity of materials. A “large quantity” is an intentionally subjective term that will be decided by the Maker Hub staff on a case-by-case basis. The term &amp;quot;large quantity&amp;quot; also applies to expensive materials such as a full sheet of plywood, which can cost well over $100 depending on the quality. Sure, some projects legitimately need a large quantity of materials. Just ask the Maker Hub staff about it first. Maybe we'll give you the green light; maybe we'll ask you to cover the cost. We monitor our inventory carefully and want there to be enough materials available for everyone to enjoy, so please don't abuse this privilege.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We do have a few general thresholds designating a &amp;quot;large quantity&amp;quot; listed here. Below the threshold is free to the user; above the threshold means that the user (or class budget) will cover the cost. Please note that these thresholds are subject to change.&lt;br /&gt;
*A single PLA 3D print using more than $5 of material&lt;br /&gt;
*Half a sheet of plywood or more&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some materials available for purchase from the Tool Room for the sake of convenience. These materials are sold at cost, not for profit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Production Runs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Production runs are not allowed in the Maker Hub. Let's define what this means from the Maker Hub's perspective...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary factor that qualifies a project as a production run is attempting to produce a large quantity of items, but this factor is also weighed in conjunction with the time, effort, and cost needed to complete the project. Again, we are using a “large quantity of items” as an intentionally subjective term. If you ask yourself questions like... ''how many things am I trying to make? how much time will it take? what amount of effort is involved? how much will it cost?'' and the answer to all of them is &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;a LOT&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;, then you are definitely attempting a production run. The Maker Hub staff reserves the right to determine whether a project qualifies as a production run on a case-by-case basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why does the Maker Hub care about production runs? The Maker Hub is primarily an educational space; it is not a mass-production facility. Educating, training, and equipping will always be among our top priorities. Production runs tend to lock down a particular space, tool, or piece of equipment for an extended period of time as the user conducts repetitive tasks to produce his or her items. Whether it’s a production run or not, locking down the Maker Hub’s resources for an extended period of time without express permission from the Maker Hub staff comes in conflict with the third commandment: Be Professional! With education as a top priority, high production volumes can begin to compete with that priority by tying up Maker Hub resources for long periods of time. Secondly, the Maker Hub is not the place to fire up your business's assembly line and start cranking out hundreds of widgets for profit. If indeed you have the skills to make something in the Maker Hub that someone else would actually buy with real money, do it! Make something amazing and sell it. However, the Maker Hub will not support any form of &amp;quot;profit making&amp;quot; that includes assembly line production or qualifies as a production run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How The Training System Works==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone need a snack break? to stand up and stretch? a brief intermission? Almost there!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few category definitions for you...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Facilities]] are the various spaces in the Maker Hub. They usually require wiki reading and a passed Canvas quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Equipment]] is machinery where authorized usage requires wiki reading, a passed Canvas quiz, certification training, and a demonstration.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Tools]] are items that range from hand tools to benchtop instruments. Some have informative wiki pages, but they do not require a Canvas quiz, certification training, or a demonstration in order to use them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right now, you are in the middle of the Maker Hub Introduction training course. Successful completion of this course grants you 24/7 access to The Hub. There are many other training courses available. Most [[Facilities|facilities]] in the Maker Hub have a top-level Canvas quiz (e.g. the [[Prototype Lab]]). Successful completion of the Prototype Lab's top-level Canvas quiz grants you access to the Prototype Lab. Each piece of [[Equipment|equipment]] in the Maker Hub has an associated Canvas quiz (e.g. the [[Prusa 3D Printer]]). Successful completion of the Prusa 3D Printer's Canvas quiz &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;plus training and a demonstration from a staff member&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; authorizes you to use the Prusa 3D Printer. Canvas quizzes must be taken sequentially depending on where the equipment is located; you won't be able to take the Prusa 3D Printer quiz until you have passed the Prototype Lab's top-level quiz. For all you visual learners out there, take a look at the fancy graph below. Each node represents a Canvas quiz (unless the node is labelled with &amp;quot;No Quiz&amp;quot;). The graph follows a sequential process of completing quizzes from left to right. Take a minute to bask in its glory, then continue reading below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;graph&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;version&amp;quot;: 2,&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;width&amp;quot;: 400,&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;height&amp;quot;: 500,&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;data&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
    {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;tree&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;format&amp;quot;: { &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;treejson&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;transform&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
        { &lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;hierarchy&amp;quot;, &lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;field&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;size&amp;quot;, &lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;nodesize&amp;quot;: [13, 300] &lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
      ],&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;values&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
        { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Maker Hub Introduction Canvas Quiz&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Computer Lab (No Quiz)&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Finishing Room&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Machine Shop&amp;quot; ,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Bead Roller&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Bending Brake&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;CNC Press Brake&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;CNC Mill&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Drill Press&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Hand Bender&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Horizontal Bandsaw&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Hydraulic Press&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Lathe&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Metal Laser Cutter&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Milling Machine&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Ring Roller&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Rotary Punch&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Sheet Metal Shear&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Slip Roller&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Vertical Bandsaw&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Waterjet Cutter&amp;quot; }&lt;br /&gt;
            ]&lt;br /&gt;
          },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Meeting Rooms (No Quiz)&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;PCB Lab&amp;quot; ,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;PCB Printer&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Pick and Place&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Reflow Oven&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Reflow Station&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Soldering Irons&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Through Hole Press&amp;quot; }&lt;br /&gt;
            ]&lt;br /&gt;
          },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Prototype Lab&amp;quot; ,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Dissolvable Support Bath&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;F370 3D Printer&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Formlabs 3D Printer&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Laser Cutters&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Markforged 3D Printer&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Prusa 3D Printer&amp;quot; }&lt;br /&gt;
            ]&lt;br /&gt;
          },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The Hub (No Quiz)&amp;quot; ,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Electronics Workstation&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Foam Cutter&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Heat Press&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Heavy Duty Sewing Machine&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Mug Press&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Serger&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Sewing Machine&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Soldering Irons&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Sublimation Printer&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Vinyl Cutter&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Vinyl Printer+Cutter&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
            ]&lt;br /&gt;
          },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The Vault&amp;quot; ,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;3D Scanners&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;High Speed Camera&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Injection Molding Machine&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Jewelry Station&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Leatherworking Station&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Photo Table&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Vacuum Former&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Virtual Reality Welding Station&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
            ]&lt;br /&gt;
          },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Tool Room (No Quiz)&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Welding Shop&amp;quot; ,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Blast Cabinet&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Buffers&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;MIG Welder&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Pedestal Grinder&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Plasma Cutter&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Spot Welder&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;TIG Welder&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
            ]&lt;br /&gt;
          },&lt;br /&gt;
          { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Wood Shop&amp;quot; ,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;children&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Belt Sander&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Belt/Disc Sander&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;CNC Router&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Compound Miter Saw&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Hand Router&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Handheld CNC Router&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Jointer&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Oscillating Spindle Sander&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Planer&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Power Carver&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Scroll Saw&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Table Saw&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Vertical Wood Bandsaw&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Wood Drill Press&amp;quot; },&lt;br /&gt;
              { &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Wood Lathe&amp;quot; }&lt;br /&gt;
            ]&lt;br /&gt;
          }&lt;br /&gt;
        ]&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
  ],&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
    {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;path&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;from&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;data&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;tree&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;transform&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
          {&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;test&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;datum.parent&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
          },&lt;br /&gt;
          {&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;linkpath&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;sourceX&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;parent.layout_y&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;sourceY&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;parent.layout_x&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;targetX&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;layout_y&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;targetY&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;layout_x&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;quot;shape&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;diagonalX&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
          }&lt;br /&gt;
        ]&lt;br /&gt;
      },&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;properties&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;enter&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;path&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;field&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;layout_path&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;stroke&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;#ddd&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    },&lt;br /&gt;
    {&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;text&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;from&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;tree&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;quot;properties&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;quot;enter&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;x&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;field&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;layout_y&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;offset&amp;quot;: -20},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;y&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;field&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;layout_x&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;font&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Helvetica Neue&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;fontSize&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: 14},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;align&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;left&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;baseline&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;middle&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;fill&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;#000&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;quot;text&amp;quot;: {&amp;quot;field&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
  ]&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/graph&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice that the middle column contains all of the facilities within the Maker Hub, and the right column contains each piece of equipment within the Maker Hub.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Training Process===&lt;br /&gt;
Training follows a specific progression as shown in the image to the right...[[File:Training Progression2.png|800px|thumb|right|The Training Progression in the Maker Hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first place to start is by reading the wiki page on whatever facility or piece of equipment you would like to use. Watch the videos, open up the user manuals, etc. After you finish, you can find the link to the Canvas quiz under the Certification header. Theoretically, all the information you need to pass the Canvas quiz can be found somewhere on its respective wiki page. The link will take you to the main page of the Canvas course. You will need to self-enroll in the Canvas course by clicking the &amp;quot;Join This Course&amp;quot; button in the right column. If the quiz is locked, it means that either you haven't self-enrolled or you haven't yet taken the facility's top-level quiz for that piece of equipment. Pass the quiz with 100%. If you took a quiz for a facility, you're done. Facilities do not require you to schedule training or demonstrations; only equipment does. But it seems kind of pointless to have access to a facility but not be able to use anything in it... so let's continue the process for a piece of equipment. You've read the wiki page; you've passed the Canvas quiz with 100%. What's next? The next step is to scroll back to the top of the wiki page and find the student ace listed for that piece of equipment. A student ace is simply a student who knows a piece of equipment well and is willing to train other students on the proper usage of that equipment. Student aces often receive extra privileges such as extended hours in their particular facility. Once you've found the student ace's email address, send them and email and CC &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Your email is simply a request to schedule training and a demonstration for the equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What if there is no student ace listed? Try going to the facility page of where the equipment is located to see if there is an ace or a shop supervisor listed. What if there still is no student ace or shop supervisor listed there? Well, today might be your lucky day to offer to be a student ace for that particular equipment. No one in the Maker Hub is required to be an ace for anything, but the &amp;quot;ace&amp;quot; system is critically important to the operation of the Maker Hub and the culture we continue to develop. We focus our efforts into developing a culture in the Maker Hub that is collaborative, where people are eager to be helpful and share best practices. Our culture empowers students to take ownership of the Maker Hub through various roles and responsibilities. We are very grateful for anyone willing to be a student ace and assist others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are no student aces available, just send your email to &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; and someone will schedule a training and demonstration with you. The demonstration is usually a set task where the trainee will create a specific object or complete several functions to demonstrate basic proficiency on the equipment. Each piece of equipment has a unique demonstration, and the instructions are listed on the equipment's wiki page. Once the training and demonstration are complete, you are certified on the equipment. This means that you are free to use the equipment (adhering to the buddy system as applicable) whenever the facility is open. Each facility has posted hours on its respective wiki page and/or on the door of the facility. What does certification NOT mean? Certification does not mean that you know everything about the machine - neither does it mean that you're on your own to figure out how to use the machine if you forgot something from the training. Again, consider certifications as a &amp;quot;license to learn&amp;quot; more about the equipment. Ask questions and seek help from the Maker Hub staff and your peers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having just described the training process in excruciating detail, I promise it's a lot easier than it sounds. And it becomes much faster and more familiar once you've gone through it a few times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz Resets===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Canvas quizzes are reset at the beginning of the summer, so you will need to retake all of your quizzes in the fall in order to maintain certification on those pieces of equipment. This is intentional to refresh your knowledge of how to operate the machines you've trained on once a year. However, all of your demonstrations carry over from year to year, so you don't have to go through the process of scheduling a training and demonstration with a student ace again. By all means, ask for refresher training if you need it. But, there is no requirement to redo certification training/demonstrations for any piece of equipment that you have already been certified on at some point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Maker Hub Waiver==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For legal and liability reasons, the Maker Hub has a waiver that all users must sign prior to any equipment or tool usage. See our [[User Policies]] page for more details on different Maker Hub users with respect to the waiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Maker Hub waiver is part of the Maker Hub Introduction Canvas Course and should be completed by users there. It is simply listed here for reference: [[Media:MAKER HUB WAIVER V2.docx|Maker Hub Waiver V2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you've probably experienced information overload, go knock out this Maker Hub Introduction Canvas quiz (link below). If you miss a question, take the quiz again. 100% is the only passing grade for Maker Hub quizzes. Training in the Maker Hub can be tedious, but it's not meant to be frustrating. If you are confused or something is not working correctly for you, please contact the Maker Hub staff for assistance at &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's Next?==&lt;br /&gt;
After you have passed the Maker Hub Introduction quiz on Canvas with 100%, you should receive card-swipe access to the main doors of the Maker Hub on the following day (because the card reader system updates at midnight).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Wood_Lathe&amp;diff=12030</id>
		<title>Wood Lathe</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Wood_Lathe&amp;diff=12030"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:57:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Wood Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=wood&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=TeknaTool&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Nova Galaxi DVR &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=GL5663547&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Wood Lathe.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Wood Lathe Photo.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1190&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Don't wear anything that could get caught in the lathe. An example of items would be bracelets, lanyards, hair below the shoulders, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
*If you have questions make sure to ask a supervisor. The shop supervisors are skilled and are glad to give advice. &lt;br /&gt;
*The most common issue with safety is digging the chisel in too hard. If it is dug in too hard, it can get caught and cause a dangerous situation.&lt;br /&gt;
*When sanding make sure to remove the tool rest. This will eliminate a possible pinch point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wood lathe is a machine very similar to the metal lathe in the machine shop. It spins a piece of stock at a variable speed, and lets the turner create round objects. Unlike the metal lathe, there is not a cutter secured to the machine that is moved into place to cut. On the wood lathe, a turner will instead use long handled chisels to carve away the wood. Another difference is that for most projects, the wood is not clamped down in a found vise like the machining lathe, instead, two free-spinning center points on each side of the piece clamp the wood between them and hold it centered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a wide variety of projects that can be done on the wood lathe, some easier than others, and all requiring a different need for skills and tools. This makes it hard sometimes to provide a common set of instructions, however, there some general safety rules and instructions for use that are used in any project on the lathe. The lathe can be fun to work with, but always remember, safety first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mLuwcKNbtq8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kunZIzNNxUY}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Spindle: The spinning portion in the drive head that rotates the work piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Chisel: The hand held cutting tool used to remove material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tool Rest - A bar used to support the cutting tool while removing material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Spur Center - A piece of steel that connects the drive spindle to the work piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Live Center - A support piece that connects the work piece to the tail stock. The work piece is captured between the drive center and live center. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:566-Galaxi-DVR-1644-manual FINAL-Remote-II 23.July .2018.pdf|Wood Lathe User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wood lathe is similar to the metal lathe in the Machine Shop. It can spin material at various speeds and allows the user to create cuts and round shapes. Unlike the metal lathe, there is not a built in tool holder. On the wood lathe, a turner will instead use a hand held chisel to carve away the wood. For most projects, the material on the wood lathe is held using two centers, one on each side of the work. The head stock side of the material is the driven side. When installing the spur center in hard wood you will need to saw two diagonal cuts and drill the center hole.  If working with soft wood you can use a punch to locate the center and use a mallet to drive the spur center into the work piece.  You will need to use the following chart for setting the correct turning speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Turning Speeds.JPG|600px|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the lathe and make a snowman ornament out of wood! The goal is to shape the wood into 3 spheres that look like a snowman, no additional accessories like carrot noses and top hats are necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the stock size you need for your project and make it square using the table saw if needed. If the material is squared up it should run true on the lathe. &lt;br /&gt;
# Mark the center of both ends using a pencil and straight edge. Use a punch to indent both ends at the center marks. This will help locate the tooling and keep the part running true.[[File:...woodLathe1.png|300x300px|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to use the two point centers on the lathe and ensure the motor head is tight on the rails. If the tail stock or head is loose the work piece could fly out of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Move the tail stock away from the head stock to provide clearance for the wood stock to fit between the head and tail stock.  Lock the tail stock and use the center punch mark to line up the live center and spur center.&lt;br /&gt;
# As you Spin the handle on the tail stock the distance between the two centers will be reduced and capture the material. Keep the center punch marks lined up with the points on the centers until it pinches the work piece. &lt;br /&gt;
# When the spur center is engaged into the material lock the quill using the red handle handle located on top of the tail stock. Now your piece is secured![[File:...woodLathe2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
# The tool rest should be placed roughly 1/4&amp;quot;or less from the stock.[[File:...woodLathe3.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
# The tool rest should be at a height so that the tool on top of the rest will be cutting at the middle of the stock.&lt;br /&gt;
# Always rotate the spindle by hand prior to applying power. This will help prevent crashing the work piece into the tool rest.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the machine power switch located on the left end of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the speed indicated on the display prior to pressing the green &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; button. Use the speed chart for settings. Its always better to start at a slow speed and adjust as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the spindle speed as needed using the black knob.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the gouge to slowly begin chipping away the wood. Make sure the chisel is pressed firmly onto the tool rest and you are holding the handle tight into your core.&lt;br /&gt;
# Slowly push the chisel into the material until it begins chipping at the wood.&lt;br /&gt;
# Start cutting down the high parts of the material or towards the middle if it’s all even. Move the chisel towards the end, chipping away little bits of wood at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
# Smooth out the wood, chipping away until you make a cylinder.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have the cylinder, choose one end to be the head.&lt;br /&gt;
# Gradually narrow down to a cone shape, then cut away material to make the three spheres of the snowman’s body.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the shape is done, sand the piece, progressively finer grit until smooth.&lt;br /&gt;
# Take the piece off, cut any remaining material and sand the mount points smooth.&lt;br /&gt;
# Reset the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Wood Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If the lathe is sounding funny, tell the shop volunteer/supervisor so we can get that checked out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you feel like you're losing grip on the chisel while shaving it down, chances are that you are digging in too hard. Lighten up a little, and be patient. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it doesn't seem to be cutting well, first check the tool's sharpness before digging in deeper. If the tool is not sharp, notify the shop volunteer/supervisor and grab another chisel that is sharp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wood lathe has few items that need to be maintained by the student or the Ace. Refer to the table below to see each procedure, how often it should occur, and the the last completion of the specific task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning, vacuum shavings and dust&lt;br /&gt;
|Before and after each use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Check tightness of bolts, lubricate with 1 or 2 drops of lightweight oil on tailstock quill threads, index pin, and Toolslide camshaft and Toolslide front camshaft bore&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate tailstock Slot with 1 or 2 drops of lightweight oil&lt;br /&gt;
|Every 6 Months&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Wood_Drill_Press&amp;diff=12029</id>
		<title>Wood Drill Press</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Wood_Drill_Press&amp;diff=12029"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:57:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Wood Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Wood&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Tekna Tool&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Nova Voyager DVR&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=301545&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:wood_drill_press_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Wood Drill Press icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:wood_drill_press_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:wood_drill_press_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Nova Voyager dvr Drill Press&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1266&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=Woodworking&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure you are wearing proper attire. (Safety glasses, short sleeves, closed toed shoes, no jewelry or any loose hanging accessories, and hair that is longer than collar-length must be tied up)  &lt;br /&gt;
* Keep body parts or anything else other than the workpiece out of the path of the drill bit when on.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not move workpiece while drill bit is inside of workpiece.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the drill bit is secure and fastened into the chuck.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure drill is at the appropriate speed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep work piece secure so it can't rotate.  If the work is long enough it should stick out to the left side of the operator against the vertical column to prevent rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This drill press is set on a fixed stand and is used for drilling holes in wood. It has been programmed with various material and bit profiles to make setting the speed extremely simple. Compatible materials include wood, metal, plastics, and glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=c8NTL8bPm7A}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oIhACZl9ylE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Terminology/Anatomy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Workpiece''' – an object being worked on with a tool or machine.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Drill (verb)''' - to bore a hole into the workpiece.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Through Hole''' - a hole that goes completely through the workpiece.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Blind Hole''' - a hole that goes partially through the workpiece.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Feed Handle''' - a rotating three-pronged handle used to set the depth of the drill bit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:833-Voyager-Drill-Press-Manual-FINAL-version-20.Jul .2018.pdf|Wood Drill Press User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.teknatool.com/product/nova-voyager-dvr-variable-speed-drill-press-exclusive-amazon-bundle/?gclid=EAIaIQobChMI4PzDxsni2wIVFNNkCh3lBAcLEAAYASAAEgL5NvD_BwE Product Home Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;figure-inline class=&amp;quot;mw-default-size&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;[[File:wood_drill_press_operation_manual|220x220px]]&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6PvDExhAOC8 First look]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Wood Drill Press is mainly used for drilling holes into wood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete knowledge of the Wood Drill Press, students will demonstrate that they can set up everything, and drill a through hole and a blind hole. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure you are wearing proper machine shop attire. (Safety glasses, rolled up or short sleeves, and closed toed shoes.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the drill press is turned off whenever you make adjustments to your workpiece. &lt;br /&gt;
# Mark your workpiece where the hole should be drilled, then use a hole starter to punch a hole for the drill bit if necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
# Put the appropriate drill bit into the chuck and use the chuck key on the drill press to tighten it. Make sure you tighten all three sides of the chuck. Chuck key on left, Chuck on right.&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the position of the table for your workpiece. &lt;br /&gt;
## The table height and rotational position can be adjusted using the handle on the column: &lt;br /&gt;
### Loosen the locking handle on the rear of the table bracket. NOTE: It is important to unlock this handle before adjusting the table.&lt;br /&gt;
### Rotate the crank handle attached to the rack to raise/lower the table to desired height. &lt;br /&gt;
### Swing the table around the column to the desired position.&lt;br /&gt;
### Re-tighten the locking handle, and ensure table is securely locked in place before drilling. &lt;br /&gt;
## To tilt the table:&lt;br /&gt;
### Loosen the bolt underneath the table using the 27mm closed end wrench included for this purpose. &lt;br /&gt;
### Loosen set screw underneath the previous bolt using 5mm Allen key. &lt;br /&gt;
### Tilt table to desired angle. &lt;br /&gt;
### Re-tighten bolt and set screw, and ensure table is securely locked in place before drilling.&lt;br /&gt;
## For blind holes, use the depth stop to stop the drill bit at the desired depth.&lt;br /&gt;
### Adjust the depth stop by rotating it until it is at the desired height.&lt;br /&gt;
#### For large adjustments, pressing the button on the depth stop enables it to move up and down freely.  &lt;br /&gt;
### The lever to the right of the spindle may be used to lock the drill bit at a desired depth while you adjust the depth stop. (i.e. lock the drill bit at the depth you want, then move the depth stop to the corresponding position.)&lt;br /&gt;
#### Remember to unlock the lever prior to drilling.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Line piece up with drill bit and fasten down onto work table using a clamp or vice. If drilling a through hole, put a piece of FLAT scrap wood under the piece being drilled to avoid a blowout. &lt;br /&gt;
# Turn power on using switch located on the right side of the machine as shown in the picture below. The yellow tab must be in place for the drill to be powered on.[[File:...voyagerthing.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Now the display screen should be on. Using the buttons, adjust the speed to the correct specifications needed to cut the material using the built-in computer. &lt;br /&gt;
## To use the speed chart: &lt;br /&gt;
### Go to the Menu &amp;gt; Speed Chart. &lt;br /&gt;
### Select the type of drill bit. &lt;br /&gt;
### Select the drill bit size. &lt;br /&gt;
### Select the work piece material. &lt;br /&gt;
### Confirm the new set speed.&lt;br /&gt;
### The display will return to the default screen with the new speed selected. &lt;br /&gt;
# After getting everything set up, turn the drill press on. (NEVER put your hand or any other body part in the path of the drill) &lt;br /&gt;
# Pull the lever to drill hole. (NEVER move workpiece while drilling a hole) &lt;br /&gt;
# Turn machine off before drilling next hole and when you are done drilling current hole. &lt;br /&gt;
# When done, remove drill bit. ( When loose, use one hand to unscrew and the other to hold the drill bit, so the drill bit does not fall and get damaged.)&lt;br /&gt;
# When done, return all borrowed equipment and clean work area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Wood Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
* It may be helpful to clamp down smaller work pieces to keep them from spinning while drilling a hole. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
Maintenance will be done to ensure the quality of the device. Tasks and their corresponding frequencies are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean area and Drill Press&lt;br /&gt;
|After each use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Wax exposed cast iron parts with paste wax&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthhly&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate gear and rack in the table elevation mechanism and the splines (grooves) in the spindle with a #2 tube grease, and lubricate the teeth of the feed shaft assembly and quill shaft with one or two drops of light weight oil.&lt;br /&gt;
|6 months&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|100px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
This drill press is set on a fixed stand and is used for drilling holes in wood. It has been programmed with various material and bit profiles to make setting the speed extremely simple.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current Ace of the {{PAGENAME}} is '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
== Training ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;figure-inline class=&amp;quot;mw-default-size&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;figure-inline&amp;gt;[[File:wood_drill_press_operation_manual|220x220px]]&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/figure-inline&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Waterjet_Cutter&amp;diff=12028</id>
		<title>Waterjet Cutter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Waterjet_Cutter&amp;diff=12028"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:56:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=OMAX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=ProtoMAX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=8100202&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1303&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:waterjet_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Waterjet Cutter Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:waterjet_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:waterjet_cutter_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The ProtoMax Waterjet Cutter&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Used for precision cutting of tough materials.&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has QR code=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Mikayla Stephenson;mstephenson22@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet can be a very dangerous machine if not used properly so here are some important safety items to keep in mind. First, Jesus forgives, but 30,000 psi doesn't. So pay attention to these precautions and be safe while operating this machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEVER, EVER, EVER, EVER, EVER turn on the machine without first turning on the water!  You could destroy the machine...and your reputation.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you see water squirting out the side of the machine while running a cut, don't touch it!  It is the fountain of &amp;quot;Bye Bye Fingers.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Wear rubber gloves while dealing with the water in the tank.  The water in there is a nasty pool of bacteria and chemicals just waiting to crawl into your open wounds.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have true &amp;quot;talent&amp;quot; and manage to run the water jet while your hand is underneath it, you have the opportunity of going to the ER and taking with you a medical card that tells the doctors how to treat you so you don't die.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet Cutter is a machine that uses highly pressurized water with a flow of an abrasive material to perform computer controlled cuts on a wide variety of materials, including 1&amp;quot; steel. This is helpful for creating parts with intricate designs for car engines, mounting brackets, and decorative plates. Another benefit of the waterjet is that there is minimal temperature change during the process which makes it perfect for cutting temperature sensitive materials. Check out the video below to see the waterjet in action.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UE4Fz8v0Lms&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* Tool path - The path that the waterjet will follow when cutting out a part. This includes more than just the outline of the part because the waterjet must pierce through the material before performing a cut.&lt;br /&gt;
* ProtoMAX LAYOUT- This is the software used to set up a tool path for the water jet and can be found on the laptop that is used with the waterjet.&lt;br /&gt;
* MAKE - This is the software that directly communicates with the waterjet to perform a cut from a tool path. It can also be found on the waterjet's laptop. &lt;br /&gt;
* Holding posts - The adjustable aluminum rods that are used as mounts for the holding arms. &lt;br /&gt;
* Holding arms - These come in several sizes and are used to clamp the material in place while performing a cut. &lt;br /&gt;
* Abrasive - This is a sand like substance, in this case garnet, which is mixed with the water to improve cutting.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Mixing tube - The tip of the nozzle assemble which mixes the water and abrasive together.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== User Manuals ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Waterjet Cutter ProtoMAX Manual.pdf|Waterjet Cutter User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet cutter is an amazing tool that can be used on a wide variety of materials including 1&amp;quot; steel!  However, it is limited to a 12&amp;quot; by 12&amp;quot; cut area with a 1&amp;quot; thickness being its maximum. Make sure the waterjet cutter is capable of handling your part and your material before going through all of the setup procedures. Like cutting many other two dimensional cutting tools, the cutting process should begin with a DXF file created from Solidworks or a similar software. Once a DXF fie has been created it can then be used to create a tool path using ProtoMAX LAYOUT. The detailed steps to do do this can be found in the general procedure but the most important step is to ensure that the waterjet pierces the material outside of the part outline. After the tool path is created and the machine has been properly set up, the job can be posted to the MAKE software, which is installed on the waterjet's laptop computer, to perform the cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete knowledge of the waterjet, the student will design a part in ProtoMAX LAYOUT, create a tool path for the part, and then cut it out. As part of the process the student will also perform the correct set up and shut down procedures. The part for this demonstration can be found in the procedure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Part Design in ProtoMAX LAYOUT:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Open ProtoMAX LAYOUT. Your screen should look something like this. [[File:ProtoMAX_LAYOUT.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool from the &amp;quot;Draw&amp;quot; menu on the left of the screen and create a 2&amp;quot; square with a 1&amp;quot; square notch in the top right corner. To do this, click anywhere on the screen to start the first line. This will bring a popup &amp;quot;Specify Dimensions&amp;quot; box where you will enter 2 into the &amp;quot;Rise (dy)&amp;quot; box. This will create a 2&amp;quot; vertical line. Select the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool again at the top of the first line and enter 1 into the &amp;quot;Run (dx)&amp;quot; box. This will create a 1&amp;quot; horizontal line to the right. Repeat this process until the box looks like this. The last line at the bottom can by created by selecting both open edges with the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool. [[File:Basic_shape_of_box.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;quot;Circle&amp;quot; tool and choose the intersect option from the bottom of the screen. Click the top, left corner of the square and enter 0.5 for the diameter of the circle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the circle using the &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; tool from the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; menu on the left of the screen (make sure to select the top and bottom of the circle). Next, select the &amp;quot;Move&amp;quot; tool from the left side of the screen and choose the &amp;quot;Intersect&amp;quot; option from the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the center of the circle where the corner of the square is and enter 0.5 and -0.5 for the &amp;quot;Run&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Rise&amp;quot; of the movement. Your screen should look something like this. [[File:Box_with_circle.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tool Paths''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the time, you will not be using ProtoMAX LAYOUT to design a part. Thankfully, this program can accept &amp;quot;.dxf&amp;quot; files, but you still have to create the tool paths. If using a &amp;quot;.dxf&amp;quot; file, import the file to skip the last section and start here to give it a tool path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before showing you how to create a tool path, there are a couple of things that you must keep in mind.  When the waterjet cuts it has a kerf which means it will take away some of the material it is cutting and you do not want it to be taking material away from your part. Instead, you want to remove material from the scrap that is not critical to the part's function and as a result the tool path must be created with this in mind. To do this, you must first keep in mind that the waterjet will always cut on the left side of the tool path lines. This changes based on the direction the nozzle is traveling; for example if the nozzle travels clockwise around a circle it will remove excess material outside of the circle and if it travels counterclockwise it will remove excess material from the inside of the circle. Because of this, you must control the direction that the nozzle will travel. For an outside cut, you want it to cut on the outside of the line to preserve the proper dimensions of the part. For and inside cut, you want the opposite of that. For a ring, you would want the nozzle to travel clockwise for the outside cut and counter-clockwise for the inside cut.  To control the direction of the nozzle, place lead-in and lead-out lines to specify the start or end of a cut and the cut direction. It is better to cut the inner bits first and then the outer bits last; and don't let the nozzle travel over any holes that are already cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Zoom in closer to the circle. Select the &amp;quot;Lead i/o&amp;quot; tool from the &amp;quot;Draw&amp;quot; menu on the left of the screen. Select the bottom edge of the circle and move the cursor upwards and click to create a lead in and out from the center of the circle. This will tell the waterjet to cut on the inside of the circle. Looking at this picture, you can see that one line is longer than the other. This longer line is the lead-in line. The nozzle will penetrate the material from the beginning of the long line and work its way down to the bottom of the circle. Once the nozzle hits the bottom, it will start counter-clockwise because the lead-in line is positioned at a slight angle to make counter-clockwise and easier direction than clockwise. This is how you tell the nozzle which direction to cut.[[File:Lead_i-o.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Next, place a &amp;quot;Lead i/o&amp;quot; near the bottom of the left wall on the square moving your cursor to the left and clicking to tell the machine to cut on the outside of the box.[[File:Lead_io2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the &amp;quot;Line&amp;quot; tool and connect the long, lead-in line of the box to the short, lead-out line of the circle. This is a traverse line telling the machine to move from the circle to the box after it has finished cutting the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use the line tool and click on the long, lead-in line for the circle.  Place the other end of the line so that it is at least 1/8&amp;quot; past both the left and bottom edge of the part. This will be the origin for the part and the cut. It should look something like this:[[File:Design_with_traverse_lines.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you get to decide the quality of each cut. Select the button at the bottom of your screen labeled &amp;quot;Quality&amp;quot;. You should see a range from 1 to 5, a Traverse, and Lead i/o. The range of 1 to 5 will change the machines cutting speed. The higher quality is 5 (slower) and the lowest quality is 1 (faster). Choose a quality of 5 for the circle by clicking &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; and then selecting every part of the circle. Do the same for the outer edge but with a quality of 1. Your part should look like this. Leave the traverse lines as green. This indicates where you don't want the machine to cut. [[File:Quality_lines.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Sometimes there are extra points or lines that are unnecessary. To remove these points, click &amp;quot;Clean&amp;quot;, click &amp;quot;start&amp;quot; on the popup window, and &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; on the second popup window. Doing this will insure a tidier cut.&lt;br /&gt;
# The last step is saving the file to be cut. Click &amp;quot;Post&amp;quot; on the right of your screen. If you have not saved yet, this will ask you to save your drawing; do so. It will then bring you to a window asking you to &amp;quot;Pick Start&amp;quot;. Select end of the traverse line that you defined as the origin.&lt;br /&gt;
# A window will popup showing the tool path. Zoom in closer to your part and inspect where the tool path is. The program will display cuts as a thick red line. Make sure that these projected cut lines are on the proper side of the line that you specified. If all looks well, hit &amp;quot;save&amp;quot; on the bottom, left of your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Waterjet Operation :'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the water valve located on the wall behind the waterjet. It will be open when the handle is parallel to the water pipe. Be sure to only turn in on BEFORE powering the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
# Check the pressure gauge to verify that the water pressure is 40 psi or greater.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill the tank to the top of the metal ribs with the water hose on the right side of the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
# Check the garnet hopper. If it is low, fill it up.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the computer and plug in the USB.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the waterjet cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Zero the waterjet cutter head using MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Push the clear plastic hose into the hole located on the side of the nozzle. This hose is called the abrasive feed tube and is used to mix abrasive into the water.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the nozzle between two of the metal ribs, close the lid, and test the nozzle using MAKE. When closing the lid, the support bar on the right side of the lid must be lifted otherwise it will not close. There are two things that should be checked when performing the nozzle test. First, check that the water is flowing through the nozzle. This is necessary because the nozzle can get clogged. Second, check that there is abrasive flowing through plastic tube. It flows quickly but can be identified by a sparkling in the tube as it flows.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the lid, position the material in the machine, and clamp it down. To clamp down the material, first slip the clamping post into the slot on the crossbar and the twist clockwise to tighten it into place. Then slide the material clamp over the post and push down to tighten. Repeat this process with any other clamps that are needed to secure the material. The clamping system can be seen below.[[File:Waterjet_clamps.jpg|none|thumb|479x479px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Load the cut file into MAKE, select the material being cut, and enter its thickness.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the origin point for the machine in MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the nozzle over the material and adjust the height of the nozzle very carefully making sure the adjustment tool has enough room to wiggle up and down. Do this by loosening the knob on the side of the nozzle with one hand while holding the nozzle with the other. Be very careful not to drop the nozzle onto the material as it could be broken. Slide the adjustment tool, pictured below, under the nozzle and then carefully lower the nozzle onto it. Tighten the knob once the nozzle is positioned correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Continue to fill the tank with more water so that there is about 1/8&amp;quot; of water above the surface of the material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Execute a dry run using MAKE while ensuring that the nozzle will not collide with anything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the orange rubber cone down, run the cut. While the cut is running look for material excess floating up; pieces of cut material floating up and getting wedged between the nozzle and other material or clamps could cause a catastrophic failure. If you see any of these things, pause the cut and remove any obstructions before resuming.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Waterjet Shutdown:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the material and clamps from the work area. &lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the abrasive feed tube from the nozzle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the nozzle between two of the metal ribs and run a nozzle test to clear any remaining abrasive from the nozzle and prevent future clogging. Also known as purging the nozzle of garnet. &lt;br /&gt;
# Bring the nozzle back to its home position. &lt;br /&gt;
# Close MAKE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Shut down the laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn off the waterjet. &lt;br /&gt;
# Push down on the drain tube to begin letting water out of the tank. Do not pull on the drain tube because it can pop off. &lt;br /&gt;
# Drain the tank till it is half full or less. While the water is draining, use the hose to wash off any abrasive in the work area or stuck to the side of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Close the lid. &lt;br /&gt;
# Close the water valve so that the handle is perpendicular to the pipe. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
====ProtoMAX Layout====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WaterJet_Error_Message.png|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different types of errors that can show up after you post &lt;br /&gt;
*Collision error&lt;br /&gt;
*Possible offsets to wrong side&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside radii is smaller than offset&lt;br /&gt;
If your program has a collision error, the paths are probably overlapping. try situating the i/o lines so that they do not overlap.&lt;br /&gt;
If your program has a possible offsets to wrong side error, it means it is cutting on the wrong side. One way to fix that is to change the lead in angle so that it leads into the direction you want to cut in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Water Jet Cutter====&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few common issues you may run into when using the waterjet. First, there may be an issue reaching the proper water level for your material. This is caused by the drain tube on the right side of the tank being at the incorrect height and can be fixed by pushing the drain tube up or down to remove water or allow more to enter. Make sure to wear gloves when doing this to protect from bacteria and never pull on the tube because it can be pulled off. If the tube does pull off don't panic; wait for the water to drain low enough to push the tube back on and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another issue is that the abrasive may not be flowing through its tube when performing the nozzle test. If this is happening do not perform a cut until the abrasive if flowing properly. The first thing you should check is the abrasive tube. Make sure that it is completely pushed into the nozzle so that it can be pulled out of the hopper by the vacuum within the nozzle. If this does not fix the issue then there is most likely water in the hose and maybe even in the hopper which causes the abrasive to stick to the feed tube tube instead of flowing through properly. Remove the hopper splash guard, pull the feed tube out of the feed block, and then use an air hose to blow through the feed to clean out any moisture. These components can be seen in the image below. Sometimes the water will travel into the hopper itself and cause the abrasive to clump together. When this happens either wait a day for everything to dry out or carefully disassemble the hopper system and dry it out with the help of an ACE and the [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401434/nozzle-clog.htm?tocpath=MANUALS%7COPERATION%20GUIDE%7C_____11 user manual]. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Waterjet_Abrasive.jpg|none|thumb|799x799px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Water in the abrasive feed tube is most often caused by the nozzle being clogged. Unclogging the nozzle is a fairly intensive and delicate process and should be done with the help of an ACE.  Always reference the manufacturer's [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401434/nozzle-clog.htm?tocpath=MANUALS%7COPERATION%20GUIDE%7C_____11 nozzle clog procedure] for the complete process (video included). Before unclogging the nozzle, remove the yellow rubber cone and raise the nozzle as high as it can go while being careful not to let it drop onto the material. [[File:Waterjet_Nozzle.jpg|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Once this is done, use the included torque wrench to loosen the set screw holding the mixing tube (1) in place. Make sure to hold onto the tube when doing this so it does not drop out.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the tube and reinsert it upside down so that the pointed end is facing upward.&lt;br /&gt;
# Very carefully tighten the set screw to 15 in-lb using the torque wrench. The torque wrench will click when 15 in-lb is reached but it is very faint so tighten slowly or the entire tube will be crushed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Run a nozzle test using MAKE and make sure water is flowing through the tube. &lt;br /&gt;
# Using the torque wrench, carefully remove the mixing tube and reinsert it in its proper position with the pointed end facing down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the yellow rubber cone and then run a nozzle test to check that the clog is gone. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The waterjet has several items that need to be maintained by the student or the ACE. Please refer to the table below to see each procedure and how often it should occur. The details of each procedure can be found below as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Completion&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General washing&lt;br /&gt;
|After each use &lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Change pump oil&lt;br /&gt;
|After first 50 hrs of use and every subsequent 500 hrs of use &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Change water filter &lt;br /&gt;
|When the filter gauge approaches 25 psi or lower while the pump is running&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Remove material from tank bottom&lt;br /&gt;
|Whenever garnet abrasive reaches the bottom of the garnet collection bins or when excessive water turbulence is noticed during cutting&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace table slats &lt;br /&gt;
|Rotate monthly or more frequently if needed; replace when excessively scored and no longer stable&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate x-y axis &lt;br /&gt;
|After 500 cutting hours or if squeaking&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace nozzle filter &lt;br /&gt;
|After approximately 80 cutting hours or more frequently if needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Rotate mixing tube&lt;br /&gt;
|Rotate 90 degrees (one quarter turn) every 8 hours of cutting to even out wear&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace or Justin &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# General washing - This consists of washing off any abrasive from the inside of the machine into the bottom of the tank using the water hose, including the lid. &lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the pump oil click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/change-pump-oil.htm?tocpath=MANUALS%7CMAINTENANCE%20GUIDE%7CPump%20Maintenance%7C_____2 here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the water filter click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/change-water-filter.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on cleaning the tank click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/clean-catcher-tank.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the table slats click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/change-water-filter.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on lubricating the y axis click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/lube-y-lead-screw.htm here] or [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/lube-x-lead-screw.htm here] for the x axis.&lt;br /&gt;
# For details on changing the nozzle filter click [https://knowledgebase.omax.com/protomax/content/401440/replace-nozzle-filter.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
# To rotate the mixing tube, first loosen the set screw with the torque wrench while holding the tube in the other hand. Twist the tube a quarter turn and make sure it is pressed all the way up so that it is seated properly. Tighten the set screw with the torque wrench set to 15 in-lb while looking out for the faint click which signifies the proper tightness. Make sure to set the torque wrench to 0 when finished.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Virtual_Reality_Welding_Station&amp;diff=12027</id>
		<title>Virtual Reality Welding Station</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Virtual_Reality_Welding_Station&amp;diff=12027"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:56:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Vault&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Miller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Augmented Arc Welding Simulator&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=MJ155089D&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Welding simulator.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:AugmentedArc_Simplified_Package.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Miller AugmentedArc&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1311&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Wyatt Bertis;wbertis22@georgefox.edu &lt;br /&gt;
 }}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The virtual reality welder is the industry’s most realistic welding simulation solution for classroom training. For beginner to advanced-level weld students, the AugmentedArc System simulates multiple welding processes, blending real-world and computer-generated images into a unique, augmented reality environment. Below is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?time_continue=193&amp;amp;v=wYRymhZrFmk}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* Base metal - The metal pieces that are being joined together. For the simulator there are several base metal configurations in the form of the blue coupons.&lt;br /&gt;
* Coupons - Small pieces of metal used to practice welding.&lt;br /&gt;
* Weld Metal/Electrode - The metal added to the base metal to create a weld.&lt;br /&gt;
* Torch - The piece that is held while welding and feeds the weld metal into the base metal.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIG Welding - Metal inert gas is a welding process in which an electric arc forms between a consumable MIG wire electrode and the base metal, which heats the base metal, causing them to melt and join. Along with the wire electrode, a shielding gas feeds through the welding torch, which shields the process from contaminants in the air. This is the easiest and most common type of welding and it is recommended that you start with this method. DC or AC current can be used for actual MIG welding but the AR welding station only uses DC current.&lt;br /&gt;
* TIG Welding - Tungsten inert gas is an arc welding process that uses a non-consumable tungsten electrode to produce the weld. The weld area and electrode is protected from oxidation or other atmospheric contamination by an inert shielding gas (argon or helium), and a filler metal is normally used, though some welds, known as autogenous welds, do not require it. This is difficult to master but provides great control when creating a weld. It is also useful for welding many metals besides steel. &lt;br /&gt;
* Stick Welding - A manual arc welding process that uses a consumable electrode covered with a flux to lay the weld. An electric current, in the form of either alternating current or direct current from a welding power supply, is used to form an electric arc between the electrode and the metals to be joined. The workpiece and the electrode melts forming a pool of molten metal (weld pool) that cools to form a joint. As the weld is laid, the flux coating of the electrode disintegrates, giving off vapors that serve as a shielding gas and providing a layer of slag, both of which protect the weld area from atmospheric contamination. This is the oldest form of welding and is still popular; however there is not a stick welder in the maker hub.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:O276533H MIL.pdf|Virtual Reality Welding Station User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The operation of the AR Welding station is simple. First you will select a torch for the type of weld you want to practice and plug in the machine. After that it is a simple matter of setting up an exercise based on difficulty, welding method, and weld type. See the image below to learn how to adjust different weld parameters and navigate the software. It is recommended that you start with the pre-programmed exercise to begin and then move on to custom exercises as you become more experienced. The general weld type is determined by what piece is being welded; the options include liner and cylindrical butt, lap, and T joints. Before the exercise begins you will have to calibrate the AR helmet. The calibration process occurs at the beginning of the exercise and is completed by following the instructions given by the AR helmet. After the calibration is completed complete the exercise, view the results, and then repeat. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the virtual reality welder, students will get the idea as to how the welding machines work, whether that be arc, MIG, or TIG welding. Once students earn a score of 90 or higher on the simulation, they have the opportunity to work with the actual welders in the welding shop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up Simulator&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug in extension cord (make sure it won’t trip anyone) for power.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip switch on back of machine to turn on. &lt;br /&gt;
# Press power button on the front of the machine and wait for the system to start up.&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach welding process of your choice (see welding processes section down below).&lt;br /&gt;
# At login screen, select user. Guest works well. &lt;br /&gt;
# Select right or left handed. This is important because it affects the angle the torch should be held at when performing an exercise. &lt;br /&gt;
# Open an exercise. There are four choices for creating an exercise: Open, GMAW (MIG), GTAW (TIG), SMAW (Stick). If you know what type of weld you want to practice go for the open exercise because it will allow for the most weld customization such as wire feed speed (WFS), wire diameter, and weld pattern. If this is a new experience, select the type of weld you are practicing and roll with one of the preset courses. &lt;br /&gt;
# On the top of the screen the welding parameters are displayed and will be in red if they are not set properly. Use the control panel (pictured below) to adjust them as needed. Most often you will need to adjust the voltage, amperage, and gas flow rate. This is to account for the electrode and base metal thickness so that the weld will penetrate properly. [[File:Weld Panel.png|none|thumb|594x594px| (1) Power On/Off Button Use button to turn system on and off. (2) Helmet Light Control Use button to turn helmet light on and off, and change intensity of light. (3) Filler Rod Light Control (TIG) Control not used with latest software.   (4) Volume Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease volume of helmet speakers.   (5) Display (Zoom) Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to magnify images on display screens.   (6) Augmented Reality (AR) Button Use button to turn augmented reality feature on and off.   (7) System Settings Button Use button to access system settings menu. Use the settings menu to change language, units of measure (standard or metric), camera settings and other parameters. After starting an exercise, use the System Settings button to adjust video device settings and optimize AR tracking for the room lighting conditions.  (8) Clean Slag Button Use button to remove slag from augmented reality workpiece when Stick and FCAW welding. Slag must be cleaned for test results to be displayed.   (9) Shielding Gas Flow Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease the shielding gas flow for the MIG and TIG weld processes.   (10) Gun Trigger Selection Button Use button to select either two-step or four-step trigger operation.   (11) Amperage/Wire Feed Speed Selection Button Use button to select the weld parameter (amperage or wire feed speed) to be adjusted (see Item 12).  (12) Amperage/Wire Feed Speed Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease amperage or wire feed speed (see item 11).  (13) AC/Polarity Selection Button Use button to select AC weld output or DCEP or DCEN weld polarity.  (14) Voltage Adjustment Buttons Use buttons to increase or decrease weld voltage.   (15) System Navigation Buttons Use buttons to navigate AR system programs and select menu items.  (16) OK (System Selection) Button Use button to activate selected menu items.  (17) System Cancel Button Use button to stop the AR program or activity in use, or return to the previous screen.  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Place Helmet on head and size to head. &lt;br /&gt;
# Follow instructions in the helmet to calibrate the simulator and then begin welding.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press cancel to exit. There is also an option to view results that is very helpful. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching Welding Processes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MIG:&lt;br /&gt;
# Take the connector of the MIG torch and align the 4 holes with the connecting port on the front of the machine (left side).&lt;br /&gt;
# Twist the threaded end, but do not over tighten.&lt;br /&gt;
# To remove, unscrew the connector.&lt;br /&gt;
Stick:&lt;br /&gt;
# Grab clamp with the small cord attached.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align the pins with the 5 holes of the connector and with the connecting port on the front of the machine (right side).&lt;br /&gt;
# To remove, press the silver button and softly pull straight out (do not twist).&lt;br /&gt;
# See item 8 above, use Clean Slag Button to assure test results will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
TIG:&lt;br /&gt;
# Grab the cable with TIG torch attached.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align the 4 holes of the connector with the connecting port on the front of the machine (left side - same as MIG).&lt;br /&gt;
# Screw in while holding the connector (do not over tighten).&lt;br /&gt;
# To remove, unscrew the connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clean up:&lt;br /&gt;
# Take the helmet off and place it on the 2nd shelf of the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect welding process.&lt;br /&gt;
# Exit out of the exercise.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press power button on front of the machine and wait for screen to be completely blank.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to off on the back of machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Unplug the extension cord and leave it coiled up neatly underneath the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
# Stack work pieces neatly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Coil up all cables of torches used and neatly place on the bottom shelf of the cart; leaving the space better than you found it if possible. &lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure that the cables are not tangled and do not pull on them if they are. This can damage the cables. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t drop the helmet, always place on cart when your not wearing it. It is expensive so take good care of it.&lt;br /&gt;
* When someone enters the room, make sure they know about the extension cord to prevent tripping. &lt;br /&gt;
* Do not aggressively over tighten the connectors of the welding torches or they could be damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure to press silver button when releasing the connector of the stick torch or it could break. &lt;br /&gt;
* Do not cut power to the machine before it is completely shut down.&lt;br /&gt;
* Always lay torches completely on top of the table and avoid sharp bends in the wire to prevent damage to the torches. &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure overhead clamp is secured tightly before using or you could get smacked in the head. &lt;br /&gt;
* Do not scratch the coupons as the simulator needs the markings to read your weld.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Vault - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
* The most common issue with this device is the AR flickering on and off and this is extremely annoying because the welding process is halted each time this occurs. To fix this pay close attention to the red arrows on the side of the screen and move your view angle around until they disappear signify that the helmet is oriented with the coupon correctly. If the problem persists, press the AR button to perform a lighting calibration. You can also experiment with different brightness levels for the lights on the front of the helmet. &lt;br /&gt;
* If at any point an unfamiliar alert pops up on the screen, consult the Ace or the user manual to determine the severity of the error and how to fix it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
Besides occasionally updating software, the only required maintenance is general cleaning. General cleaning consists of wiping dust off the machine when needed, making sure the space is kept neat and tidy, and make sure all cords and torches are in their place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General cleaning &lt;br /&gt;
|After each use or as needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Update Software&lt;br /&gt;
|Whenever a new version of software is released&lt;br /&gt;
|ACE&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vinyl_Printer%2BCutter&amp;diff=12026</id>
		<title>Vinyl Printer+Cutter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vinyl_Printer%2BCutter&amp;diff=12026"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:56:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Hub&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Vinyl&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Roland&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=BN-20&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=ADP2248&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Vinyl_cutter_printerIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Vinyl Printer&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:roland-bn-20.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Roland BN-20 Vinyl Printer&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1258&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Summer Martindale;martindales@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Levi Interian-Uc;linterianuc23@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 }}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|375px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some safety instructions for the {{PAGENAME}}. Remember... SAFETY FIRST!!!&lt;br /&gt;
* Never turn off the main power supply. The printer must routinely empty the print head to prevent it from clogging and it cannot do so without power. &lt;br /&gt;
* The printer will automatically pause if the front door is opened and the back is open. Keep hands and clothing away from the back of the printer to prevent pinching and tangling.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Sometimes vinyl scraps can be oddly shaped and can get wrinkled up when traveling through the media guides. Make sure the piece slides through easily before printing so this does not cause issues.  &lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended that the machine get used about once a week to prevent issues such as nozzle clogging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vinyl Printing is the process of applying ink to vinyl sheets to produce graphics using a conventional inkjet printing method with solvent based inks. This is useful for making images into stickers, creating t-shirt graphics, and any task where the appearance of vinyl needs to be changed. Printers similar to this are standard in small scale custom clothing companies due to how easy it is to take a graphic from Adobe Illustrator to a piece of vinyl. The BN-20 packs everything into one, powerful, profit-producing package. With award-winning eco-solvent inks including metallic and white options, a range of material compatibility and integrated contour cutting, it is easily the most versatile print device in its class. The BN-20 is perfect for creating t-shirt graphics, poster prints, stickers and decals – all from the comfort of your desktop. &lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d6J1yLQyGNE}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1jgmG87EJc8}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CZ75bp0_fP8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* Graphic - The image, logo, lettering or similar design that is being printed. &lt;br /&gt;
* Adobe Illustrator - The software used to set up graphics to be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Weeding - Removing the excess vinyl material with the tools found in the drawer below the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
* Versawoks - The software that interacts with the printer to perform a print.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Vector images - An image constructed with mathematical formulas which makes it easy to resize and perform other edits.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Raster images - An image constructed with pixels which means they cannot be resized without a change in resolution.   &lt;br /&gt;
* See below for specific machine terminology. &lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Vinyl Printer Terms.png|none|thumb|866x866px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:BN-20 USE EN R2.pdf|Vinyl Printer+Cutter User Manual]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This user manual does a good job of visually showing the details of operating the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Almost any file type can be used as a graphic when using the vinyl printer but they all must be brought into Illustrator or Inkscape to add a cut line. Note that a vector file such as a .pdf will work the best. The cut line tells the printer to cut out the image that is being printed so it can be weeded properly before it is applied. The cut lines will appear as red dotted lines. There are many ways to create a cut line and it is up to the user to determine which process will be the easiest for their graphic. Once a cut line has been created, the file is saved as an .eps and then opened in Versaworks to finalize any print settings before performing the print. After the print is completed it should be left to dry for 20 minutes before being applied to another object. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
Print out and weed a graphic of your choice. If you are indecisive use a George Fox logo from the [https://www.georgefox.edu/offices/communications/creative_srv/logos/index.html website]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Loading Material:&lt;br /&gt;
# The vinyl printer is capable of printing on any type or size of vinyl but matte vinyls will provide the best results. Sticker vinyls can be found on the vinyl cutter or in the cabinet under the computer while heat transfer vinyls can be found in the vinyl printer or in the cabinet to the right of the printer. Scrap pieces can be found in the bin next to the computer and are loaded into the printer just like a roll is.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the secondary power button to turn on the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
# The loading process always begins by pushing the loading lever backwards. This opens the media clamps so the vinyl can be slid through the printer. &lt;br /&gt;
# The media guides are critical to keeping the vinyl in place while printing and must be adjusted to fit the width of the vinyl. Do so by sliding the left media guide to the edge of the vinyl piece. When doing this make sure the pinch roller is above a grit roller or the printer will NOT work. You may have to play with the piece orientation or width to make this possible.&lt;br /&gt;
# Feed the vinyl through the printer from the back of machine so that it passes under the media clamps. The purpose of the media clamps is to keep the edges of the vinyl from interfering with the print head so this is an important piece to remember. Feel free to reference the image below. [[File:Vinyl Clamps.png|none|thumb|463x463px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Finish the loading process by pulling the loading lever forward and making sure the door is closed. If everything is done correctly the printer will move around the material a bit and then sit quietly. If there is beeping then something is not set up correctly. If the door is not closed the print will not happen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparing Graphics: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, it is important to understand the differences between a vector and a raster when setting up graphics to be printed. Raster images use many colored pixels or individual building blocks to form a complete image. JPEGs, GIFs and PNGs are common raster image types. Almost all of the photos found on the web and in print catalogs are raster images. Because raster images are constructed using a fixed number of colored pixels, they can’t be dramatically resized without compromising their resolution. When stretched to fit a space they weren’t designed to fill, their pixels become visibly grainy and the image distorts. This is why altered photos may appear pixilated or low resolution. Further, because a raster image is composed of many tiny pieces it is difficult to distinguish one object from another within the image. Vector images, alternatively, allow for more flexibility. Constructed using mathematical formulas rather than individual colored blocks, vector file types such as SVG, EPS, AI and PDF are excellent for creating graphics that frequently require resizing. Also, each object within a vector file is assigned to a distinct layer within Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape which means an object can be moved, resized, and recolored without affecting the rest of the image. Having a graphic in vector format can be helpful because it is easy to remove the vinyl background from the graphic by adding a cut line around the object. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Adobe Illustrator: &lt;br /&gt;
# Open the graphic in Illustrator 2017 and perform any desired editing. Most of the time nothing will need to be changed with the exception of converting a raster to a vector in order to add a cut line around a specific part of the graphic. To do this:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If your file is saved as an .eps you can just skip all these steps and just drag and drop. If not you will need to do the following to convert to a vector file.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To import a normal picture into Adobe Illustrator, do [File] &amp;gt; [Place] and then click and drag to the desired size.The graphic can then be converted to vectors by clicking [Object] &amp;gt;[Flatten Transparency].&lt;br /&gt;
#*Next, click on the image to bring up several options at the top of the screen and select the [Trace] function. When doing this make sure to select the [Expand] option. This will break the image up into components which can be edited individually.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If you want to remove a part of a graphic, you would select the section you want to remove in the layers tab and then hit the trash can icon.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note that this process works well for simple images with few colors. If the image is super complicated it will lose a lot of detail and still be difficult to work with because of the many layers that are created.&lt;br /&gt;
# In essence, a cut line is a 0.25 pt line (called a stroke in Illustrator) that is correctly colored and labeled so Versaworks can read it properly. The stroke can be added around specific layers (great for logos), or around the entire graphic (better for images). The advantage of adding a stroke around each layer is that it is possible to completely weed out vinyl between two parts of an image instead of leaving a piece of uncolored vinyl. For details on adding the cut line follow the steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Select the entire graphic and add a 0.25 stroke to the graphic. The [Stroke] option can be found in the toolbar at the top of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Click on the color options to the left of the [Stroke] option and then click on [New Swatch] on the bottom edge of the box. A window will open up.  &lt;br /&gt;
#* Name the new swatch [CutContour]. Make sure to use the exact capitalization or it will not work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Change the color type from [Process Color] to [Spot Color]&lt;br /&gt;
#* Make sure that the color system is set to RGB&lt;br /&gt;
#* Drag the red bar all the way up to 255 and make sure the other sliders are at 0.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Hit okay. At this point there should be a bright red line surrounding the graphic and it is ready to be printed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Now that the graphic is ready, save it as an Adobe EPS file (.EPS) so it will be able to be printed in Versaworks. &lt;br /&gt;
For Inkscape:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open or import your graphic and perform any desired edits. To create the cut line you will need to have a vector object so that a stroke can be added. If your graphic is already a vector format great, but if it is not there are two options. &lt;br /&gt;
#* First you can draw a shape around the graphic and use that as the cut line. This option works well for high quality images because there is no compromise in image detail. The downside is that it is difficult to cut out precise shapes from the graphic because it is difficult to get shapes to match up correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The second option is to convert the graphic to a vector format using a bitmap. Do this by clicking [Path] &amp;gt; [Trace Bitmap] and then pressing [Okay]. There are several different options in the bitmap menu that you can experiment with to find the best results. Generally, the color option works the best. Finish the process by right clicking and selecting the [ungroup] option so that each piece of the graphic can be edited.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Create the cut line. Do this by selecting the shape that you would like to cut out, right clicking, and then selecting [Fill and Stroke]. Then add a stroke of any width (0.25 pt works well) and any color. Ideally this would be a spot color and named CutContour just like Illustrator but Inkscape does not have the same options. The downside of using a normal stroke is that the cut settings in Versaworks must be adjusted to treat the stroke as a cut line. This can be an issue if you have several adjacent shapes creating a graphic but you only want to cut around the outside of the objects. To prevent this, select the group of objects you want to cut around, make sure there are no strokes around them, and copy/paste a new copy of them next to the old ones. Select the copy and  then go to [Path] &amp;gt; [Union]. This will combine the group of objects into one shape with a continuous outline that will be cut out, but notice that the new singular object will be one color. Add a stroke to the new object and make sure to turn off the fill, then use the page coordinates to place the new object in the same place as the original group. You should be able to see the stroke surrounding your original object; this will be your cut line.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the file as a .EPS to be imported into Versaworks&lt;br /&gt;
# In Versaworks, click on the setting symbol next to job queue A or B. &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the scissor icon on the left side of the settings window and check the [Cut all paths] option. This will treat the stroke as a cut line as it is qualified as a path. &lt;br /&gt;
Printing and Cutting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the material is loaded properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open up Roland Versaworks. This can be found on the desktop and is where the printing is done from. &lt;br /&gt;
# Open the .eps file of the desired graphic. There are two different job queues that it can be put into but it doesn't matter which one is used if you are only printing one job. Note: The graphic will appear to be a low quality image in the preview window but this is just how the software operates.&lt;br /&gt;
# Double click on the graphic to open a high definition preview of the image to check that everything is working properly. Sometimes the colors may not carry over properly so make sure they look good. If something looks off then there are some color settings that can be changed when saving the EPS file. Mainly, make sure that the cut line is indicated by a moving, dashed, red line surrounding image.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go throughout the different tabs on the far left and change anything that needs to be changed. This can be many things such as ink values, cutting or borders. &lt;br /&gt;
# You might want to change the orientation or other parameters before starting the print; to do this go to [Job] &amp;gt; [Job Settings].&lt;br /&gt;
# Before you print, remember that the origin is rotated 180 degrees. So you will need to have your image on the TOP RIGHT if you want to print of the bottom left. &lt;br /&gt;
# Finally, right click on the desired file name in the job queue and hit print.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the cut is finished turn off the machine with the secondary power button but make sure to leave the main power switch on to prevent damage and wait 20 minutes before interacting with the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Additional Functions==&lt;br /&gt;
While editing the image you will see 11 different tabs you can go under. Each of these has different ways to edit the image. Starting out, we are on the 'layout' tab. The next tab that we want to mess with is the 'color adjustment'. If your prints have colors that you don't want or a tint of a certain color, you can adjust the color to properly print your image. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Color.png|none|thumb|866x866px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The 'cut controls' tab can control the amount of passes, speed and force that the printer will perform. You most likely won't have to change anything unless you are using a different material to cut. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cut.png|none|thumb|866x866px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The 'clip and tile' tab allows you to cut the image into different 'tiles' and have you image be split into multiple prints. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clip.png|none|thumb|866x866px]]&lt;br /&gt;
These three tabs are the ones that you might need to use, if any.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparing for Transfers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the type of vinyl and the application it is being used for you will have different procedures for transferring the vinyl. When working with the heat transfer vinyl, used for making shirts and such, there are two main ways to do this. First, you can print the mirror of the graphic so that no transfer paper is needed. Second, you can print it normally and then use clear transfer paper to hold everything in place during application. This second option is also used for the standard sticker vinyl and can be done by performing the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the weeding kit to remove all unwanted sections of the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Tweezers are used to pinch and pull up unwanted sections.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The rounded dental tools are used to hold down wanted sections to prevent them being peeled off with unwanted sections.&lt;br /&gt;
# If necessary, cut the graphic off from any excess material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scissors to cut out a piece of clear transfer paper slightly larger than your cut-out graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position it sticky side down over your graphic and use a squeegee to apply it the the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
#* This is done starting in the center of the graphic, and smoothed with the squeegee from the center out.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once it is applied, flip the layers over and peel the backing of the vinyl material from the transfer paper.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Peel at the greatest angle possible, aim for parallel to the transfer paper so that none of the vinyl is pulled off. &lt;br /&gt;
# The graphic is then ready to be transferred onto the desired material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
*If for whatever reason the machine is being difficult, you can look in the upper left corner and the machine will most likely tell you what's wrong. Where it typically says 'Printer Ready' it might say what the issue with the printer is. &lt;br /&gt;
* [[File:Vinyl1.png|none|thumb|866x866px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The most common issue is the printer beeping when trying to load a piece of material. To fix this, make sure the pinch roller is positioned above a grit roller by finding a new piece of vinyl or rotating/cutting down the current piece.&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are globs, spots, or streaks of ink occurring during the printing process then it is time to manually clean the print head (see maintenance). &lt;br /&gt;
* There may be issues with the vinyl being difficult to weed due to pieces sticking together. The heat transfer vinyl is more difficult to weed in general so some of this may be expected but one thing that will help is to increase the cutting force before printing. By default it is set to 50 gf but feel free to increase it if weeding is excessively difficult. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any printer, this machine will periodically need to have its ink replaced. Additionally there are other tasks that should be completed to keep the printer fully functional.These include; keeping equipment free of dirt and grime, both manually and automatically maintaining the print head, and replacing cutting blades and print head wipers. &lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fO44grz5KnI}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean Print Area &lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student &lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Change Ink &lt;br /&gt;
|When the low ink warning appears on the computer&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace the Waste Cartridge&lt;br /&gt;
|Once the full cartridge warning appears on the computer &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Medium Print Head Cleaning &lt;br /&gt;
|Once there is nozzle clogging, ink spots, or dragged dirt &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Manual Print Head Cleaning &lt;br /&gt;
|If the medium cleaning does not solve the issues&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace Felt Wiper &lt;br /&gt;
|When the replace wiper warning appears&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace Blade &lt;br /&gt;
|When cut quality has decreased &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace &lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# Wipe any dust off the machine with a paper towel and the areas shown below. [[File:Printer cleaning.png|none|thumb|594x594px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# See user manual for procedure specifics.&lt;br /&gt;
# See user manual for procedure specifics.&lt;br /&gt;
# Should be completed if prints show signs similar to the image below; see user manual for procedure specifics.[[File:Vinyl printer errors.png|none|thumb|657x657px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# See user manual for procedure specifics.&lt;br /&gt;
# See user manual for procedure specifics.&lt;br /&gt;
# See user manual for procedure specifics.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=omcP7oPbHLE}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vinyl_Cutter&amp;diff=12025</id>
		<title>Vinyl Cutter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vinyl_Cutter&amp;diff=12025"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:56:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Hub&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Vinyl&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=GR-640&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Roland&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=KDF0752&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Vinyl_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Vinyl Cutter Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:vinyl_cutter.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc= The Roland GR-640 Vinyl Cutter&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1329&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Summer Martindale;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 }}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Description ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vinyl cutting is the process of cutting graphics out of vinyl to make adhesive vinyl applications. The maker hub has a Roland GR-640 cutter. It cuts larger format vinyl than the BN-20 [[Vinyl Printer]], but does not have printing capability. It is used to make vinyl cutouts for applications such as signage, vehicle graphics, apparel, etc. The vinyl cutter is used primarily for cutting vinyl sheeting, but can cut other materials if needed for a specific project, see [https://www.rolanddga.com/products/vinyl-cutters/camm-1-gr-large-format-cutters/applications this application page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example process video:&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=v7uNKdjR1JY}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user manual has instruction on cutting, maintenance, and calibration. After opening the user manual, select the &amp;quot;Basic Edition&amp;quot; from the Table of Contents in the left column to view this information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:GR-640 540 420 User Manual english.pdf|Vinyl Cutter User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
* Weeding: the process of removing unwanted material after the vinyl has been cut&lt;br /&gt;
* Graphic: the chosen image/picture to be formatted and cut&lt;br /&gt;
* Adobe Illustrator: vector graphics software that can be used to make graphics and prep them for cutting&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--* Roland Cut Studio (RCS): an Ai extension used to finalize the format of the graphic and send it to the vinyl cutter for cutting--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Vector images: an image constructed with mathematical formulas which makes it easy to resize and perform other edits&lt;br /&gt;
* Raster images: an image constructed with pixels which means they cannot be resized without a change in resolution&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Training ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
For cutting materials, calendar vinyl rolls can be be found in the cabinet below the computers; heat transfer vinyl rolls can be found in the cabinet to the right of the vinyl printer; vinyl scraps including calendar vinyl, heat transfer vinyl, and digital print media vinyl pieces can be found in the vinyl scrap bin. Please do not use the digital print media vinyl rolls on the standard vinyl cutter (scrap pieces of digital print media vinyl are OK to use on the standard vinyl cutter). The digital print media vinyl rolls are only for printing stickers on the vinyl printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the vinyl cutter, vinyl rolls are loaded onto the two metal rollers with the vinyl fed in from the back of the machine. Vinyl pieces can be fed in from the front of the machine. For most projects, a small piece will be sufficient, so please use pieces from the scrap bin if possible. Further, it is possible to cut other vinyl based materials if you find they are compatible with the machine and have them cleared by Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graphics or text can be made in Adobe Illustrator, Inkscape, or your favorite vector graphics software. Ultimately, your file will need to be uploaded into Illustrator as the final step because the Roland CutStudio extension--which talks to the vinyl cutter and sends over the cut information--lives inside of Adobe Illustrator. Illustrator can accept .ai files, .svg files, .pdf files, .dxf files, .eps files, and many more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
80 gf is the recommended cut force for calendar vinyl.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Demonstration ====&lt;br /&gt;
The student will draw a 1.5 in. x 1.5 in. graphic in Illustrator. Using the Roland CutStudio Extension, they will finalize and cut the graphic. To finish, they will weed the vinyl cutout. Learning the transfer paper process is optional but very useful for applying vinyl letters/words. The student is also responsible for setting up the vinyl cutter before it is used and resetting it after they are done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General Procedure ====&lt;br /&gt;
Loading Material:&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on power.&lt;br /&gt;
# Feed material through back of machine; the vacuum should engage.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align material with the rollers so it is covered at both corners and within the center if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
## Rollers can only be placed within the shiny silver strips located along the front of the cutter, above the header.&lt;br /&gt;
## Rollers are adjusted by sliding them using your fingers.&lt;br /&gt;
# If possible, check to ensure the material lines up evenly with both sets of measurement lines on the lower front of the cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
# If possible, leave an inch or two of excess material hanging down below the cutting head.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the arrow pad to select the type of media: roll, piece, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press [ENTER] to secure the material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Move the cutting head to the left of the stock via the directional keys, then hold [ORIGIN] to set the starting point of the cut.&lt;br /&gt;
Prepping a Graphic:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Adobe Illustrator:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ai 2024.jpg|1200px|none|Ai 2024 Home Page]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Use Adobe illustrator.&lt;br /&gt;
*Best practice is to start with a new work-space, then size the dimensions to the piece of material you are using.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Blank doc.jpg|1200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Open the Roland Cut Studio extension: Window &amp;gt; Extensions &amp;gt; Roland CutStudio&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Windows-Extensions-Roland CutStudios.jpg|1200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*For model setup, select the GR-640.&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up the graphic in Illustrator:&lt;br /&gt;
# File is .pdf (the ideal format):&lt;br /&gt;
## Use [File] &amp;gt; [Open].&lt;br /&gt;
## Hit [Window] &amp;gt; [Layers], this can also be dragged over to the toolbar on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
### Use this to remove all unnecessary cut paths by selecting only the individual cut line and clicking the trashcan icon in the lower right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
### You’ll know you’ve removed an essential path if that part of the image disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
### Usually the goal of this step is to remove any large borders around the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
## Image size can be edited using the size sliders located on the tool bar near the top of the screen, closer to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
# File is .jpg/png (any non-vector format):&lt;br /&gt;
## Use [File] &amp;gt; [Place].&lt;br /&gt;
## Click in the top left corner, then drag with the cursor until the graphic is the desired size.&lt;br /&gt;
## Use [Object] &amp;gt; [Flatten Transparency] to convert the graphic to vector form, use the high resolution preset.&lt;br /&gt;
## Click [Image Trace] on the tool bar near the top middle of the screen, then click [Expand], which enables cut lines to be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
### Once this step is done, the graphic’s cut lines should show up in the Roland Cut Studio preview area, and the graphic should turn black.&lt;br /&gt;
## Hit [Window] &amp;gt; [Layers], this can also be dragged over to the toolbar on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
### Use this to remove all unnecessary cut paths by selecting only the individual cut line and clicking the trashcan icon in the lower right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
### You’ll know you’ve removed an essential path if that part of the image disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
### Usually the goal of this step is to remove any large borders around the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
## Image size can be edited using the size sliders located on the tool bar near the top of the screen, closer to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
In Inkscape:&lt;br /&gt;
# If your file is already in a vector format go to [File] &amp;gt; [Open] to bring the graphic into Inkscape. If it is not a vector file go to [File] &amp;gt; [Import] and Inkscape will bring in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the page size to your desired dimensions under the [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties] menu. This will ensure that your graphic will not be larger than your piece of material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Convert your graphic to a vector if needed. Do this by clicking [Path] &amp;gt; [Trace Bitmap] and then pressing [Okay]. There are several different options in the bitmap menu that you can experiment with to find the best results. Generally, the color option works the best. Finish the process by right clicking and selecting the [ungroup] option so that each piece of the graphic can be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform any desired edits on your graphic. If there is something you don't know how to do use google; Inkscape is a popular software and there are a lot of internet resources. When the file is exported to Cut studio a cut line will automatically be added around the edge of each object similar adding a stroke around each individual object. This can be an issue if you have several adjacent shapes creating a graphic but you only want to cut around the outside of the objects. To prevent this, select the group of objects you want to cut around and then got to [Path] &amp;gt; [Union]. This will combine the group of objects into one shape with a continuous outline that will be cut out, but the downside is that the new singular object will be one color so if the objects were originally different colors they will be lost. However this does not matter for the Vinyl Cutter because it can only cut one color of vinyl anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save your file as an .svg and open it in Illustrator to use the Roland CutStudio extension. &lt;br /&gt;
Cutting the graphic:&lt;br /&gt;
* Under the Roland Cut Studio extension, select your graphic to view it in the preview window.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Basketball preview.png|1200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
* After the file looks like intended, click on the &amp;quot;Output to Paths&amp;quot; button in the top right of the extension.&lt;br /&gt;
* This will bring up a window in which you select &amp;quot;Cut&amp;quot; when you are ready to cut.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Output to Paths Start Cut.png|1200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
* After the cut is finished, the window will reflect this status. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Output to Paths Finish Cut.png|1200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Unloading Material:&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the directional keys to unspool a small amount of excess material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the [SHEET CUT] button to slice the cut material off, the left edge of the material should be held during this process, taking care to stay out of the way during the slicing process.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press [MENU] until [UNSETUP] is displayed on the screen, then press [UNSETUP].&lt;br /&gt;
# Press [ENTER].&lt;br /&gt;
# Press [PINCH].&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the material by moving it through the rear of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn off power.&lt;br /&gt;
Transferring the Graphic:&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the weeding kit to remove all unwanted sections of the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
## Tweezers are used to pinch and pull up unwanted sections.&lt;br /&gt;
## The rounded dental tools are used to hold down wanted sections to prevent them being peeled off with unwanted sections.&lt;br /&gt;
# If necessary, cut the graphic off from any excess material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scissors to cut out a piece of clear transfer paper slightly larger than your cut-out graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position it sticky side down over your graphic and use a squeegee to apply it the the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
## This is done starting in the center of the graphic, and smoothed with the squeegee from the center out.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once it is applied, flip the layers over and peel the backing of the vinyl material from the transfer paper.&lt;br /&gt;
## Peel at the greatest angle possible, aim for parallel to the transfer paper.&lt;br /&gt;
## Try to peel in a direction that flows with the graphic.&lt;br /&gt;
# Position the peeled graphic over the medium it is to be applied to.&lt;br /&gt;
# Starting with one end, begin to feed the graphic down onto the surface.&lt;br /&gt;
## '''AS THIS IS DONE''', use a squeegee to firmly smooth outward in alternating left and right strokes starting from the midline of the graphic to remove air bubbles.&lt;br /&gt;
## Continue this process until the graphic is completely applied and all air bubbles are removed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Peel the transfer paper from the material, in the same manner as the backing of the vinyl was peeled off.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Vinyl does not have to be immediately applied to a surface. The process can be stopped at step 4.1 of Transferring the Graphic, and applied later in a similar manner. Using the squeegee to apply is also optional but may result in a less polished final product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certification ==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Not cutting all the way through material.&lt;br /&gt;
** Increase cut pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
** If pressure has to be increased by 50 to 60 gf, replace the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Material is ripping/curling when cut.&lt;br /&gt;
** Replace blade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cuts not being made cleanly.&lt;br /&gt;
** Clean the blade holder cap.&lt;br /&gt;
** If problems persist, replace the blade holder.&lt;br /&gt;
** Blade might be dull and need to be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
* Blade protector is scratched and not cutting cleanly.&lt;br /&gt;
** Replace blade protector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintenance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General Maintenance ====&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the maintenance on the vinyl is incurred by use of the machine, instead of periodically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Specific Maintenance Tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cleaning Machine&lt;br /&gt;
|When parts are visibly dirty and after periods of heavy use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Changing Blade&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Changing/cleaning Blade Holder&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Changing Blade Protector&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Turn machine off before performing any maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cleaning Machine:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vinyl_cutter_maintenance.jpg|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Grit Rollers.&lt;br /&gt;
## Wipe away any accumulated grime.&lt;br /&gt;
# Display.&lt;br /&gt;
## Wipe clean with a dry cloth.&lt;br /&gt;
# Pinch Rollers.&lt;br /&gt;
## Remove any build up material with a brush, do not use a metal brush.&lt;br /&gt;
# General wipe down.&lt;br /&gt;
## Wipe down machine with a wet cloth.&lt;br /&gt;
Changing Blade:&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://files.rolanddga.com/files/gr_use_en/GR_USE_EN_00_basic_top.html Procedure in manual]&lt;br /&gt;
*#Click [Maintenance/Replacement].&lt;br /&gt;
*#Click [Replacing the Blade and the Separating Knife].&lt;br /&gt;
Changing/cleaning Blade Holder:&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://files.rolanddga.com/files/gr_use_en/GR_USE_EN_00_basic_top.html Procedure in manual]&lt;br /&gt;
*#Click [Maintenance/Replacement].&lt;br /&gt;
*#Click [Consumable Items].&lt;br /&gt;
*#Click [Cleaning the Blade Holder Cap] under Blade Holder.&lt;br /&gt;
Changing Blade Protector:&lt;br /&gt;
* Contact Roland DG.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vertical_Wood_Bandsaw&amp;diff=12024</id>
		<title>Vertical Wood Bandsaw</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vertical_Wood_Bandsaw&amp;diff=12024"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:55:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Wood Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Wood&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Laguna&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=mband 14BX220-250&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=17063967&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:wood_bandsaw_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Wood bandsaw icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:wood_bandsaw_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:wood_bandsaw.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Laguna Bandsaw&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1194&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|375px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t feed anything into the blade you don’t want cut. First off, it makes no sense and it could pull other stuff into the midst, like your own body. That isn't a good scenario, so let's prevent that.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plan out your cut before making it. Wasting material isn't a good idea, and it's more time consuming when you mess up.&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't try to cut too tight of radius. See the blade curve chart before cutting curves.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a push stick to keep your fingers at least 3&amp;quot; from the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hands and fingers out of the &amp;quot;danger zone&amp;quot; in front of the blade. &lt;br /&gt;
* Hold work piece firmly on the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bandsaw is generally defined as a saw blade in the form of an endless steel band that rotates around two or more wheels. This blade is a continuous metal band with teeth on one side. As the wheels rotate, so does the band, which creates the continuous sawing action. Because the direction of the blade is always downward toward the table, there is little danger (except for special cuts) that the wood will be thrown back at the operator, which is called a kickback. For safety reasons many woodworkers prefer the bandsaw especially when cutting small pieces. The unique feature of the bandsaw is that the workpiece can be rotated around the blade creating a curve. It is the tool most often used when curves have to be cut in wood. Because the bandsaw blade is fairly thin, it can cut thick stock with a minimum of horsepower. For this reason the bandsaw is often used when valuable pieces of wood are made into a thin piece of veneer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although the bandsaw is usually associated with cutting curves, a variety of straight cuts are easily made with the saw. In fact, it is often used to rip wood because it is much safer than a radial arm saw and also has a smaller saw cut, so it wastes less wood. This becomes very important when using expensive wood where waste must be kept to a minimum. The cut is safer because the force of the cut is straight down on the table; the work cannot be pulled back or kicked back, which sometimes happens with table or radial arm saws. The bandsaw can also cut very thick stock, which the radial arm, or table saw cannot do. The disadvantage of cutting with the bandsaw is that the surface finish of the cut is not as good as with the table or radial arm saw. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PDU_2sT0etc}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WaTC1sNTHuE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:...woodVerticalBandsawTerms.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:MBAND14BX110-0175_14_BX_110v&amp;amp;220v_bandsaw_06-07-2015.pdf|Vertical Wood Bandsaw User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert Text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the saw and cut out a curved shape.  After making the curved cut demonstrate using the fence to make a straight cut. A Training Venture (TV) that uses the {{PAGENAME}} is the [[Wooden Train Whistle]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the blade guides and fence are in place. These are meant to help your cut, so it is crucial that these are in place. &lt;br /&gt;
## Instructions on adjusting can be found in the manual, but they should be fine by default. The ace should take care of such issues.&lt;br /&gt;
### Blade guides (p. 33-34)&lt;br /&gt;
### Fence (p. 35-37)&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the upper blade guard so that it is just clearing the material being cut&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that the cutting teeth are facing down since the blade moves downward. Otherwise, it will not cut.&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that the blade has been properly tensioned (blade doesn’t have slack) and tracked (blade moves evenly and consistently as the wheels turn, doesn’t wander back and forth)&lt;br /&gt;
## Instructions on tensioning (p. 30) and tracking (p. 29) can be found in the manual&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the proper size and type of blade is in use&lt;br /&gt;
##[[File:...woodVerticalBandsawKerf.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Blade help is in the manual (p. 38-42)&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the saw on. ‘1’ turns on, ‘0’ turns off. [[File:...woodVerticalBandsawOnOff.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the workpiece firmly against the table, flat side down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Push material into blade at a moderate pace, using a push stick if necessary at the end of the cut.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the machine off once the cut is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the workpiece and reset the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Wood Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
# Suppose the bandsaw will not start. &lt;br /&gt;
## Check that the E-stop is fully pulled out.&lt;br /&gt;
## Check that the foot pedal brake has returned to its topmost position.&lt;br /&gt;
## Check that the electrical power cord is plugged into the power outlet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Little maintenance is needed to upkeep the Wood Vertical Bandsaw. Refer to the table below for specific tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|After each use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Blade Change&lt;br /&gt;
|When Dull&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rotate back blade guard 15 degrees&lt;br /&gt;
|Every 8 hours of use&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vertical_Bandsaw&amp;diff=12023</id>
		<title>Vertical Bandsaw</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vertical_Bandsaw&amp;diff=12023"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:55:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=DoALL&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=ML&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=5318110&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Metal&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1185&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=Vertical Bandsaw&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=[[File:vertical_bandsaw_icon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Vertical Bandsaw icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:vertical_bandsaw_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:doall_vertical_bandsaw_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Doall Model ML Vertical Bandsaw&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Used various pieces in straight, curved, or unusual shapes&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has QR code=File:Vertical  Bandsaw QR code.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Vertical Bandsaw is just like any other type of bandsaw in that it is a power tool used to cut various metal and wood pieces. The saw consists of a solid band of metal with edged teeth on it for ease of cutting. Those looking for uniform cutting results will make use of this type of saw.  While their main function is to cut curved or unusual shapes, they can also be used for straight cutting. These types of saws, specifically designed for metal cutting, are available in vertical and horizontal varieties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=A4htjvBCcEI&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gas9zMSpWZo}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
Blade Kerf - The material lost due to the width of the blade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blade Guide - Guide the blade to keep it cutting straight. Should be adjusted to ¼ in above material being cut. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjustment Knob - adjusts the height of the blade guide. Located at the back of the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adjustment Lock - locks the blade guide in place. Located at the back of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fence - Guides the stock through the blade. Attached to the side of the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Maual ML V-16 V-26 V-36 V-60.pdf|Vertical Bandsaw User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Doall_ML_Parts_Manual.pdf|Vertical Bandsaw Parts Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Vertical Bandsaw is just like any other type of bandsaw in that it is a power tool used to cut various metal and wood pieces. The saw consists of a solid band of metal with edged teeth on it for ease of cutting. Those looking for uniform cutting results will make use of this type of saw.  While their main function is to cut curved or unusual shapes, they can also be used for straight cutting. These types of saws, specifically designed for metal cutting, are available in vertical and horizontal varieties. The bandsaw will cut at a standard speed and is not to be changed by a student. If you think that you might need a faster-moving cut, contact Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete knowledge of the Vertical Bandsaw, the student will cut a piece of acrylic stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# The general procedure and additional knowledge can be found in the video above! The summary for operation is detailed below, but most of the stuff on the quiz will be in the video.&lt;br /&gt;
# Unlock the Blade Guide by turning the knob labeled &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; on the back of the machine. This allows you to alter the height of the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the Blade Guide Height by turning the knob labeled &amp;quot;Adjustment&amp;quot; on the back of the machine. A good height is about 1/4&amp;quot; above the piece you are cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Lock the Blade Guide by turning the knob labeled &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; on the back of the machine. This will secure the blade and provide a better cut.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the stock height by placing he stock next to the blade to ensure the 1/4&amp;quot; margin is there. Double checking is always a good thing.&lt;br /&gt;
# Aim the Blow Off Nozzle. This blows away all the shavings that occur during the cutting process. Aim directly where the blade will come in contact with the stock.&lt;br /&gt;
# Make use of the fence. This is the pushing tool that is hanging from the bottom of the machine that guides the stock through the blade. Bring it up against your piece.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the machine. The Black button is On, the Red button is Off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are ready to begin cutting! Apply a gentle, steady pressure using the fence so that the acrylic piece is getting cut by the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished cutting the piece, turn off the machine, remove the fence and the piece from the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
# Reset the Space! Use the shop vacuum to remove all shavings on and around the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
* Safety glasses must be worn when crossing into the shop area marked on the floor.&lt;br /&gt;
* No horseplay in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t do anything distracting to yourself or others while operating machinery.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not wear any loose clothing, jewelry, or lanyards.&lt;br /&gt;
* No hats or open toed shoes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hair will not extend below the collar.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not wear gloves while operating machinery.&lt;br /&gt;
* Food or drink is allowed when not operating machinery and it is kept a safe distance away from the machines.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not attempt to operate machinery in the shop that you have not been certified on by GFU engineering personnel.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not argue with volunteers or shop staff. Contact Justin Johnson if you have issues that need to be resolved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not operate machinery without a shop supervisor or trained volunteer in the shop with you. Never operate equipment alone in the shop.&lt;br /&gt;
* The first aid kit is located in the machine shop, next to the woodshop doors.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you see a safety violation inform the person immediately and encourage them to comply with the policies&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hand clear of the blade when cutting&lt;br /&gt;
* Securely hold stock when cutting&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not leave machine running while it is not cutting&lt;br /&gt;
* Wait for blade to stop moving before reaching for a small part near the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Don’t do anything that would require an additional rule to be added to this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If the machine is making clunking noises when cutting, use the wax to clean the blade and clean out the chips inside the machine by opening up the table. Consult a shop supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Vertical Bandsaw should always be clean before and after use. If something is not working and needs to be fixed, consult a shop supervisor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Blade Change&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed, usually when excessive force is needed to cut&lt;br /&gt;
|Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|Before and after each use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean inside of machine with vacuum&lt;br /&gt;
|Every 2 weeks&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vacuum_Former&amp;diff=12022</id>
		<title>Vacuum Former</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Vacuum_Former&amp;diff=12022"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:55:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Vault&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Formech&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=508DT&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=2728&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Vacuum Former.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Formech.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1305&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Sara Wytsma;swytsma23@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Formech 508DT Vacuum Former is a plastic molding machine that utilizes heat and a vacuum to stretch heated plastic over a mold. The vacuum former is great for thin plastic molds, although there are some limitations on the shape and size. The max dimensions for the mold are 17”x19” with a depth of 7.3&amp;quot;. The max thickness for the plastic sheet is 0.25&amp;quot;  Molds can be made from many types of materials.  It's fairly common to see molds made from wood.  Molds need to have some draft so they can be removed from the plastic.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?list=PL9xER4K4UWLuBZ1cCeyQFBH4FluaSZDel&amp;amp;v=J0YR0MpKcPI}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Table-''' The bed that the mold rests on.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Clamp Frame-''' The metal bars that captivate the plastic sheet as its heated and stretched over the mold. &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Toggle Clamp Screws-'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Draft Angle-''' The wall angle of a mold. This helps in removing the plastic off the mold.  &lt;br /&gt;
Knowing what the different buttons in the touchscreen operation mean is important in operating the vacuum former. The three primary ones are heat, vacuum, and release. For a full list, refer to the manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Manual-508DT.pdf|Vacuum Former User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Vacuum Forming Guide 200715.pdf|Vacuum Forming Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vacuum former can mold up to a 19&amp;quot;x17&amp;quot; square and to a depth of 7.3&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Molds must slant outwardly slightly to ensure that they can be popped out of the plastic after molding is finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The demonstration for the vacuum former can use one of the provided demonstration molds or a mold that the trainee brings. The trainee must show that they can set up the vacuum former and mold a part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Formech_Controls.JPG|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Place a mold into the tray and lower it.&lt;br /&gt;
* Mold cannot be concave and must slant outwards slightly or it will not be removable from the plastic.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place plastic into the clamps ensuring it completely covers the white seals.&lt;br /&gt;
* Turn on the heaters and set the temperature. The temperature should be 80-120 degrees Celsius. &lt;br /&gt;
* The heaters should take about 15 minutes to warm up.&lt;br /&gt;
* After 15 minutes roll the heater over the plastic&lt;br /&gt;
* Allow the heater to sit over the plastic for 90 seconds if the plastic is 1.8mm thick or 180 seconds if the plastic is 3.3mm thick.&lt;br /&gt;
* DO NOT OVERHEAT PLASTIC! this will cause the plastic to develop webbing after the vacuum which will ruin the mold. &lt;br /&gt;
* Lift the table.&lt;br /&gt;
* Turn on the vacuum.&lt;br /&gt;
* Let the plastic cool, then hit the release button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Lower the table to remove the plastic.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reset the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
* Parts of the machine can reach over 300 degrees C. Don't touch the heater or heat shield surrounding the heater. &lt;br /&gt;
* Never put your hand in a position it could be pinched by the molding frame. &lt;br /&gt;
* The formed plastic is very hot and sticky.  It could stick to you and continue to burn if you touch it. &lt;br /&gt;
* Some types of plastics could give off toxic fumes when heated. Check the SDS before working with materials you are unfamiliar with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Vault - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure to put draft on your form to prevent sticking. &lt;br /&gt;
If the plastic is not hot enough it won't pull down over the form.&lt;br /&gt;
If the plastic is too hot then it will develop webbing during the vacuum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspect&lt;br /&gt;
|As Needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace/Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Tormek_Sharpener&amp;diff=12021</id>
		<title>Tormek Sharpener</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Tormek_Sharpener&amp;diff=12021"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:34:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Vault&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1308&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|375px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Vault - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Through_Hole_Press&amp;diff=12020</id>
		<title>Through Hole Press</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Through_Hole_Press&amp;diff=12020"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:33:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:...PressyBoi.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=PCB Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Bungard&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=PL-FAVORIT&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=2018-2231&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Through_hole_pressIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Through Hole Press Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:image_pending.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:through_hole_press_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Favorit Through Hole Press&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1293&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|375px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Through Hole Press is a hand-operated through hole plating machine using rivets. A rivet is a component used to easily connect traces that are transitioning between the top and bottom layers of a PCB. As a whole, it is known as a via. Specifically, it is a small hollow copper tube that can be inserted on one side of the board, then - using a specialized rivet tool like the Through Hole Press - the rivets are pressed and deformed to connect both sides. There are other methods that carry out the same function, but using rivets is the fastest and most consistent method.  {{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ywfjknf6Vtg}}{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nz1TcfEnw-o}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Pcb-trace-geometry-2.png|Trace&lt;br /&gt;
File:...via.png|Via&lt;br /&gt;
File:...rivet.png|Rivet&lt;br /&gt;
File:...rubberMallet.png|Rubber Mallet&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Favorit manual e.pdf|Through Hole Press User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Through hole press instructions and size chart.pdf|Instructions and Size Chart]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.bungard.de/index.php/en/products/through-hole-plating-line/through-hole-plating Product Home Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rivets are used to connect traces on the top and bottom layers of a PCB. Traces are paths of conductive ink that connect components. Rivets can be pressed using either the Through Hole Press or a rubber mallet. Each method has its perks, so students will learn both methods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete knowledge of the press, the student will press 2 rivets by using a rubber mallet and 2 rivets using the press. A test PCB with many holes of different sizes will be provided and reused among students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Hole Sizing&lt;br /&gt;
##Before pressing a rivet, you need to make sure you design the holes so that they fit well. For a rivet to fit nicely in a hole, the hole diameter needs to be 0.1 mm (3.9 mils) larger than the rivet outer diameter. Use the table below to see what types of rivets Voltera offers. Also, refer to the chart below to assure you have the right size rivet for the hole you are pressing it into.[[File:Through_hole_press_chart_snippet.PNG|none|thumb|500x500px]][[File:...rivetTable.png|none|thumb]]'''NOTE: Currently the tool for 0.4mm rivets is broken, so this size should not be used in designs. Use 0.6mm rivets instead.'''&lt;br /&gt;
##Additionally, these rivets are hollow, so these can also be used to secure headers on your PCB. When placing vias in your design program, ensure the right drill size is used so the PCB Printer leaves enough space when printing the ink.&lt;br /&gt;
#Using Through Hole Press&lt;br /&gt;
##Follow the instructions in the following video for setting up the correct tool set for your rivet.{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lWoPXiklzl0}}&lt;br /&gt;
##You will need to place all the rivets into the board. Some like to use their fingers, some like to use tweezers, it is up to you. Pinching the rivets on the side is the easiest way to go, as shown in the picture below.[[File:...rivetPlacing.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##The through hole press pretty much just flattens down the other side on the rivet. Once all rivets have been placed, you will need to turn it upside down while keeping the rivets snug inside the hole in order to flatten the other side. Find a flat unused PCB, place it over the rivets, and turn it upside down to keep them from falling out. Using some tape to keep the plate stable on the board is something to try if things are not quite going your way.[[File:...rivetFlip.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Before pressing the rivets, you need to make sure you have the right tool inserted into the upper and lower parts of the press. These tools can be found in the drawer in front of the press. The tool you choose should have the same inside diameter of the rivet you want to press.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now it is time to press the rivets. Place the board over the pin of the lower tool and fit a rivet over the pin as far as possible. To flatten the other side of the rivet, press the lever until it reaches the stop pin, then release. [[File:...rivetPress.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Your rivet should change somewhat like this. Pressing the rivet too hard can cause it to crack and damage the traces on the board, yet pressing the rivet too softly will to a poor job because it will not make a firm connection with the traces. It should be hit just hard enough to deform the rivet to make a firm connection with the traces. With practice, you'll learn the right amount of pressure to apply.  [[File:...rivetBeforeAfter.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Rubber Mallet&lt;br /&gt;
##Rivets can also be pressed using a rubber mallet! The setup for the through hole press apply here as well. This method is faster than the Through Hole Press, but it is not as consistent.&lt;br /&gt;
##You will need to place all the rivets into the board. Some like to use their fingers, some like to use tweezers, it is up to you. Pinching the rivets on the side is the easiest way to go, as shown in the picture below.[[File:...rivetPlacing.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##The through hole press pretty much just flattens down the other side on the rivet. Once all rivets have been placed, you will need to turn it upside down while keeping the rivets snug inside the hole in order to flatten the other side. Find a flat unused PCB, place it over the rivets, and turn it upside down to keep them from falling out. Using some tape to keep the unused PCB stable on the board is something to try if things are not quite going your way. [[File:...rivetFlip.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Using the rubber mallet and the rivet tool, you can press the rivet as shown in the picture below. Place the tip of the tool inside the rivet in an upright position, then hit the top of the tool with the mallet. The rivet tool can be found in the drawers in front of the PCB Printers.[[File:...rubberMalletPress.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Your rivet should change somewhat like this. Pressing the rivet too hard can cause it to crack and damage the traces on the board, yet pressing the rivet too softly will to a poor job because it will not make a firm connection with the traces. It should be hit just hard enough to deform the rivet to make a firm connection with the traces. With practice, you'll learn the right amount of pressure to apply. Come stop by![[File:...rivetBeforeAfter.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
There is not much that can hurt you while using the machine or the rubber mallet. Do not put any part of yourself under the through hole press, because it will try to punch a hole in you. The same idea goes with the mallet and the '''rivet''' tool. Do not swing it or do any dumb stuff. This should not have to be said, but people are dumb sometimes. Please do not be that person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As for the through hole press and its tools, there any many things that could damage it. Especially tools for small rivet diameter (0.4 and 0.6 mm) are sensitive and require careful handling. The tip of the upper tool and springloaded pin of the bottom tool '''should be guarded against damage.'''  Avoid any excessive pressure on both parts! For transport reasons the tip of the lower tool may be hidden inside of the tool body. If so, carefully turn in the headless screw, until the tip shows up again, but still can be pushed into the body again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;PCB Lab - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If a rivet is not connecting the top and bottom layer traces, it is probably not pressed well, meaning it is not making good contact with the trace on both layers. A well placed rivet gives a good connection that is resistant to bending and twisting. In order to obtain a good long-term stability, we recommend that you apply our SUR-TIN immersion tin. This will help to prevent corrosion at the transition layer of the rivet and the copper clad (and will increase solderability). If you place component leads in the rivet holes and solder them from one side only, you should avoid thermal stress to the rivet. Certainly if solder passes the rivet it can cause the rivet to grow under the heat so that the rivet becomes loose. In such case, you should solder fix both rivet collars to the pads before inserting component leads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is little to no maintenance to be done on this machine. Just be sure to reset the space, put away any rivets, tools, and PCBs that you have used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|Before and After each use, put away any rivets, tools, and PCBs that you have used&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Table_Saw&amp;diff=12019</id>
		<title>Table Saw</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Table_Saw&amp;diff=12019"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:33:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Wood Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Wood&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=SawStop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=PCS31230&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=P171131184&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:table_saw_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Table Saw icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:table_saw_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:table_saw.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=SawStop Table Saw&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1262&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are several hazards you need to be aware of when using a table saw.   &lt;br /&gt;
* The blade is very sharp and it spins very fast. Keep your fingers away from the blade even when its not spinning. Use a push stick to keep your fingers a safe distance from the blade.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Always wear proper safety equipment, i.e. ear protection and safety glasses, to prevent injury.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Hold onto material firmly and keep it against the table and fence to help prevent the material from catching on the blade. If material catches on the blade the material can shoot back at you and this is called a kickback.  &lt;br /&gt;
This is a video of a kickback: &lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=u7sRrC2Jpp4}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table saw is a fundamental part of any woodshop and can be used for cutting wood or acrylic. There are two basic cuts that are normally performed. A rip cut is made along the grain and a cross cut is done perpendicular to the the grain. A fence is used to keep the material straight when pushing material through the saw. While the saw is usually used for cutting the long side of material, jigs and tools are also available for doing cross-cuts on the table saw. Fixtures make sure the material stays in place as it’s pushed through and helps keep it straight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SawStop table saw has a unique safety feature. A spring loaded cartridge is located in the machine. Any conductive material that makes contact with the blade fires and jams the cartridge block into the blade. The blade then stops spinning and drops down out of the way into the body of the saw. All this happens within 5 milliseconds, helping to ensure the blade inflicts minimal damage. If the material you are cutting is wet or has gold paint or leaf it will most likely trigger the saw stop feature. Do not cut any wet lumber or metal coated materials with this machine. Charcoal is also conductive so any laser cut areas of lumber should not make contact with the blade while cutting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cNKqNFnWQPs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:PCS Owners Manual Model PCS31230 V5.0 09-13.pdf|Table Saw User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rip - Cuts made along the length of the wood.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cross-cut - Cuts made across the grain along the shorter side of the wood.&lt;br /&gt;
* Push stick - A piece of wood or plastic used to push the wood being cut through the blade while keeping fingers away from the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fence - A guide for measuring the cut and guiding the wood.&lt;br /&gt;
* Riving Knife - A flat metal device that mounts behind the saw blade. This device prevents material from closing up on the blade and causing a dangerous condition called a material kickback.&lt;br /&gt;
* Sled  -  A fixture that is placed on top of the table to assist with cross cuts.  The sled keeps material perpendicular to the blade and helps to prevent the blade from kicking back material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SawStop table saw has a unique safety feature. A spring loaded cartridge is located in the machine. Any conductive material that makes contact with the blade causes the aluminum cartridge block to fire into the blade. The blade then stops spinning and drops down out of the way. All this happens within 5 milliseconds, helping to ensure the blade inflicts minimal damage. This galvanic response safety mechanism is great for preventing injuries but will permanently damage the blade if triggered. If the material you are cutting is conductive it will trigger the saw stop feature. Do not cut any wet lumber, pressure treated, or metal coated materials such as gold leaf with this machine. Charcoal is also conductive so any laser cut areas of lumber should not make contact with the blade while cutting.  There are a few other things to keep in mind regarding your material as well. Make sure the material you are cutting is free of all foreign objects. Do not cut materials that may have nails or screws as they will damage the blade and may cause injury to you. If the blade comes in contact with a conductive material (metal or human fingers), the safety mechanism will stop the saw blade by jamming a block of aluminum into the blade and probably permanently take the blade out of commission. Also, if the material contains a loose knot it can break free and create a safety hazard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your material looks good, the next step is to set up the saw itself. When setting up the saw the blade, it should protrude no more than 1/4&amp;quot; above the material top. This limits the amount of blade that is exposed and makes for a good cut. You will also want to hook up the adjacent dust collector to the rear of the machine, make sure it is plugged in, and turned on. The dust collector must be used with the table saw to help keep the dust out of the air. As you make a cut, it is imperative that you keep the wood firmly against the fence to make the cut square. Therefore, you should double check to see if you are reading the right measurement on the fence, especially because the fence can be moved to either side of the blade which is why there are two distance indicators, only one of which is correct for each set up. Make sure to ask the supervisor about the available jigs because they can be helpful for specialty cuts. Once the supervisor has demonstrated the use of a jig feel free to use it in the future but do not play around with jigs you are unfamiliar with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the saw is set up make sure the small dust collector is ready to go.  The dust collector hose needs to be connected to the table saw exhaust port.  It's a good idea to gently press against the lower dust collector bag with your hand or use the clear sight window to see how full the dust bag is prior to turning it on.  If the sawdust level is above the clear sight window you need to let the supervisor know.  Turn the power switch on for the dust collector. Turn on the saw main switch and wait for solid green light. Make sure the blade is clear and pull the start/stop paddle next to the main power switch and slowly push the material through, making sure to keep your hands away from the blade. Do not stop pushing the material until after the cut is finished unless there is an emergency, in which case, carefully use one hand or your hip to bump the off switch. Also not let go of your work piece during the cut or it will be forced back towards you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the saw and rip a board. You will then proceed to cross cut one of the remaining pieces. Remember to set the blade height so it is protruding less than 1/4&amp;quot; out the top of material for less exposure. When performing a rip cut the fence is used to guide the lumber into the blade. You want to make sure that the distance between the fence and blade is the width of desired cut. Mark the edge of the material when doing a cross cut so you can align the material with the blade in the sled. You can also use a miter gauge for making cross cuts but make sure the material is long enough and well supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TABLE_SAW_CONTROLS.jpg|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Rip Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ensure that the material you are cutting has at least one straight edge and no nails or foreign objects. The straight edge will slide against the fence when ripping. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Measure the width of the board and determine the width of cut desired.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Lift the locking handle on the fence and slide the fence to the desired cut width using the scale. Make sure you use the scale for the correct side of the blade.     &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Lock the fence by pressing down on the locking handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Use the elevation handle on the front of the saw to set the height of the blade approximately 1 tooth above the height of the material by placing the material next to the blade as a guide. This limits the exposed blade.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Turn on the main power switch on the front of the saw and the dust collector. The green light on the saw will flash and turn solid green when the saw is ready. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Make sure nothing is touching the blade. Turn on the saw by gently pulling on the red start paddle switch located on the front of the machine. The paddle switch is also the off switch when pressed.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Line up the flat side of the material with the fence without touching the blade. The fence is a guide and the material should be pressed firmly into the fence as well as down on the table. If the board is warped make sure that curved side is face downward. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Slowly feed the material in towards the blade while keeping your fingers at least 6&amp;quot; from the blade. Use a push stick to keep fingers away from the blade. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Make sure you keep a firm hold on the material and do not stop feeding the material until it has passed beyond the blade. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. It is helpful to have someone assisting on the back side of the saw to help hold material being fed off the table. Make sure the person helping does not pull on the material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. When the saw cut is complete, press in on the paddle switch to turn off the saw and lower the blade below the table to keep anyone from accidentally cutting themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cross Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Move the fence off to the side by lifting the brake handle and sliding the fence off to the side. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Place the cross cut sled on the table by aligning the table slots with the rails on the sled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Slide the sled over the blade and use the material to set the blade height using the blade height handle on the front of the saw. The blade should be roughly one tooth taller than the top of the material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Place the material flat edge against the back of the sled and align the material with the edge of the blade.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Once the blade is clear pull the red paddle switch to turn on the saw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Slide the sled forward to cut through the material at the desired location.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Slide the sled back to you so it clears the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Power down the saw by pressing the red paddle switch located on the front of the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Lower the blade below the table using the crank handle on the front of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Reset the space by cleaning up any dust, turning off the equipment, and lowering the blade below the table to keep anyone from accidentally cutting themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Wood Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If the blade appears to need sharpening ask the tech to change out the blade. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A sign of a dull blade is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Burning of material&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. More resistance when cutting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Rough cut edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Increased cutting noise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Increased motor noise&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep the saw clean and use the dust collector. There are several lubrication points on the saw that need to be checked by the tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate mechanisms &lt;br /&gt;
|Semester&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean machine interior&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly&lt;br /&gt;
|Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Change the blade&lt;br /&gt;
|As Needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=TIG_Welder&amp;diff=12018</id>
		<title>TIG Welder</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=TIG_Welder&amp;diff=12018"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:32:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Welding Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make= Miller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Syncrowave 250DX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=MJ430071L&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:TIG welder.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc= Tig Welder&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Syncrowave 250 DX TR.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc= Miller 250 DX&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1270&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Wyatt Bertis;wbertis22@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't exceed gas pressure past specified value&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't weld with gas off&lt;br /&gt;
* Always use a welding helmet and proper PPE  &lt;br /&gt;
* Don't weld in wet gear or standing water&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't unscrew regulator adjusting screw all the way out&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure ground clamp is connected to work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
TIG stands for tungsten inert gas and is technically called gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW). The process uses a tungsten electrode located in a hand held torch that delivers the current to the welding arc. The tungsten and weld puddle are shielded and cooled with argon gas. A filler rod is used to manually add material to the weld puddle. During the welding process the tungsten should never touch the work piece. When this happens you will need to remove the tungsten and regrind the tip. Depending on the material being welded, TIG welding can be performed using either AC or DC current. Some of the advantages of this type of welding include strong high quality welds and many material options. One disadvantages of TIG welding is the speed is much slower compared to some of the other welding methods. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of TIG welding and some good basic information.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IfJG4cMhIOc&amp;amp;list=PLhEXQudI6XCS3Rev1aaEwy0n4-68YdNTe&amp;amp;index=14&amp;amp;t=0s}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?list=RDCMUCTRI9Us8zLiywY29vsW3kKg&amp;amp;v=tNYmo2_DI6c&amp;amp;feature=emb_rel_end}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KvI0177YgrA}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:O359H MIL.pdf|TIG Welder User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Squarewave technology was developed by Miller Electric in 1976 to improve your weld quality and make TIG (tungsten inert gas) welding easier. Miller Squarewave technology provides arc stability when welding aluminum, prevents arc rectification and eliminates tungsten erosion.&lt;br /&gt;
*CFH-Cubic Feet Per Hour&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Balance control-The balance control is adjustable to provide additional oxide removal (more cleaning) or less cleaning based on the condition of the material being welded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Syncro Start-This allows the choice of Soft, Standard or Hot TIG starts based on the application, lead lengths and tungsten size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Digital welding meters-Display both amperage and voltage for viewing of the actual and preset values for greater accuracy and repeatability in your welding procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Last procedure recall-Simplifies changing your Syncrowave back and forth from aluminum TIG to stainless TIG to Stick welding. One switch makes all the control panel changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Adaptive Hot Start-Stick welding features such as Adaptive Hot Start™ provide good arc strikes without sticking. Once welding, the DIG control makes dynamic adjustments to the welder to ensure smooth E7018 and deep penetration E6010.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some general setup rules of thumb:  &lt;br /&gt;
*The CFH gas setting should be roughly 2x the weld cup size.  If you were to use a #7 cup the gas flow should be set to 14 CFH.&lt;br /&gt;
*The tungsten stick-out from the cup should be no more than the cup diameter.  Using a #7 cup would allow for a maximum tungsten stick-out of 7/16&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The demonstration consists of two parts.  For the first part you will need to setup the welder and safely attempt to weld a bead.  The second part will require you to show knowledge of safely using the grinder and successfully grind a point on a tungsten rod.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Place the fume hood over the area you will be welding &lt;br /&gt;
# Select electrode that is adequate for your application of material&lt;br /&gt;
# Grind electrode to a point. (This gives a smaller and more directed arc)&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert the electrode into the collet of the torch&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach ground clamp to table (ensure ground contact surface is clean)&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the adjusting screw on the tank regulator is loose (Do not unscrew all the way)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open cylinder valve all the way&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the adjusting screw (clockwise) to increase flow to 15 CFH.  The gas will only flow after the pedal is depressed and will stop after the post-flow time has been reached. &lt;br /&gt;
# Identify material type, and thickness that is going to be welded&lt;br /&gt;
# Refer to TIG welding chart for specified adjustments, specific to your application&lt;br /&gt;
# Clean material to remove any oxidizing and or oil residue&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the welder and adjust----------&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the electrode in your dominant hand (ensure it can move freely)&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold electrode about an 1/8 inch away from the metal&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the foot pedal to control the voltage, start off with the foot pedal half way down to start a puddle on the material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once a puddle is started let off the foot pedal to maintain a steady puddle without burning through the material.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the puddle is formed, dab the filler rod into the puddle&lt;br /&gt;
# Moving along the material, walk the electrode back and forth across the puddle while dabbing the filler into the pool&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Shutting down:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Close gas cylinder valve&lt;br /&gt;
*Back out adjusting screw on regulator (Do Not unscrew all the way)&lt;br /&gt;
*Turn off the welder&lt;br /&gt;
*Remove ground clamp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Welding Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*No arc or weak arc:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check that the machine is powered on and set to the correct mode.&lt;br /&gt;
**Inspect torch connections, cables, and work clamp for tightness and damage.&lt;br /&gt;
**Verify correct electrode type, size, and that it’s sharpened properly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Porosity in welds:&lt;br /&gt;
**Ensure proper shielding gas flow and check for leaks in hoses or fittings.&lt;br /&gt;
**Keep tungsten electrode clean and free of contamination.&lt;br /&gt;
**Avoid drafts that disturb the shielding gas.&lt;br /&gt;
*Tungsten sticking to workpiece:&lt;br /&gt;
**Maintain correct arc length (keep tungsten slightly above the workpiece).&lt;br /&gt;
**Check polarity settings and use proper tungsten type for material.&lt;br /&gt;
*Overheating torch or cables:&lt;br /&gt;
**Reduce amperage or duty cycle; allow cooling breaks.&lt;br /&gt;
**Inspect cables and torch for damage or poor connections.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inconsistent or wandering arc:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check gas flow rate and nozzle cleanliness.&lt;br /&gt;
**Ensure tungsten is properly sharpened and aligned.&lt;br /&gt;
**Verify correct polarity and current settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*Excessive spatter (rare in TIG but possible with AC on aluminum):&lt;br /&gt;
**Check machine settings and electrode exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
**Clean workpiece thoroughly before welding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The welding torch and cables should be inspected on a regular basis. Look for any signs of cracking or cuts in the cables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Check Argon Tank Pressure &lt;br /&gt;
|Before Use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student/Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Check Coolant Flow&lt;br /&gt;
|Before Use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspect collet &amp;amp; Cup&lt;br /&gt;
|Before Use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student/Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Sublimation_Printer&amp;diff=12017</id>
		<title>Sublimation Printer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Sublimation_Printer&amp;diff=12017"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:32:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Hub&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Sawgrass&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=SG400NA&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=R739C839500&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Cloth&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name=Sublimation Printer&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1317&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Dye Sub printer notype (1).png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Table Saw icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:table_saw_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Sawgrass-SG400.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Sawgrass-SG400 Sublimation Printer&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Summer Martindale;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sublimation is a digital printing process that uses heat and pressure to embed ink into a fabric or surface to produce an image. It utilizes a special dye and a molecular bonding process to apply and permanently adhere HD images, graphics and photos to polymers and polyesters at a sub-surface level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other printing processes utilize chemicals called binders to bond their inks to the surface of a product.  Binders are present in the ink and/or paper (for transfer processes.)  Over time, the binders will break down and the ink will crack, peel and fade. In contrast, because sublimation bonds at a sub-surface level rather than on top, it provides a high-quality image that won’t crack or peel. And in the case of apparel, it will not fade when washed.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
With sublimation, images can be applied to thousands of different products including mugs, signage, bags and apparel, and to many different materials including ceramics, wood, metal, polyester and glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For fabrics, sublimation dye only adheres to polyester. Cotton/polyester blends are ok to use so long as the polyester content is at least 50%. Keep in mind that the sublimation dye will not bond with the cotton, so the resultant image will have a slightly more faded or &amp;quot;vintage&amp;quot; look when using cotton/polyester blends.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
The user manual link below is technically for the SG500 and SG1000, but similar principles will apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Sawgrass-User-Guide-English.pdf|Sublimation Printer User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.sawgrassink.com/Sawgrass/media/Documents/Printers/Brochures/SG400-SG800-Brochure-NP-US.pdf SG400 Brochure]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Transfer Paper -''' Paper that absorbs the ink from the printer and is used to transfer the ink to the garment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sawgrass SG400 acts much like a typical ink printer. You will need to load the proper software and select the SG400 printer. The correct paper will also need to be loaded into the printer paper tray. One side of the paper is meant for printing while the other side is not meant for printing; double-check the paper orientation to avoid printing on the wrong side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can setup the software and printer. You will need to produce a transfer using the Sawgrass SG400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Producing a transfer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the software you wish to print from (Adobe or Inkscape software). &lt;br /&gt;
# Create or open your desired design.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the SG400 printer and give it some time to power up. The printer can take several minutes to warm up.      &lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the image is a mirrored (left/right) if you want to read the text on a surface or keep the image direction correct.    &lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the image size is smaller than the size of paper you are printing on. The largest size paper is 8.5&amp;quot; x 11.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
# You will need to select 'print', and make sure you are printing to the Sawgrass 400 printer.    &lt;br /&gt;
# The printer should start printing and produce a sheet of paper with your image on it.  &lt;br /&gt;
# You will need to setup the [[Heat Press|heat press]] to complete your image transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
This is a fairly safe process. When using the heat press avoid making contact with the hot plate to prevent burns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sawgrass printers are unique in the fact that they have an auto-maintenance program that ensures the printer is always ready to print without any quality issues.  If you turn off the printer, the auto-maintenance program will not be able to operate, which could lead to printing issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Banding is usually caused by a blockage in the print head preventing the ink from being properly dispersed to the paper. Perform a nozzle check to see if this is the case. If so, then you should perform a head cleaning to try to correct the problem. These functions can be accessed via the control panel on the printer or through Sawgrass Print Manager. Low ink levels can also cause banding. Always ensure that you are not low on ink. Learn more in our Knowledge Base, or contact Sawgrass Technical Support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Color management is an important aspect for all forms of digital printing. In terms of sublimation, there are several factors that can affect the color including the printer, the ink, the paper, and the substrates.  Sawgrass created Sawgrass Print Manager to address these issues and provide tools to help ensure the accuracy of the color output. If you are having issues, contact Sawgrass Technical Support for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to sublimate a print more than once, but every instance after the first time will be significantly faded. It is recommended that you only sublimate a print once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep the printer plugged in and clean. Do not unplug the printer as this could damage the printer by preventing the head cleaning process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Replace Ink Cartridge&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Spot_Welder&amp;diff=12016</id>
		<title>Spot Welder</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Spot_Welder&amp;diff=12016"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:32:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Spot.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Welding Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Miller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=LMSW-52&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=MJ328801N&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Spot_welderIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Reflow Oven Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:protoflow.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Protoflow Reflow Oven&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1281&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=Circuit Board Design&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Wear gloves and welding helmet.&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't have bare skin exposed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't weld in wet gear or standing water.&lt;br /&gt;
* Welded material will be hot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
Resistance spot welding is a process in which contacting metal surface points are joined by the heat obtained from resistance to electric current. The Miller LMSW-52 Air-Cooled Spot Welder is a lightweight unit that is portable, easy to operate and excellent for welding mild, galvanized or stainless sheet materials.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LMSW-52 spot welder manual [https://www.millerwelds.com/-/media/e50208051cc3492c9016790b303abf4f.pdf]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of spot welding and some good basic information.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6pVsZrDf-R8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Spot_Welder_Manual.pdf|Spot Welder User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Electrode Tips – The copper ends of the tongs that make contact with the workpiece to deliver welding current.&lt;br /&gt;
*Arms / Handles – The insulated portions you hold; provide leverage to open/close the tongs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Jaws – The part of the tongs where the electrode tips are mounted; may pivot to adjust pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
*Adjustment Knob / Screw – Used to set electrode pressure for consistent welds.&lt;br /&gt;
*Cable / Conductor – Heavy cable connecting the tongs to the welder to carry welding current.&lt;br /&gt;
*Spring Mechanism – Internal spring that helps return the tongs to the open position when released.&lt;br /&gt;
*Insulation / Grip – Protective covering to prevent electric shock and allow safe handling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some general setup rules of thumb:  &lt;br /&gt;
*The maximum weld capacity is 2 sheets of 16 gauge material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the demonstration you will need to perform a spot weld using two pieces of scrap material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the material being welded should be clear of any oil or dust&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the spot welder&lt;br /&gt;
# Place the material being welded between the clamps.&lt;br /&gt;
# Clamp down on the two pieces of material for approximately 2 seconds. The time required to weld may vary slightly depending on the material and thickness.&lt;br /&gt;
# Grab workpiece with a set of pliers, and open the clamp.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Welding Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*No weld or weak weld:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check electrode tips for wear, dirt, or oxidation; clean or replace as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
**Verify proper electrode pressure; adjust using the adjustment knob/screw.&lt;br /&gt;
**Ensure cables are securely connected and not damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
*Sparks at handles / arcing:&lt;br /&gt;
**Inspect insulation on handles and tongs; replace if cracked or damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
**Confirm all connections are tight and corrosion-free.&lt;br /&gt;
*Tongs won’t open/close smoothly:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check spring mechanism for damage or debris; clean and lubricate lightly if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
**Ensure pivot points are not seized or misaligned.&lt;br /&gt;
*Overheating tongs:&lt;br /&gt;
**Reduce duty cycle; allow tongs to cool between welds.&lt;br /&gt;
**Check for proper current settings and electrode contact.&lt;br /&gt;
*Uneven welds:&lt;br /&gt;
**Inspect electrode tips for uneven wear; dress or replace as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
**Confirm correct alignment of jaws and consistent pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The welding tips should be inspected and cleaned as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_400&amp;diff=12015</id>
		<title>Speedy 400</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_400&amp;diff=12015"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:31:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is laser cutter equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Trotec&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Speedy 400&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=S4-2209 / 01422-11690 &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Speedy400_Laser.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Laser Engraver Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:laser_cutter_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Speedy 400.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Trotec Speedy 400 Laser Engraver&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1212&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has view license key=0009999KWTSZCF9F &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has activation license key=00099992K2C69A5B&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Jack Sides;jsides22@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Trotec Speedy 400 laser engraver is used to engrave and cut materials based on specified images and shapes.  The working area of the laser is 40&amp;quot; x 24&amp;quot;. This is useful for making enclosures out of acrylic, engraving designs into many materials, creating trophies, and cutting any two dimensional shape out of a variety of materials. It also has a rotary attachment which enables cylindrical objects such as drinking glasses and hydro flasks to be engraved with detailed designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QCwJ8xWRpIE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
The Speedy 400 uses the same software and general setup as the Speedy 300, however it has a larger bed and a few backend setting differences. Should be able to train on either the 300 or 400 and use both machines. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Currently, the Speedy 400 should not be used for acrylic**. There are some issues with settings/airflow that cause acrylic to often catch fire while cutting (which, as you would imagine, is bad)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
** If you know what you are doing and are very careful, small (&amp;lt;10 inches) pieces of 1/4&amp;quot; or 1/8&amp;quot; acrylic allow for sufficient airflow to avoid catching fire. Small pieces of 1/2&amp;quot; acrylic can often work as well, as long as you are careful. If the fumes light fire while cutting, pause the print IMMEDIATELY (the same button as start), or, if needed, stop it entirely (although this will abort the cut and you will not be able to continue). Often pausing allows the fire to go out and the acrylic to cool down, so for small cuts you may be able to continue, carefully, after pausing. If you must cut large sheets of acrylic, remove the paper from the area you are cutting, as close to the size of your cut as possible. Although it is not the paper that is burning, removing it seems to reduce the possibility of fire. Try not to remove any more paper than absolutely necessary, as the paper keeps the acrylic clean and protected from scratches when in the stock pile.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Inkscape - The program you will be using to design is Inkscape. It allows you to type in words, edit logos, make your own logos and such to engrave or cut out of your material.&lt;br /&gt;
* Trotec Ruby - The program that interacts with the laser cutter to perform a cut. Trotec Ruby lets you set up/create Material Profiles, change between the HoneyComb Table and the Rotary tool (mostly used for Hydroflasks), and choose a location to cut on your material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Focusing tool - Used to focus the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Stroke - This is the type of line that should be used when cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Repeat Cut Line - Can be used in JobControl to reproduce the same cut line that was just cut. &lt;br /&gt;
* Outline Job - Can be used in JobControl to trace the job that is going to be cut to show where job extends. &lt;br /&gt;
* Bitmap - Representation of an image as bits of information (pixels); used to allow logos/stencils to be changed into colors. &lt;br /&gt;
* Vector - Representation of an image as shapes, rather than bits; used to allow logos/stencils to be modified as objects. &lt;br /&gt;
* Trace Bitmap - Can be used on a bitmap to to turn it into a vector. &lt;br /&gt;
* Honeycomb Table - This is the honeycomb shaped metal tray that holds flat material during a cut. It is used for most cut jobs.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Rotary Tool - When engraving water bottles or glasses, this accessory is used to hold the object in place as well as rotate it while performing a cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Material Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:TrotecMaterials 2022.09.07 10.58.14.xml|Speedy 400 Material Settings 7 SEP 2022]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Manuals====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:JobControl-Manual-EN.pdf|Job Control Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:Speedy-400-Manual-EN.pdf|Speedy 400 Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing a cut or engrave with the laser will always begin with Inkscape by opening/importing an image, pdf, DXF, or similar file. If you do not have a file yet then it can also be used to create geometries. When you use SolidWorks to generate a .dxf file the correct face must be selected prior to saving the file. Once a file has been brought into Inkscape, it must be adjusted so that Trotec Ruby can distinguish between what should be cut out of the material and what should be engraved. A cut is indicated by a hairline red stroke (in the RGB color scheme) and an engrave is indicated by the color black. After the graphic is prepared, it is transferred to Trotec Ruby by dragging and dropping the .dxf file into Trotec. Then you need to go under the design tab. The you should see what you want to be cut/engraved on the screen with the correct corresponding colors. Once this is done go under the prepare tab. All you need to do is to click the proper material that you will be using. DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS WITHOUT TALKING TO A SUPERVISOR FIRST. Finally, go under the produce tab and start the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, import a George Fox logo into Inkscape and set it up so that the logo is an engrave with a cut circle surrounding it. Once this is done, print the job to Trotec Ruby and run the job on a piece of scrap material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:trotec_laser_engraving.mp4|thumb|none|400px|This video shows the complete process of completing an engrave. See below for details on doing this. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Setting up a Job&lt;br /&gt;
## First off, to get your design, just copy an image and paste it into Inkscape or find a pdf version of the file and open it. If you are cutting a part from a Solidworks file it must be saved as a dxf before importing to Inkscape.&lt;br /&gt;
## To open a dxf file go to [File] &amp;gt; [Import]. If a dxf file is being used feel free to skip to step 7.&lt;br /&gt;
## Measure the size of your material, and set the page in Inkscape to those dimensions. You can alter the dimensions of the page you are putting the image on by selecting [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties], and even the width (W) and height (H) image itself in the top. If you want to keep the image dimensions consistent, but just scale it down, click the lock button between these dimensions. If you want to make your own design using text, squares, circles, etc, you can find everything you need in the column on the far left of the client.[[File:...gfuLogo.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Once you have your design, we need to alter the colors a little bit so the Laser Cutter can understand what you want it to do. It goes like this: a red stroke will cut, and anything that is black will engrave. A stroke is merely an option that outlines the object you select.&lt;br /&gt;
##In order to do this, we need to split up the image into different pieces. This is called vectoring, where it will divide the image into different pieces based on shapes and color. Just select the logo, right click, and select Trace Bitmap. You will be given options shown in the picture below. For this application,we want to separate the colors from each other, so we select the Colors option. The number of scans you have selected will define how closely the vector output will replicate the actual photo (the bitmap) or how many colors you want the vector to tape. Since this is a simple logo and we have 3 colors/shades to take, 3 scans will be enough. If the detail is not good enough, try the other options and have some fun. Once this process is finished, the vector will appear directly on top of the original image, so make sure to drag it off and separate the two before beginning.[[File:...traceBitmap.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Since there are a few separate parts to this vector, it is possible to break apart these and alter the image however you want. Select the image, right click and go to Ungroup. Now you can mess with each individual part! You can take either of these designs and delete them, essentially they will cut out and engrave the same design. Let's go with the one on the right. [[File:...separateParts.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Now we can manipulate the colors. Select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Fill and Stroke] (usually it will already be open on the right sidebar). You will see Fill, Stroke Paint, and Stroke Style on the top right. Fill changes the color of a piece, Stroke Paint changes the color of a stroke, and Stroke Style changes the thickness and style of a stroke. You will see values for R, G, and B, where all colors can be made using these. When each color has a 0 next to it, it will be fully black. When the red has a 255 next to it and the others have 0, it will be fully red. Make sure you check these bit values before continuing, since the machine is set to cutting material ONLY when it sees 255, 0, 0, and it will engrave material ONLY when it sees 0, 0, 0. Everything else, make it white, which is 255, 255, 255. Be sure to make each a Flat Color so that the color is constant throughout the entire object.[[File:...Stroke.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Once you have finished your design, it’s time to send it to the Laser Cutter! Hit print, make sure it is sending to Trotec Engraver but do not click [OK] yet.  &lt;br /&gt;
## Select [Preferences] to open the engraver properties. You will want to make sure the [Minimize to Job size] option is NOT selected and that the [Height] - [Width] values match the page size selected in Inkscape. DO NOT have [Enhanced Geometries} selected because it causes the curved parts of your design to be unrecognized once it is uploaded to the Trotec Ruby.[[File:...printing.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Then you can save these settings by selecting the button that shows the JC logo near the bottom of the Printing Preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
## Select Print to send the design to Trotec Ruby.&lt;br /&gt;
# Setting up the Laser Cutter&lt;br /&gt;
## Turn on the machine using the power switch located on the back of the machine in the left corner. The machine will go through a startup procedure where the cutting bed lowers and the laser travels to its home position. Note that the lid must be closed for the startup procedure to begin and there will be some beeping coming from the machine which is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
## Place your material onto the honeycomb table, preferably in the upper left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
## Now it’s time to focus the laser onto your material. Begin by moving the laser head over the middle of your material; then place the focusing tool on the laser head and slowly raise the table until the the focusing tool falls off. Raise the bed extra slow when reaching the focusing tool so the bed can be stopped the moment the tool falls off. Reference the images below for proper focusing tool placement and laser head controls.[[File:Laser Focus Tool.png|none|thumb|404x404px| Proper placement of the focusing tool. ]][[File:Laser Controls.png|none|thumb|296x296px| Laser control pad. (1) Raise and lower the bed. (2) Move the laser head (5) Air assist. Make sure it is always on to vent fumes properly.   ]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Remove the focusing tool and return it to its home.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cutting with Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
There are four tasks you will need to complete in order to cut/engrave using Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
## First, you need to get the image from inkscape into Trotec Ruby. This can be done by simply downloading the file and dropping it into Trotec Ruby. &lt;br /&gt;
## Second, you will click onto the design tab. All you need to do is verify that everything is the correct color that you need and everything looks fine. Once completed. Click on the blue &amp;quot;Create Job&amp;quot; button. This will allow you to move on. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex1.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Third, you will need to prepare your cut/engrave. To do this you will need to align the laser with where you want to cut by dragging the grey square box. Then you need to select the material that you will be using to cut/engrave. DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM SUPERVISOR. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Finally, to produce the image press the &amp;quot;Push to Laser&amp;quot; button, this will open the next tab&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex4.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## To start the cut/engrave just press the play button. Remember to RESET THE SPACE once your cut/engrave is don't and not to leave any material in the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
* Always make sure the material you are using is safe to use. There is an especially high risk when engraving plastics. Fumes from plastics can be toxic. Make sure you find the specific material you are using and check to see if it produces toxic fumes when burned. Never attempt to engrave PVC as it produces chlorine gas (the stuff they used in WWI).&lt;br /&gt;
* Once the laser is focused do not touch the button that raises the bed or the laser will crash into the machine which causes damage to the machine. &lt;br /&gt;
* Be careful when moving the laser head when using the rotary tool because it has protruding parts that will harm the laser cutter if a crash occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep an eye on active cuts because fires can be started when cutting wood or acrylic with paper covering.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you feel unsure about anything located in the laser cutting procedure make sure to consult the supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut List==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved Materials===&lt;br /&gt;
* Acrylic&lt;br /&gt;
* Wood&lt;br /&gt;
* Vegetable tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
* Paper / Cardstock&lt;br /&gt;
* Cardboard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DO NOT CUT===&lt;br /&gt;
* Any plastics containing PVC (polyvinyl chloride)&lt;br /&gt;
* Chrome tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to cut a material not listed here, please talk with the Maker Hub staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - Laser Cutters (Speedy 300/400) Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}} (this module satisfies requirements for both the Speedy 300 and the Speedy 400). The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
'''First of all, check your export settings'''&lt;br /&gt;
* There are multiple combinations of settings that will work for export; which means that depending on who was using the machine last, settings may be different. These are the settings I (the ace) have found to work most consistantly: Set your Inkscape document to square by going to File &amp;gt; Document Properties (or press Ctl+Shift+D) and set both the Height and Width fields to the same value, bigger than your shape. Why this is an issue is yet unknown, Inkscape just doesn’t like exporting non-square documents with the other settings to follow. Print the document with File &amp;gt; Print or Ctl+P. Click preferences and check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “image mode” is set to “color.” These settings will fix most common issues.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not being made'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Some export settings may be incorrect. Verify that your settings are set to those described above. These settings will fix most issues of lines not cutting. &lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that all stokes are set to red with a stroke width between 1pt and .25pt (.25pt recommended) &lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that your print is entirely within the canvas of Inkscape. &lt;br /&gt;
* In Preferences, within Print options, verify “image mode” is set to “color.” Otherwise, your red stokes will not be read as color, and not be seen by the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The cuts did not go all the way through the material'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Are you using the correct material profile? If not, rest the job (described below) and repeat the cut with the correct material profile. If it appears that the cut went partway through the material you may want to use a setting that is less powerful than your material would normally use (again, described below) &lt;br /&gt;
* You should always place your material in a corner. This way, if the cuts do not go all the way through you can reposition it easily. DO NOT MOVE THE JOB in JobControl! If you put the material in a corner, should be able to place the material back where it was, and then reset the job in JobControl by right clicking on the job in JobControl and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Next, run the cut again on the smallest thickness setting for your material. For example, if you are cutting 1/4 inch acrylic and it does not cut all the way through, repeat the cut with the 1/8 inch acrylic setting. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser went really fast leaving a sort of light engrave rather than a cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
* You did not select the correct material, and the job ran with the ‘standard’ setting. DO NOT MOVE THE MATERIAL! You can reset the job by right clicking on the job in Trotec Ruby and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Then, select the correct material in the upper left dropdown menu and run the job again. This way you do not need to reposition the material or job, which you will almost never do perfectly. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser repeated the cut multiple times'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Some material profiles, such as half-inch, acrylic are set to repeat the cut line multiple times, as to get a cleaner product. If the cuts look good, this is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
* Are you importing from SolidWorks?  For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The acrylic is melted or blackened'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Verify that you are using the correct material profile. If you are, for example, cutting 1/4 acrylic with the 1/2 setting, the acrylic will be melted and not give clean cuts. &lt;br /&gt;
* Are you importing from SolidWorks? As mentioned above, “''For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.”''&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not clean'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Is the machine focused properly for your material? If you’re not sure, or even if you are (you may have bumped the bed control buttons accidentally) refocus it. &lt;br /&gt;
* Check the lens for dust because this can interfere with the laser. If it is dirty, see the maintenance section on how to clean it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''The material is being cut in unintended places''' &lt;br /&gt;
* Check your Inkscape file and make sure there are no red stokes in places you did not want&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure there are no other jobs on the work area (grey rectangles in the honeycomb area of Trotec Ruby). If there are, drag them back into the list on the right side or delete them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To keep the laser cutter running and cutting smoothly, the mirror and lens should be periodically cleaned. This is on top of the general cleaning that should be done to keep the machine dust and scrap free. There are also filters in the exhaust system that must be changed once the activated carbon has been used up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General cleaning &lt;br /&gt;
|As needed after a cut&lt;br /&gt;
|Student &lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Mirror &lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Lens &lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Change Filters &lt;br /&gt;
|When filter usage reaches 100%&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# The honeycomb should be removed and the metal bed itself should be should be swept/cleaned more or less daily. Cleaners are available to help in this process. Green is general cleaning use this for the bed and metal surfaces. Blue is glass cleaner, use this for the plexiglass surfaces. The front door of the Speedy 300 may be removed using the spring loaded pin on the right to remove cut pieces stuck in the door. The air vents at the rear of the machine should be kept clean of debris. Clean in a manner similar to the bed.&lt;br /&gt;
# The lense, mirror, and cone should be inspected daily or more often as needed, especially after wood or other “dusty”/”smokey” materials are cut. The lense will need cleaning when particles are visible on the surface (hold up to light if need be). The lense may be removed using the threaded nut below the lense (see photo). First use the air bulb to blow any dust off of the lense, prior to cleaning with the lense paper and cleaner available in the kit (lasercutter drawer) on both sides. Put some cleaner on the lense and gently rub the paper over the surface of the lense. The cone itself threads into the assembly below the lense nut. The cone may be cleaned with a paper towel and water or another cleaning agent. The mirror should be inspected and cleaned in the same manner as the lense.&lt;br /&gt;
# See above.&lt;br /&gt;
# The air filter to the right of the Speedy 300 will occasionally need maintenance. The most common issue is a full pre-filter. This will be indicated on the filter itself by poor airflow/suction. When replacing this, use a face mask and gloves (close the lab when doing this). Open the top of the air filter with the large 10mm hex wrench in the kit. Remove the prefilter and place it in a bag for disposal. Insert a new prefilter and close the lid. Pre-filters are used to increase the lifespan of other, harder to replace and more expensive filters in the system. Less often, other filters will need replacing. These include the larger box filter, additional pre-filter-type mat filters, and activated carbon. This should not need to happen as often. Follow the above procedure for pre-filter and the [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yJkCgAVbAEU&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be video] to replace the full filter setup. Be careful not to spill activate carbon if doing a full replacement, it is difficult to clean up.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_300&amp;diff=12014</id>
		<title>Speedy 300</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_300&amp;diff=12014"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:31:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is laser cutter equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Trotec&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Speedy 300&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=140801D83D63 / 01411-05631 (Air Filter)&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:laser_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Laser Engraver Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:laser_cutter_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:laser_cutter_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Trotec Speedy 300 Laser Engraver&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1223&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Jack Sides;jsides22@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Trotec Speedy 300 laser engraver is used to engrave and cut materials based on specified images and shapes. This is useful for making enclosures out of acrylic, engraving designs into many materials, creating trophies, and cutting any two dimensional shape out of a variety of materials. It also has a rotary attachment which enables cylindrical objects such as drinking glasses and hydro flasks to be engraved with detailed designs. &lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9qF8dHQPy6o}}[[File:Hydrowiki.jpg|thumb|400x400px|none|Example of an engraved Hydroflask. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Inkscape - The program you will be using to design is Inkscape. It allows you to type in words, edit logos, make your own logos and such to engrave or cut out of your material.&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Control - The program that interacts with the laser cutter to perform a cut. Job Control lets you set up/create Material Profiles, change between the HoneyComb Table and the Rotary tool (mostly used for Hydroflasks), and choose a location to cut on your material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Focusing tool - Used to focus the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Stroke - This is the type of line that should be used when cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Repeat Cut Line - Can be used in JobControl to reproduce the same cut line that was just cut.&lt;br /&gt;
*Outline Job - Can be used in JobControl to trace the job that is going to be cut to show where job extends.&lt;br /&gt;
*Bitmap - Representation of an image as bits of information (pixels); used to allow logos/stencils to be changed into colors.&lt;br /&gt;
*Vector - Representation of an image as shapes, rather than bits; used to allow logos/stencils to be modified as objects.&lt;br /&gt;
*Trace Bitmap - Can be used on a bitmap to to turn it into a vector.&lt;br /&gt;
*Honeycomb Table - This is the honeycomb shaped metal tray that holds flat material during a cut. It is used for most cut jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotary Tool - When engraving water bottles or glasses, this accessory is used to hold the object in place as well as rotate it while performing a cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Material Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:LICENSE KEY S3-4397.pdf|License Key Information]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:TrotecMaterials 2022.09.08 10.40.55.xml|Speedy 300 Material Settings 8 SEP 2022]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User Manual====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:JobControl-Manual-EN.pdf|Job Control Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:8011-speedy300-manual-en.pdf|Speedy 300 Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing a cut or engrave with the laser will always begin with Inkscape by opening/importing an image, pdf, DXF, or similar file. If you do not have a file yet then it can also be used to create geometries. When you use SolidWorks to generate a .dxf file the correct face must be selected prior to saving the file.  Once a file has been brought into Inkscape, it must be adjusted  so that job control can distinguish between what should be cut out of the material and what should be engraved. A cut is indicated by a hairline red stroke (in the RGB color scheme) and an engrave is indicated by the color black. After the graphic is prepared, it is transferred to job control using [File] &amp;gt; [Print] and making sure trotec is selected as the device. It will then pop up in the job list on the right hand side of JobControl. At this point the laser cutter should be set up by turning it on, placing the material on the honeycomb table, and then raising the table to focus the laser. The final steps are then to click the USB icon in job control to connect to the laser cutter, drag the job onto the to scale honeycomb table, set the correct material properties, and then click the play button to perform the cut/engrave. When performing an engrave on a cylindrical object, the set up process in Inkscape is the same but there are a few differences in job control and laser cutter itself. Primarily, the honeycomb table must be exchanged for the rotary tool, which must be done while the laser cutter is OFF. The laser cutter should automatically recognize that the rotary is attached. The only change in job control is that the accessory should be changed in the settings from the honeycomb table to the rotary tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A Training Venture (TV) that uses the Laser Cutter is the [[Windchimes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, import a George Fox logo into Inkscape and set it up so that the logo is an engrave with a cut circle surrounding it. Once this is done, print the job to job control and run the job on a piece of scrap material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:trotec_laser_engraving.mp4|thumb|none|400px|This video shows the complete process of completing an engrave. See below for details on doing this. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Setting up a Job'''&lt;br /&gt;
##First off, open a new document in Inkscape on your own machine or one of the lab computers (File &amp;gt; New, or Ctrl + N). Next, you’ll want to set the dimensions of your page by going to [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties] (Ctrl + Shift + D). Your page can be as big as you like, as long as it’s larger than the shape you’re working with. However, always '''make sure that the document is square.''' There’s some weird quirk with the software that makes this necessary, keeping the document square will keep you from running into a lot of problems later on. Under the “Custom Size” section in document properties, set your hight and width to something larger than the longest dimension of your object. When you export the shape to the laser cutter, Inkscape will export anything within the document canvas and ignore anything that extends beyond it’s borders.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now you’re ready to create a shape to be cut or engraved.   a.)     If you’re importing a shape from SolidWorks, the file should be saved as a .DXF file. Simply drag the file onto your Inkscape document or import it via [File] &amp;gt; [Import] (Ctrl + I). If prompted to select scaling options, choose “read from file” and click OK. Next, select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Ungroup] (Ctrl + Shift + G). This will allow you to select the text objects that make up the SolidWorks watermark and delete them. While you’re here, make sure that there is only one copy of each line, as SolidWorks often likes to make duplicates. Finally, you may want to select all of the remaining objects and regroup them with [Object] &amp;gt; [Group] (Ctrl + G). Skip to step 5.  b.)     If you want to cut or engrave from an image, the best way to do so is from a vector image file. Vector graphics files store the lines, shapes, and colors that make up an image rather than storing data based on pixels as in a typical raster image. These lines, shapes, and colors is what the laser cutter interprets when cutting and engraving. If you’ve designed something in Adobe Illustrator, Inkscape, or other vector-based drawing applications, you can save your image directly to this format. If you’re looking for images online, search for vector images. These will most commonly be in the format of .SVG, .EPS, and some types of .PDF. You can import these types of images into your Inkscape document by simply dragging them onto the canvas or importing them via [File] &amp;gt; [Import] (Ctrl + I). Skip to step 5.   c.)    If you want to engrave or cut a raster (pixel-based) image, you will need to convert it to a vector shape. Drag your image onto the Inkscape canvas and proceed to step 3. [[File:...gfuLogo.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Inkscape can convert an image into vectors based on the composition of the source image. To do this, select your image, right click, and select Trace Bitmap, (Alt + Shift + B). You will be given several options shown below. Check the “Live Preview” box which will give you a better idea what’s going to happen. For the George Fox logo, we want to separate the colors from each other, so we’ll select “Colors” under the “Multiple Scans” section. The number of scans you specify correlates to the number of objects that Inkscape will create based on the different parts of the image. Since our example is a simple logo with 3 colors, 3 scans will be sufficient. Depending on your image, you’ll have to play around with these settings a bit. For a back and white image, you’ll probably want to use “Brightness Cuttoff” under “Single Scan” and adjust the “Threshold” value until the preview looks correct. Once you click OK, the vector will appear directly on top of the original image, so make sure to drag it off and move or delete the original image. [[File:...traceBitmap.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##You will now have a vector object that consists of several parts. Separate them by right-clicking the vector and selecting “Ungroup” (Ctrl + Shift + G). Now you’ll be able to alter each part of the object. In our example, we’ll go with the one on the right and delete the one on the left.  [[File:...separateParts.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Now we can manipulate the colors. Select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Fill and Stroke] (usually it will already be open on the right sidebar). You will see Fill, Stroke Paint, and Stroke Style on the top right. Fill changes the color of a piece, Stroke Paint changes the color of a stroke, and Stroke Style changes the thickness and style of a stroke. You will see values for R, G, and B, which control color. When each color has a 0 next to it, it will be fully black. When the red has a 255 next to it and the others have 0, it will be fully red. The machine will cut material ONLY when it sees a stroke that is 255, 0, 0, and it will engrave material ONLY when it sees 0, 0, 0. Set these values on your object depending on what you want to engrave or cut, and make sure these values are exact before continuing. Anything that you do not want to cut or engrave, either delete or set to white, which is 255, 255, 255. Be sure to make each a “Flat Color” so that the color is constant throughout the entire object.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now that you have an object with the correct fill and stroke, you’ll want to resize it to the size you want. Select your object, and in the top bar of Inkscape you’ll see options for height and width. If you want to scale the object without altering it’s height and width ratios, lock the two together by clicking the lock icon. Measure your material and set the height and width accordingly, or set the values to your desired size. If you imported your file from SolidWorks you shouldn’t need to change these dimensions, just verify that they match the size of your object in SolidWorks. [[File:...Stroke.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Once you have finished your design, it’s time to send it to the Laser Cutter! Go to [File] &amp;gt; [Print] (Ctrl + P) and make sure it is sending to Trotec Engraver but do not click [OK] yet.&lt;br /&gt;
##Select [Preferences] to open the engraver properties. Check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as it is in Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “Image Mode” is set to “Color” and “Enhanced Geometries” is not selected. '''NOTE''': “Take From Application” will only work if your Inkscape canvas is square. Make sure to set this correctly, or else set the print size to something larger than either dimension of your print (so long as “Minimize to Jobsize” is enabled.)[[File:...printing.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Save these settings by selecting the button that shows the JC logo near the bottom of the Printing Preferences and select Print to send the design to Job Control.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Setting up the Laser Cutter'''&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn on the machine using the power switch located on the back of the machine in the left corner. The machine will go through a startup procedure where the cutting bed lowers and the laser travels to its home position. Note that the lid must be closed for the startup procedure to begin. You will hear be some beeping coming from the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
##Place your material onto the honeycomb table. '''ALWAYS''' place it in a corner, snug against two sides of the bed. This way if something doesn't go quite perfectly in the cutting process you can return the material back to that corner and try again without having to scrap the entire piece.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now it’s time to focus the laser onto your material. Begin by moving the laser head over the middle of your material. Place the focusing tool on the laser head and slowly raise the table until the the focusing tool just barely touches the material. Be sure to raise the bed extra slowly when approaching the focusing tool, so that you can stop the moment you are at the correct height. Use cation, as there is also no safety in place to prevent the material from crashing into the head and damaging this delicate, expensive assembly. The focusing tool will likely fall off the head; this is fine so long as you didn’t overshoot the point at which it first touched. Reference the images below for proper focusing tool placement and laser head controls.[[File:Laser Focus Tool.png|none|thumb|404x404px| Proper placement of the focusing tool. ]][[File:Laser Controls.png|none|thumb|296x296px| Laser control pad. (1) Raise and lower the bed. (2) Move the laser head (5) Air assist. Make sure it is always on to vent fumes properly.   ]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Remove the focusing tool and return it to its home.&lt;br /&gt;
##Press the USB icon found in the bottom right corner of Job Control to connect to the laser cutter. The laser should beep a few times and then a the background of job control will change to a honeycomb pattern to represent the actual honeycomb table. Also, the USB icon will change to a play icon.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cutting with Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
There are four tasks you will need to complete in order to cut/engrave using Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
## First, you need to get the image from inkscape into Trotec Ruby. This can be done by simply downloading the file and dropping it into Trotec Ruby. &lt;br /&gt;
## Second, you will click onto the design tab. All you need to do is verify that everything is the correct color that you need and everything looks fine. Once completed. Click on the blue &amp;quot;Create Job&amp;quot; button. This will allow you to move on. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex1.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Third, you will need to prepare your cut/engrave. To do this you will need to align the laser with where you want to cut by dragging the grey square box. Then you need to select the material that you will be using to cut/engrave. DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM SUPERVISOR. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Finally, to produce the image press the &amp;quot;Push to Laser&amp;quot; button, this will open the next tab&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex4.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## To start the cut/engrave just press the play button. Remember to RESET THE SPACE once your cut/engrave is don't and not to leave any material in the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Cutting with the Rotary Tool'''&lt;br /&gt;
##The Rotary Tool lets you cut and engrave cylindrical objects, the most popular of these being Hydroflasks. This part applies after you have already sent the file from Inkscape to the Laser Cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn OFF the machine, remove the honeycomb table, and plug in the rotary tool. The rest of the laser cutter setup is the same as above.&lt;br /&gt;
##Continue As though you were cutting/engraving anything else until you hit the design tab. Hit the rotary button. It looks like a cylinder. &lt;br /&gt;
##Enter the diameter of your bottle (using the Calipers in the lab), as it tells the Rotary Tool how fast to turn as it engraves. Do not mess this up, or you will have a stretched/squeezed image.    [[File:R3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Once you click OK/apply, the window background will look like the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
##Double click/drag the job onto the window. Make sure to rotate the graphic to the proper orientation that you want it as. This can be done with the rotation button.  [[File:R2.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
##If you click view it will show you an animation of what the bottle will look like to give you an idea of how to position your image. &lt;br /&gt;
##Next, pick the material Hydroflask → Black Mug for a Hydroflask, or one of the glass profiles if engraving glass, and now you are ready to engrave your thing!&lt;br /&gt;
##When you are finished, RESET THE SPACE! Put the Rotary Tool away and replace it with the HoneyComb Table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Always make sure the material you are using is safe to use. There is an especially high risk when engraving plastics. Fumes from plastics can be toxic. Make sure you find the specific material you are using and check to see if it produces toxic fumes when burned. Never attempt to engrave PVC as it produces chlorine gas (the stuff they used in WWI).&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the laser is focused do not touch the button that raises the bed or the laser will crash into the machine which causes damage to the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
*Be careful when moving the laser head when using the rotary tool because it has protruding parts that will harm the laser cutter if a crash occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Keep an eye on active cuts because fires can be started when cutting wood or acrylic with paper covering.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you feel unsure about anything located in the laser cutting procedure make sure to consult the supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut List==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved Materials===&lt;br /&gt;
* Acrylic&lt;br /&gt;
* Wood&lt;br /&gt;
* Vegetable tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DO NOT CUT===&lt;br /&gt;
* Any plastics containing PVC (polyvinyl chloride)&lt;br /&gt;
* Chrome tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
* Hardboard (Masonite)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to cut a material not listed here, please talk with the Maker Hub staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - Laser Cutters (Speedy 300/400) Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}} (this module satisfies requirements for both the Speedy 300 and the Speedy 400). The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
'''First of all, check your export settings'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are multiple combinations of settings that will work for export; which means that depending on who was using the machine last, settings may be different. These are the settings I (the ace) have found to work most consistently: Set your Inkscape document to square by going to [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties] ( Ctl+Shift+D) and set both the Height and Width fields to the same value, bigger than your shape. Why this is an issue is yet unknown, Inkscape just doesn’t like exporting non-square documents with the other settings to follow. Print the document with File &amp;gt; Print or Ctl+P. Click preferences and check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “image mode” is set to “color.” These settings will fix most common issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not being made'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some export settings may be incorrect. Verify that your settings are set to those described above. These settings will fix most issues of lines not cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that all stokes are set to red with a stroke width between 1pt and .25pt (.25pt recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that your print is entirely within the canvas of Inkscape.&lt;br /&gt;
*In Preferences, within Print options, verify “image mode” is set to “color.” Otherwise, your red stokes will not be read as color, and not be seen by the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The cuts did not go all the way through the material'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you using the correct material profile? If not, reset the job (described below) and repeat the cut with the correct material profile. If it appears that the cut went partway through the material you may want to use a setting that is less powerful than your material would normally use (again, described below)&lt;br /&gt;
*You should always place your material in a corner. This way, if the cuts do not go all the way through you can reposition it easily. DO NOT MOVE THE JOB in JobControl! If you put the material in a corner, should be able to place the material back where it was, and then reset the job in JobControl by right clicking on the job in JobControl and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Next, run the cut again on the smallest thickness setting for your material. For example, if you are cutting 1/4 inch acrylic and it does not cut all the way through, repeat the cut with the 1/8 inch acrylic setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using the correct material profile for your material and cuts are not going all the way through, please email me and let me know so that I can take a look and fix the settings. ZCogswell18@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser went really fast leaving a sort of light engrave rather than a cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You did not select the correct material, and the job ran with the ‘standard’ setting. '''DO NOT MOVE THE MATERIAL!''' You can reset the job by right clicking on the job in Job Control and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Then, select the correct material in the upper left dropdown menu and run the job again. This way you do not need to reposition the material or job, which you will almost never do perfectly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser repeated the cut multiple times'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some material profiles, such as half-inch, acrylic are set to repeat the cut line multiple times, as to get a cleaner product. If the cuts look good, this is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you importing from SolidWorks?  For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The acrylic is melted or blackened'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that you are using the correct material profile. If you are, for example, cutting 1/4 acrylic with the 1/2 setting, the acrylic will be melted and not give clean cuts.&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you importing from SolidWorks? As mentioned above, “''For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.”''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not clean'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Is the machine focused properly for your material? If you’re not sure, or even if you are (you may have bumped the bed control buttons accidentally) refocus it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the lens for dust because this can interfere with the laser. If it is dirty, see the maintenance section on how to clean it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The material is being cut in unintended places''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the above does not work, contact the lab supervisors or Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To keep the laser cutter running and cutting smoothly, the mirror and lens should be periodically cleaned. This is on top of the general cleaning that should be done to keep the machine dust and scrap free. There are also filters in the exhaust system that must be changed once the activated carbon has been used up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed after a cut&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Mirror&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Lens&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Change Filters&lt;br /&gt;
|When filter usage reaches 100%&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The honeycomb should be removed and the metal bed itself should be should be swept/cleaned more or less daily. Cleaners are available to help in this process. Green is general cleaning use this for the bed and metal surfaces. Blue is glass cleaner, use this for the plexiglass surfaces. The front door of the Speedy 300 may be removed using the spring loaded pin on the right to remove cut pieces stuck in the door. The air vents at the rear of the machine should be kept clean of debris. Clean in a manner similar to the bed.&lt;br /&gt;
#The lense, mirror, and cone should be inspected daily or more often as needed, especially after wood or other “dusty”/”smokey” materials are cut. The lense will need cleaning when particles are visible on the surface (hold up to light if need be). The lense may be removed using the threaded nut below the lense (see photo). The lense should be cleaned with the lense paper and cleaner available in the kit (lasercutter drawer) on both sides. Put some cleaner on the lense and gently rub the paper over the surface of the lense. The cone itself threads into the assembly below the lense nut. The cone may be cleaned with a paper towel and water or another cleaning agent. The mirror should be inspected and cleaned in the same manner as the lense.&lt;br /&gt;
#See above.&lt;br /&gt;
#The air filter to the right of the Speedy 300 will occasionally need maintenance. The most common issue is a full pre-filter (P/N 37722). This will be indicated on the filter itself by poor airflow/suction. When replacing this, use a face mask and gloves (close the lab when doing this). Open the top of the air filter with the large 10mm hex wrench in the kit. Remove the prefilter and place it in a bag for disposal. Insert a new prefilter and close the lid. Pre-filters are used to increase the lifespan of other, harder to replace and more expensive filters in the system. Less often, other filters will need replacing. These include the larger box filter (P/N 41041), additional pre-filter-type mat filters, and activated carbon. This should not need to happen as often. Follow the above procedure for pre-filter and the [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yJkCgAVbAEU&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be video] to replace the full filter setup. Be careful not to spill activate carbon if doing a full replacement, it is difficult to clean up.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_300&amp;diff=12013</id>
		<title>Speedy 300</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Speedy_300&amp;diff=12013"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:31:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is laser cutter equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Trotec&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Speedy 300&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=140801D83D63 / 01411-05631 (Air Filter)&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:laser_cutter_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Laser Engraver Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:laser_cutter_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:laser_cutter_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Trotec Speedy 300 Laser Engraver&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1223&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Jack Sides;jsides22@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Trotec Speedy 300 laser engraver is used to engrave and cut materials based on specified images and shapes. This is useful for making enclosures out of acrylic, engraving designs into many materials, creating trophies, and cutting any two dimensional shape out of a variety of materials. It also has a rotary attachment which enables cylindrical objects such as drinking glasses and hydro flasks to be engraved with detailed designs. &lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9qF8dHQPy6o}}[[File:Hydrowiki.jpg|thumb|400x400px|none|Example of an engraved Hydroflask. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Inkscape - The program you will be using to design is Inkscape. It allows you to type in words, edit logos, make your own logos and such to engrave or cut out of your material.&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Control - The program that interacts with the laser cutter to perform a cut. Job Control lets you set up/create Material Profiles, change between the HoneyComb Table and the Rotary tool (mostly used for Hydroflasks), and choose a location to cut on your material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Focusing tool - Used to focus the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Stroke - This is the type of line that should be used when cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Repeat Cut Line - Can be used in JobControl to reproduce the same cut line that was just cut.&lt;br /&gt;
*Outline Job - Can be used in JobControl to trace the job that is going to be cut to show where job extends.&lt;br /&gt;
*Bitmap - Representation of an image as bits of information (pixels); used to allow logos/stencils to be changed into colors.&lt;br /&gt;
*Vector - Representation of an image as shapes, rather than bits; used to allow logos/stencils to be modified as objects.&lt;br /&gt;
*Trace Bitmap - Can be used on a bitmap to to turn it into a vector.&lt;br /&gt;
*Honeycomb Table - This is the honeycomb shaped metal tray that holds flat material during a cut. It is used for most cut jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Rotary Tool - When engraving water bottles or glasses, this accessory is used to hold the object in place as well as rotate it while performing a cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Material Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:LICENSE KEY S3-4397.pdf|License Key Information]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:TrotecMaterials 2022.09.08 10.40.55.xml|Speedy 300 Material Settings 8 SEP 2022]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User Manual====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:JobControl-Manual-EN.pdf|Job Control Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
* '''[[Media:8011-speedy300-manual-en.pdf|Speedy 300 Operation Manual]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing a cut or engrave with the laser will always begin with Inkscape by opening/importing an image, pdf, DXF, or similar file. If you do not have a file yet then it can also be used to create geometries. When you use SolidWorks to generate a .dxf file the correct face must be selected prior to saving the file.  Once a file has been brought into Inkscape, it must be adjusted  so that job control can distinguish between what should be cut out of the material and what should be engraved. A cut is indicated by a hairline red stroke (in the RGB color scheme) and an engrave is indicated by the color black. After the graphic is prepared, it is transferred to job control using [File] &amp;gt; [Print] and making sure trotec is selected as the device. It will then pop up in the job list on the right hand side of JobControl. At this point the laser cutter should be set up by turning it on, placing the material on the honeycomb table, and then raising the table to focus the laser. The final steps are then to click the USB icon in job control to connect to the laser cutter, drag the job onto the to scale honeycomb table, set the correct material properties, and then click the play button to perform the cut/engrave. When performing an engrave on a cylindrical object, the set up process in Inkscape is the same but there are a few differences in job control and laser cutter itself. Primarily, the honeycomb table must be exchanged for the rotary tool, which must be done while the laser cutter is OFF. The laser cutter should automatically recognize that the rotary is attached. The only change in job control is that the accessory should be changed in the settings from the honeycomb table to the rotary tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A Training Venture (TV) that uses the Laser Cutter is the [[Windchimes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, import a George Fox logo into Inkscape and set it up so that the logo is an engrave with a cut circle surrounding it. Once this is done, print the job to job control and run the job on a piece of scrap material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:trotec_laser_engraving.mp4|thumb|none|400px|This video shows the complete process of completing an engrave. See below for details on doing this. ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Setting up a Job'''&lt;br /&gt;
##First off, open a new document in Inkscape on your own machine or one of the lab computers (File &amp;gt; New, or Ctrl + N). Next, you’ll want to set the dimensions of your page by going to [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties] (Ctrl + Shift + D). Your page can be as big as you like, as long as it’s larger than the shape you’re working with. However, always '''make sure that the document is square.''' There’s some weird quirk with the software that makes this necessary, keeping the document square will keep you from running into a lot of problems later on. Under the “Custom Size” section in document properties, set your hight and width to something larger than the longest dimension of your object. When you export the shape to the laser cutter, Inkscape will export anything within the document canvas and ignore anything that extends beyond it’s borders.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now you’re ready to create a shape to be cut or engraved.   a.)     If you’re importing a shape from SolidWorks, the file should be saved as a .DXF file. Simply drag the file onto your Inkscape document or import it via [File] &amp;gt; [Import] (Ctrl + I). If prompted to select scaling options, choose “read from file” and click OK. Next, select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Ungroup] (Ctrl + Shift + G). This will allow you to select the text objects that make up the SolidWorks watermark and delete them. While you’re here, make sure that there is only one copy of each line, as SolidWorks often likes to make duplicates. Finally, you may want to select all of the remaining objects and regroup them with [Object] &amp;gt; [Group] (Ctrl + G). Skip to step 5.  b.)     If you want to cut or engrave from an image, the best way to do so is from a vector image file. Vector graphics files store the lines, shapes, and colors that make up an image rather than storing data based on pixels as in a typical raster image. These lines, shapes, and colors is what the laser cutter interprets when cutting and engraving. If you’ve designed something in Adobe Illustrator, Inkscape, or other vector-based drawing applications, you can save your image directly to this format. If you’re looking for images online, search for vector images. These will most commonly be in the format of .SVG, .EPS, and some types of .PDF. You can import these types of images into your Inkscape document by simply dragging them onto the canvas or importing them via [File] &amp;gt; [Import] (Ctrl + I). Skip to step 5.   c.)    If you want to engrave or cut a raster (pixel-based) image, you will need to convert it to a vector shape. Drag your image onto the Inkscape canvas and proceed to step 3. [[File:...gfuLogo.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Inkscape can convert an image into vectors based on the composition of the source image. To do this, select your image, right click, and select Trace Bitmap, (Alt + Shift + B). You will be given several options shown below. Check the “Live Preview” box which will give you a better idea what’s going to happen. For the George Fox logo, we want to separate the colors from each other, so we’ll select “Colors” under the “Multiple Scans” section. The number of scans you specify correlates to the number of objects that Inkscape will create based on the different parts of the image. Since our example is a simple logo with 3 colors, 3 scans will be sufficient. Depending on your image, you’ll have to play around with these settings a bit. For a back and white image, you’ll probably want to use “Brightness Cuttoff” under “Single Scan” and adjust the “Threshold” value until the preview looks correct. Once you click OK, the vector will appear directly on top of the original image, so make sure to drag it off and move or delete the original image. [[File:...traceBitmap.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##You will now have a vector object that consists of several parts. Separate them by right-clicking the vector and selecting “Ungroup” (Ctrl + Shift + G). Now you’ll be able to alter each part of the object. In our example, we’ll go with the one on the right and delete the one on the left.  [[File:...separateParts.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Now we can manipulate the colors. Select the object and go to [Object] &amp;gt; [Fill and Stroke] (usually it will already be open on the right sidebar). You will see Fill, Stroke Paint, and Stroke Style on the top right. Fill changes the color of a piece, Stroke Paint changes the color of a stroke, and Stroke Style changes the thickness and style of a stroke. You will see values for R, G, and B, which control color. When each color has a 0 next to it, it will be fully black. When the red has a 255 next to it and the others have 0, it will be fully red. The machine will cut material ONLY when it sees a stroke that is 255, 0, 0, and it will engrave material ONLY when it sees 0, 0, 0. Set these values on your object depending on what you want to engrave or cut, and make sure these values are exact before continuing. Anything that you do not want to cut or engrave, either delete or set to white, which is 255, 255, 255. Be sure to make each a “Flat Color” so that the color is constant throughout the entire object.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now that you have an object with the correct fill and stroke, you’ll want to resize it to the size you want. Select your object, and in the top bar of Inkscape you’ll see options for height and width. If you want to scale the object without altering it’s height and width ratios, lock the two together by clicking the lock icon. Measure your material and set the height and width accordingly, or set the values to your desired size. If you imported your file from SolidWorks you shouldn’t need to change these dimensions, just verify that they match the size of your object in SolidWorks. [[File:...Stroke.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Once you have finished your design, it’s time to send it to the Laser Cutter! Go to [File] &amp;gt; [Print] (Ctrl + P) and make sure it is sending to Trotec Engraver but do not click [OK] yet.&lt;br /&gt;
##Select [Preferences] to open the engraver properties. Check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as it is in Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “Image Mode” is set to “Color” and “Enhanced Geometries” is not selected. '''NOTE''': “Take From Application” will only work if your Inkscape canvas is square. Make sure to set this correctly, or else set the print size to something larger than either dimension of your print (so long as “Minimize to Jobsize” is enabled.)[[File:...printing.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Save these settings by selecting the button that shows the JC logo near the bottom of the Printing Preferences and select Print to send the design to Job Control.&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Setting up the Laser Cutter'''&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn on the machine using the power switch located on the back of the machine in the left corner. The machine will go through a startup procedure where the cutting bed lowers and the laser travels to its home position. Note that the lid must be closed for the startup procedure to begin. You will hear be some beeping coming from the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
##Place your material onto the honeycomb table. '''ALWAYS''' place it in a corner, snug against two sides of the bed. This way if something doesn't go quite perfectly in the cutting process you can return the material back to that corner and try again without having to scrap the entire piece.&lt;br /&gt;
##Now it’s time to focus the laser onto your material. Begin by moving the laser head over the middle of your material. Place the focusing tool on the laser head and slowly raise the table until the the focusing tool just barely touches the material. Be sure to raise the bed extra slowly when approaching the focusing tool, so that you can stop the moment you are at the correct height. Use cation, as there is also no safety in place to prevent the material from crashing into the head and damaging this delicate, expensive assembly. The focusing tool will likely fall off the head; this is fine so long as you didn’t overshoot the point at which it first touched. Reference the images below for proper focusing tool placement and laser head controls.[[File:Laser Focus Tool.png|none|thumb|404x404px| Proper placement of the focusing tool. ]][[File:Laser Controls.png|none|thumb|296x296px| Laser control pad. (1) Raise and lower the bed. (2) Move the laser head (5) Air assist. Make sure it is always on to vent fumes properly.   ]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Remove the focusing tool and return it to its home.&lt;br /&gt;
##Press the USB icon found in the bottom right corner of Job Control to connect to the laser cutter. The laser should beep a few times and then a the background of job control will change to a honeycomb pattern to represent the actual honeycomb table. Also, the USB icon will change to a play icon.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cutting with Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
There are four tasks you will need to complete in order to cut/engrave using Trotec Ruby&lt;br /&gt;
## First, you need to get the image from inkscape into Trotec Ruby. This can be done by simply downloading the file and dropping it into Trotec Ruby. &lt;br /&gt;
## Second, you will click onto the design tab. All you need to do is verify that everything is the correct color that you need and everything looks fine. Once completed. Click on the blue &amp;quot;Create Job&amp;quot; button. This will allow you to move on. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex1.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Third, you will need to prepare your cut/engrave. To do this you will need to align the laser with where you want to cut by dragging the grey square box. Then you need to select the material that you will be using to cut/engrave. DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM SUPERVISOR. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## Finally, to produce the image press the &amp;quot;Push to Laser&amp;quot; button, this will open the next tab&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ex4.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
## To start the cut/engrave just press the play button. Remember to RESET THE SPACE once your cut/engrave is don't and not to leave any material in the laser cutter. &lt;br /&gt;
#'''Cutting with the Rotary Tool'''&lt;br /&gt;
##The Rotary Tool lets you cut and engrave cylindrical objects, the most popular of these being Hydroflasks. This part applies after you have already sent the file from Inkscape to the Laser Cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn OFF the machine, remove the honeycomb table, and plug in the rotary tool. The rest of the laser cutter setup is the same as above.&lt;br /&gt;
##Continue As though you were cutting/engraving anything else until you hit the design tab. Hit the rotary button. It looks like a cylinder. &lt;br /&gt;
##Enter the diameter of your bottle (using the Calipers in the lab), as it tells the Rotary Tool how fast to turn as it engraves. Do not mess this up, or you will have a stretched/squeezed image.    [[File:R3.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Once you click OK/apply, the window background will look like the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
##Double click/drag the job onto the window. Make sure to rotate the graphic to the proper orientation that you want it as. This can be done with the rotation button.  [[File:R2.png|thumb|600x600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
##If you click view it will show you an animation of what the bottle will look like to give you an idea of how to position your image. &lt;br /&gt;
##Next, pick the material Hydroflask → Black Mug for a Hydroflask, or one of the glass profiles if engraving glass, and now you are ready to engrave your thing!&lt;br /&gt;
##When you are finished, RESET THE SPACE! Put the Rotary Tool away and replace it with the HoneyComb Table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Always make sure the material you are using is safe to use. There is an especially high risk when engraving plastics. Fumes from plastics can be toxic. Make sure you find the specific material you are using and check to see if it produces toxic fumes when burned. Never attempt to engrave PVC as it produces chlorine gas (the stuff they used in WWI).&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the laser is focused do not touch the button that raises the bed or the laser will crash into the machine which causes damage to the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
*Be careful when moving the laser head when using the rotary tool because it has protruding parts that will harm the laser cutter if a crash occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Keep an eye on active cuts because fires can be started when cutting wood or acrylic with paper covering.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you feel unsure about anything located in the laser cutting procedure make sure to consult the supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cut List==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved Materials===&lt;br /&gt;
* Acrylic&lt;br /&gt;
* Wood&lt;br /&gt;
* Vegetable tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DO NOT CUT===&lt;br /&gt;
* Any plastics containing PVC (polyvinyl chloride)&lt;br /&gt;
* Chrome tanned leather&lt;br /&gt;
* Hardboard (Masonite)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to cut a material not listed here, please talk with the Maker Hub staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - Laser Cutters (Speedy 300/400) Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}} (this module satisfies requirements for both the Speedy 300 and the Speedy 400). The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/R6RF69 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
'''First of all, check your export settings'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are multiple combinations of settings that will work for export; which means that depending on who was using the machine last, settings may be different. These are the settings I (the ace) have found to work most consistently: Set your Inkscape document to square by going to [File] &amp;gt; [Document Properties] ( Ctl+Shift+D) and set both the Height and Width fields to the same value, bigger than your shape. Why this is an issue is yet unknown, Inkscape just doesn’t like exporting non-square documents with the other settings to follow. Print the document with File &amp;gt; Print or Ctl+P. Click preferences and check both “Take From Application” and “Minimize to Jobsize.” These settings tell the program to assume the canvas is the same size as Inkscape and then crop to the size of your print. Also verify “image mode” is set to “color.” These settings will fix most common issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not being made'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some export settings may be incorrect. Verify that your settings are set to those described above. These settings will fix most issues of lines not cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that all stokes are set to red with a stroke width between 1pt and .25pt (.25pt recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that your print is entirely within the canvas of Inkscape.&lt;br /&gt;
*In Preferences, within Print options, verify “image mode” is set to “color.” Otherwise, your red stokes will not be read as color, and not be seen by the laser cutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The cuts did not go all the way through the material'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you using the correct material profile? If not, reset the job (described below) and repeat the cut with the correct material profile. If it appears that the cut went partway through the material you may want to use a setting that is less powerful than your material would normally use (again, described below)&lt;br /&gt;
*You should always place your material in a corner. This way, if the cuts do not go all the way through you can reposition it easily. DO NOT MOVE THE JOB in JobControl! If you put the material in a corner, should be able to place the material back where it was, and then reset the job in JobControl by right clicking on the job in JobControl and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Next, run the cut again on the smallest thickness setting for your material. For example, if you are cutting 1/4 inch acrylic and it does not cut all the way through, repeat the cut with the 1/8 inch acrylic setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using the correct material profile for your material and cuts are not going all the way through, please email me and let me know so that I can take a look and fix the settings. ZCogswell18@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser went really fast leaving a sort of light engrave rather than a cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You did not select the correct material, and the job ran with the ‘standard’ setting. '''DO NOT MOVE THE MATERIAL!''' You can reset the job by right clicking on the job in Job Control and selecting the reset job option, or by pressing Ctl+R. Then, select the correct material in the upper left dropdown menu and run the job again. This way you do not need to reposition the material or job, which you will almost never do perfectly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The laser repeated the cut multiple times'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some material profiles, such as half-inch, acrylic are set to repeat the cut line multiple times, as to get a cleaner product. If the cuts look good, this is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you importing from SolidWorks?  For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The acrylic is melted or blackened'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that you are using the correct material profile. If you are, for example, cutting 1/4 acrylic with the 1/2 setting, the acrylic will be melted and not give clean cuts.&lt;br /&gt;
*Are you importing from SolidWorks? As mentioned above, “''For some reason, SolidWorks likes to have duplicate lines quite often. In Inkscape, click on the cut that was repeated and drag to move it. If you move the line and another line is underneath, you need to delete all duplicates in the file. Often if you have a thin stoke (.25pt) and zoom out, the duplicate lines will be visually darker, allowing you to identify and delete them.”''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Cuts are not clean'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Is the machine focused properly for your material? If you’re not sure, or even if you are (you may have bumped the bed control buttons accidentally) refocus it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the lens for dust because this can interfere with the laser. If it is dirty, see the maintenance section on how to clean it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The material is being cut in unintended places''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the above does not work, contact the lab supervisors or Justin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To keep the laser cutter running and cutting smoothly, the mirror and lens should be periodically cleaned. This is on top of the general cleaning that should be done to keep the machine dust and scrap free. There are also filters in the exhaust system that must be changed once the activated carbon has been used up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
!Last Done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|General cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed after a cut&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Mirror&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean the Lens&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Volunteer&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Change Filters&lt;br /&gt;
|When filter usage reaches 100%&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The honeycomb should be removed and the metal bed itself should be should be swept/cleaned more or less daily. Cleaners are available to help in this process. Green is general cleaning use this for the bed and metal surfaces. Blue is glass cleaner, use this for the plexiglass surfaces. The front door of the Speedy 300 may be removed using the spring loaded pin on the right to remove cut pieces stuck in the door. The air vents at the rear of the machine should be kept clean of debris. Clean in a manner similar to the bed.&lt;br /&gt;
#The lense, mirror, and cone should be inspected daily or more often as needed, especially after wood or other “dusty”/”smokey” materials are cut. The lense will need cleaning when particles are visible on the surface (hold up to light if need be). The lense may be removed using the threaded nut below the lense (see photo). The lense should be cleaned with the lense paper and cleaner available in the kit (lasercutter drawer) on both sides. Put some cleaner on the lense and gently rub the paper over the surface of the lense. The cone itself threads into the assembly below the lense nut. The cone may be cleaned with a paper towel and water or another cleaning agent. The mirror should be inspected and cleaned in the same manner as the lense.&lt;br /&gt;
#See above.&lt;br /&gt;
#The air filter to the right of the Speedy 300 will occasionally need maintenance. The most common issue is a full pre-filter (P/N 37722). This will be indicated on the filter itself by poor airflow/suction. When replacing this, use a face mask and gloves (close the lab when doing this). Open the top of the air filter with the large 10mm hex wrench in the kit. Remove the prefilter and place it in a bag for disposal. Insert a new prefilter and close the lid. Pre-filters are used to increase the lifespan of other, harder to replace and more expensive filters in the system. Less often, other filters will need replacing. These include the larger box filter (P/N 41041), additional pre-filter-type mat filters, and activated carbon. This should not need to happen as often. Follow the above procedure for pre-filter and the [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yJkCgAVbAEU&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be video] to replace the full filter setup. Be careful not to spill activate carbon if doing a full replacement, it is difficult to clean up.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Soldering_Irons&amp;diff=12012</id>
		<title>Soldering Irons</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Soldering_Irons&amp;diff=12012"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:31:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=PCB Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Hub&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Weller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=WES51&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=Soldering Iron&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:soldering_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Soldering Iron&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:soldering.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Soldering a component&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Soldering is a process in which two or more items (usually metal) are joined together by melting and putting a filler metal (solder) into the joint&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1242&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=Circuit Board Design&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Soldering''' is a process in which two or more items (usually metal) are joined together by melting and putting a filler metal (solder) into the joint, the filler metal having a lower melting point than the adjoining metal. Soldering differs from welding in that soldering does not involve melting the work pieces. In brazing, the filler metal melts at a higher temperature, but the work piece metal does not melt. In the past, nearly all solders contained lead, but environmental and health concerns have increasingly dictated use of lead-free solder for electronics and plumbing purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert video media here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:SolderingTips.jpg|Soldering Tip&lt;br /&gt;
File:Solder.jpg|Solder&lt;br /&gt;
File:Flux.jpg|Flux&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:WES51_OI_PL.pdf|Soldering Iron User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Soldering Iron is an amazing tool that allows us to construct circuits with sturdy connections between components. The detailed steps to do this can be found in videos on the Description section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before using a Soldering Station, students will need to read some documentation, watch some videos, and pass a quiz on Canvas. Upon completion, students will be given the following PCB and components to assemble the circuit below. Upon completion, they will have the PCB Lab volunteers assess their work and confirm operation. The deliverable will include a video of the working device and a crisp &amp;quot;Thumbs Up&amp;quot; from the PCB Lab Volunteer to assure that the student successfully completed the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:blinkypcb.jpg|[[Media:Blinky.zip|PCB]]&lt;br /&gt;
File:ne555.png|[https://www.digikey.com/product-detail/en/texas-instruments/NE555P/296-1411-5-ND/277057 555 timer]&lt;br /&gt;
File:res1k.jpg|[https://www.digikey.com/product-detail/en/stackpole-electronics-inc/CF14JT1K00/CF14JT1K00CT-ND/1830350 1 K&amp;lt;span title=&amp;quot;&amp;amp;amp;Omega;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Omega;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; resistor]&lt;br /&gt;
File:res470k.jpg|[https://www.digikey.com/product-detail/en/stackpole-electronics-inc/CF14JT470K/CF14JT470KCT-ND/1830415 470 K&amp;lt;span title=&amp;quot;&amp;amp;amp;Omega;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Omega;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; resistor]&lt;br /&gt;
File:cap1uF.jpg|[https://www.digikey.com/product-detail/en/UVP1H010MDD1TD/493-12697-1-ND/4328314?utm_campaign=buynow&amp;amp;WT.z_cid=ref_octopart_dkc_buynow&amp;amp;utm_medium=aggregator&amp;amp;curr=usd&amp;amp;site=us&amp;amp;utm_source=octopart 1 &amp;lt;span title=&amp;quot;&amp;amp;amp;mu;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;mu;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;F capacitor]&lt;br /&gt;
File:red_led.jpg|[https://www.digikey.com/product-detail/en/lite-on-inc/LTL-4223/160-1127-ND/200395 red LED]&lt;br /&gt;
File:battcon.jpg|[https://www.xump.com/science/9V-Battery-Snap-Connector-Leads.cfm?SID=12&amp;amp;gclid=EAIaIQobChMI04mUoZaF2QIVAm5-Ch0pDgDrEAQYAiABEgKI1_D_BwE 9V Battery connector]&lt;br /&gt;
File:Blinking LED Circuit.gif|Completed PCB&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Soldering_course_circuit.jpg|none|thumb|583x583px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# First things first, you need to learn how to use the soldering irons! Soldering is not difficult, but understanding some basic concepts will go a long way toward a successful experience. As part of your training, you will need to read some documentation and watch some videos.&lt;br /&gt;
# After scouring the web for examples of soldering training, we really liked the lessons captured in the [https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837 PACE] series, despite the fact that they were filmed in the 80's. These videos are well produced (for something possibly older than your parents) and have a lot of good information. The quizzable information is in the very first, fifth, and sixth videos, but the other videos have great examples of good and bad soldering joints. Another more modern video from [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZwU9SqO0udU Beauty and the Bolt] is also insightful. This video is a little more modern, and a good resource, but not as technically interesting. It talks a bit about desoldering as well as soldering wires together and how to use heat shrink and electrical tape. A more modern series is available from [https://www.howcast.com/guides/930-how-to-solder Howcast]. It wouldn't hurt at all to watch this series, but we will just focus on a couple for the quiz. Finally, there is an official training video from the [[Maker Hub]] that is tailored to our specific space and equipment. This video will give you the information you need to perform the live solder demonstration required for your soldering certification.&lt;br /&gt;
# This nostalgic set of [https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837 videos] from PACE are quite old, but surprisingly still quite relevant. The style makes you think that you will be getting ready to watch an old Disney cartoon - you aren't. Don't get disappointed.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Basic Soldering Lesson 1:''' This is by far the longest of the videos at (20:44), but also packed with the most pertinent information. It provides great background on solder, flux, wetting, and then mechanics of the iron and the joint. We do not have the student handbook that is mentioned. We suspect that you can manage without that. Here are some key ideas that you should watch for:&lt;br /&gt;
## What is solder? What temperatures do the different solders melt at?&lt;br /&gt;
## What is flux?&lt;br /&gt;
## What is wetting?&lt;br /&gt;
## What are the different aspects of a soldering iron?{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vIT4ra6Mo0s}}&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Basic Soldering Lesson 2-5:''' These videos are worth watching, but they are not essential for this training.&lt;br /&gt;
## [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Mrhg5A1a1mU&amp;amp;index=2&amp;amp;list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837&amp;amp;t=0s Basic Soldering Lesson 2] - &amp;quot;Soldering To PCB Terminals&amp;quot; (6:50)&lt;br /&gt;
## [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_GLeCt_u3U8&amp;amp;index=3&amp;amp;list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837&amp;amp;t=0s Basic Soldering Lesson 3] - &amp;quot;Cup Terminals&amp;quot; (4:19)&lt;br /&gt;
## [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hvTiql-ED4A&amp;amp;index=4&amp;amp;list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837&amp;amp;t=0s Basic Soldering Lesson 4] - &amp;quot;Bifurcated Terminals&amp;quot; (2:45)&lt;br /&gt;
## [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sN3V8hMiUb4&amp;amp;index=5&amp;amp;list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837&amp;amp;t=0s Basic Soldering Lesson 5] - &amp;quot;Hook and Pierced Terminals&amp;quot; (1:19)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Basic Soldering Lesson 6:''' Good explanation of a &amp;quot;semi-clenched&amp;quot; method for soldering an axial-lead component. This technique allows the component to be held in place for soldering without any extra tape or glue (or a potentially burnt finger).{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AY5M-lGxvzo}}&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Basic Soldering Lesson 7:''' Applying the &amp;quot;clenching&amp;quot; idea to an IC. Typically, we will not use this technique, but will instead hold the part and &amp;quot;tack&amp;quot; these same leads with solder - just to hold it. The rest of the video has great examples of IC's being soldered.{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VgcPxdnjwt4}}&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Basic Soldering Lesson 8-9:''' We don't normally see too many of these any more, but again, nice examples of good joints that are similar to components we still use. Rather than flatpack or planar components, we generally use &amp;quot;surface-mount&amp;quot; now. But, the soldering part is still useful to watch. The techniques are similar. Our PCB's will generally come &amp;quot;pre-tined&amp;quot; and the component leads are already bent, but the rest of the soldering is the same.&lt;br /&gt;
## [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sTv3gK9tAKA&amp;amp;index=8&amp;amp;list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837&amp;amp;t=0s Basic Soldering Lesson 8] - &amp;quot;Integrated Circuits&amp;quot; (1:16)&lt;br /&gt;
## [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Nq5ngauITsw&amp;amp;index=9&amp;amp;list=PL926EC0F1F93C1837&amp;amp;t=0s Basic Soldering Lesson 9] - &amp;quot;Integrated Circuits: The Flatpack &amp;amp; Other Planar-mounted Components&amp;quot; (6:20)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Howcast How to Solder:''' This set of [https://www.howcast.com/guides/930-how-to-solder videos] from Howcast is worth watching, but we will only highlight a couple of them here that talk about removing solder.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''How to Remove Solder'''{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-lnRf2biz50}}&lt;br /&gt;
# '''How to Remove Through-Hole Components'''{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zjQf0ajBYmM}}&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Maker Hub Video:''' This video contains specific information for soldering in the Maker Hub as well as a basic overview of what will be expected in your live demonstration.{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4v98_f7JFdo}}&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Acquire a soldering station. For this procedure, this particular station will be referenced, the Weller WES51.[[File:...solderingiron.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# You can power it on using the switch on the left and control the temperature in °F using the temperature knob on the right. 650-750 °F is a good temperature range to keep it at. When the light is solid green, the iron is not heated up yet. When it is heated to the temperature you set on the temperature knob, it will start blinking green.&lt;br /&gt;
# Before you begin using the soldering iron, wet the sponge! Take it to a sink and drench that boi. This is used to clean the soldering iron continually during use. If you don't make it wet, it will burn up the sponge and smell/look gross, and it won't clean the soldering iron.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you're ready to use the soldering iron! Refer to the videos in times of doubt. &lt;br /&gt;
# Don't forget to complete that video checking off your board!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
# Always wear safety glasses when you are cutting wires or anything else at the electronics workstation. If other people are nearby, ask them to wear safety glasses or step away briefly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Angle your wire cuts down into the table or cover them with your free hand to block the projectile.&lt;br /&gt;
# Soldering irons can get up to 1000 °F. Do not touch the tip of the soldering iron; it is extremely hot. If you get burned, run cold water over the burned area for several minutes to reduce inflammation and the potential for blistering.&lt;br /&gt;
# Wires and components can also become extremely hot from soldering. Use the available helping hands, and allow the wires/components to cool before touching.&lt;br /&gt;
# Always return the soldering iron to its stand when not in use. Never lay it directly on the workbench.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure you have adequate ventilation when soldering. Use the available fume extractors.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn off the soldering iron when it is not in use.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you start an electrical fire, use a fire extinguisher to put it out. NEVER use water to put out an electrical fire.&lt;br /&gt;
# Keep liquids away from the electronics workstation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the soldering irons in &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;, complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the soldering irons in the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;PCB Lab&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;, complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;PCB Lab - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two things in particular that could keep you from successfully soldering: an untinned tip and a loose tip. If the tip is not shiny silver, then place a little solder on the tip and wipe it on the sponge. Some soldering irons allow there tips to be replaced for the sake of having different shapes. If the iron is not heating up and you are using this type of iron, it is possible that the tip is not inserted into the iron fully. To fix this, grab some pliers (so you don't burn your hands), grip the shaft and push it in fully. After you have finished soldering, you might check the electrical continuity of your solder joint with a [[Electronics Workstation | DVM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maintenance for the soldering iron generally consists of keeping the soldering station cleaned, stocked, and the iron tinned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|After each use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tin Soldering Iron&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Stock solder, solder wick, sponge&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}__TOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Slip_Roller&amp;diff=12011</id>
		<title>Slip Roller</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Slip_Roller&amp;diff=12011"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:30:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is sheet metal equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Baileigh&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=SR-5016M&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=142263020 &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Metal&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=Slip Roller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1321&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Slip_rollerIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Slip Roller icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Slip_Roller.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Baileigh Slip Roller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Baileigh Slip Roller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A slip roller is a machine used to roll sheet metal. The machine consists of 3 rollers that feed in the sheet metal and form a curve. The distance between the rollers is adjustable and therefore the radius is adjustable.  In addition to rolling sheet metal, the roller in the shop includes wire grooves for bending solid rod. Due to the size of the rollers, the minimum forming diameter of the roller in the shop is 4.5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Nr5xhpI4iL4&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.baileigh.com/slip-roll-sr-5016m Product Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:SR-5016M 08-2020.pdf|Baileigh Slip Roller User Manual]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Baileigh Slip Roller.pdf|Baileigh Slip Roller Catalog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Rollers - Cylindrical components that the sheet metal passes through to form curves or cylinders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Adjusting Screws/Knobs - Controls that set the gap between the rollers to accommodate different material thicknesses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Frame/Base - The main structure supporting the rollers and workpiece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Crank Handle - Manual lever used to rotate the rollers and feed the material through the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Material Feed Area - Space where the sheet metal is inserted before rolling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Side Guides/End Stops - Components that help align the sheet metal for consistent rolling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Slip Roller is used to form curves, cylinders, and arcs from sheet metal. To operate, first adjust the roller gap to match the thickness of the material. Insert the sheet metal between the rollers and align it using the side guides if needed. Turn the crank handle to feed the material through the rollers, making multiple passes while gradually tightening the top roller to achieve the desired curvature. Continue until the sheet is bent to the required radius or cylinder shape. For best results, always make incremental adjustments and work slowly to avoid kinks or uneven rolling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the slip roller and roll a piece of scrap material. If you roll a complete circle be very careful when you disengage the top roll and slip the material off the roller. Never try to force the roller back into position after disengaging it. You have lots of leverage when holding onto the end of the roll and will cause damage by forcing it back into position. If the roller will not easily move back into position have someone gently crank the rotation handle until the roller drops into place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Adjust the radius by turning the knobs on the back of the machine. This adjusts the distance between the rollers.&lt;br /&gt;
#Adjust the amount of pinch using the knobs on the front left of the machine for materials of different thickness.  If the gap between the rollers is too far apart the material will slip on the rollers.&lt;br /&gt;
#Begin by pulling the right side of the top roller out of its slot.&lt;br /&gt;
#Insert your piece that you would like to roll between the rollers.&lt;br /&gt;
#Re-secure the top roller inside of the slot prior to rolling.&lt;br /&gt;
#Slowly rotate the handle until you have rolled to the desired radius. If the initial radius is not the desired radius, re-roll at a slightly tighter radius.&lt;br /&gt;
#Unlock the top roller to slide your rolled metal off the end of roller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several hazards you need to be aware of when using the slip roll.   &lt;br /&gt;
*Never put your finger near the rollers as they could be sucked in and crushed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience the material slipping in the roller you may need to apply more tension by adjusting the roller tension knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep the slip roller clean and keep the rolls oiled so they don't rust. There are several lubrication points that need to be checked by the tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate mechanisms &lt;br /&gt;
|Semester&lt;br /&gt;
|Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean machine rolls&lt;br /&gt;
|As Needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Sheet_Metal_Shear&amp;diff=12010</id>
		<title>Sheet Metal Shear</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Sheet_Metal_Shear&amp;diff=12010"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:30:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is sheet metal equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Peck, Stow &amp;amp; Wilcox Co.&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=G-52&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=H-209&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Metal&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=Sheet Metal Shear&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1307&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Sheet_metal_shearIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Sheet Metal Shear icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Pexto_G-52.JPG&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Sheet Metal Shear&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Sheet Metal Shear&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shear is used for making straight cuts in sheet metal as well as other materials. The shearing blade is powered by applying force to the foot pedal located on the lower front of the machine.  To prevent damage to yourself and or the machine make sure you obey the following rules: &lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum aluminum material thickness you can cut with this machine is .07&amp;quot; x full width.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum mild steel thickness you can cut with this machine is .06&amp;quot; x 12&amp;quot; wide&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum stainless steel thickness you can cut with this machine is .04&amp;quot; x 12&amp;quot; (ask before cutting stainless steel)&lt;br /&gt;
* NEVER attempt to cut round stock or wire on the shear.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plastics can be cut up to 1/8&amp;quot; thick x the blade width.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ask Justin or Nick G. prior to cutting any other materials. &lt;br /&gt;
* Always use the cam lock bar to hold material prior to cutting.&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KFaqs6GGc0I}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Foot Pedal: The bar located across the front of the machine used to activate the blade. &lt;br /&gt;
*Hold Down: A cam operated bar in front of the blade used to keep the material from moving during a cut. &lt;br /&gt;
*Hold Down Handles: The handles used to actuate hold down clamp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:NO.G52.pdf|Sheet Metal Shear User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sheet metal shear is human powered. You will be pressing down on the foot pedal to move the blade that shears the material. The upper rail has two handles for clamping down your work prior to shearing.The manufacturer rates this shear for 16 gauge mild steel.  It would be very difficult to cut a full width of material with this machine so we are limiting the width to 12 inches. It is recommended that you stick to thinner and smaller pieces of material when using the machine. This machine is not designed to cut round stock and it will ruin the blade. Keep body parts away from the blade at all times. Don't stick anything you wouldn't want cut off under the blade.  This machine is not designed to cut round stock or hard materials and both of these will ruin the blade. Only place sheet metal on the shear to prevent other object getting under the blade. After making your cut the edge of the material will most likely be very sharp and need to be deburred.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the demonstration you will need to show understanding of the machine use and setup. You will need to select an appropriate piece of material for the demonstration and make a safe cut. By placing a mark on the material you can demonstrate your ability to align the blade with the cut line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Find a piece of scrap material that is within the capacity of the machine. Don't waste large pieces of material. Choose a smaller piece preferably an inch or two wide. &lt;br /&gt;
#Draw a cut line on the material using a straight edge and a marker.  &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure the material hold down is up enough to slide your material under. &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure the cutting side of the blade aligns with the mark on your material.&lt;br /&gt;
#Pull down on both hold down levers and lock the material in place.  &lt;br /&gt;
#Depending on the width of cut and how much you weigh, you may need to place one or two feet on the foot pedal. &lt;br /&gt;
#Keep your hands away from the blade.  You can hold onto the top hold down rail to steady yourself if needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#You may need to jump or press down on the foot pedal to get the material to shear.  &lt;br /&gt;
#After the material is cut you will need to remove yourself from the foot pedal. &lt;br /&gt;
#Release the hold down levers and remove the material.    &lt;br /&gt;
#Reset the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
*Fingers must be kept away from the blade at all times.  Never place your hand or fingers near the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
*Sheet metal can be razor sharp. Always be aware of sharp edges and corners. It is recommended to use gloves when handling sheet metal.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure others keep away from the foot pedal. Keep toes/feet out from under the pedal when it comes down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If you weigh less than 150 pounds you may have problems getting the material to cut. Ask a supervisor for help if you have any issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine should be oiled periodically by the tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Oil Blade&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Sewing_Machine&amp;diff=12009</id>
		<title>Sewing Machine</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Sewing_Machine&amp;diff=12009"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:30:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Hub&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Cloth&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=3160QDC&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Janome&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=8H2036666 / 8H2036653&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Sewing_machine.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Sewing Machine&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:Sewing_machine_icon_name.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Sewing_machine_image.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Janome 3160 QDC&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=(???)&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1264&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Sara Wytsma; swytsma23@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some safety instructions for the {{PAGENAME}}. Remember ... SAFETY FIRST!!!&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Sharp Hazard''' – needles are very sharp and can pierce your skin. Turn off the sewing machine when inserting/removing needles to avoid bumping the foot pedal and moving the needle assembly. Never place your fingers directly underneath the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Crush Hazard''' – be aware of all moving parts and keep your fingers away from any pinch points.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Entanglement''' – ensure that loose clothing, long hair, or any other dangling/loose items do not become entangled in the machine. Hair that extends below the collar should be tied up.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Eye Injury''' – needles can break if they hit a solid object while sewing. The broken tip can fly off and become lodged in your eye. Eye protection is recommended when using the sewing machines.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not sew over pins. This can break or bend the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
*Ensure the needle you are using is undamaged before you begin sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the needle is installed correctly. Well seated with the needle clamp screw tightened.&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that you are using the correct presser foot. When changing out the presser foot, manually check that the needle’s travel will clear the foot by turning the handwheel one full rotation toward--not away from--you before using the foot pedal. &lt;br /&gt;
*Do not run thick fabrics or many layers of fabric through a standard sewing machine. Use the industrial sewing machine for these applications.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you finish using the sewing machine, disconnect the power cable and the foot pedal from both the machine and the wall outlet/power strip. Coil the power cable and foot pedal cords neatly, and stow on the free arm beneath the dust cover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently four Janome 3160 QDC sewing machines available for use in the Maker Hub. This model features 60 different stitch patterns. It has automatic fabric feeding, one hand needle threader, and easy to follow instructions, making it an ideal machine for first time sewers. Some of its more advanced features include buttons for lock stitch, needle up or down, and automatic thread cutting. It has an extension table that can be attached to make sewing larger projects a breeze.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two machines are kept in the Tool Room on shelf 10. Accessory feet are also kept in the Tool Room, and may be checked out as needed by qualified students. A reference copy of the manual is in the top drawer of the storage unit in the sewing area. There are phone stands in that same drawer for use while following tutorials or reading the copy of the manual available on this page on a phone or tablet. The extension tables for the two machines in the sewing corner are in the third drawer of the storage unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oo_xT1Gfg5M}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Inst-book-3160qdc-en.pdf|Sewing Machine User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.janome.com/machines/sewing/3160qdc-b/ Product Home Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Spool pin - Holder used for thread.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bobbin - Cylinder on which is wound thread that comes from beneath the work&lt;br /&gt;
* Presser foot - piece of metal that presses the fabric against the feed dogs when sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
All information on these specific machines can be found in the [https://www.janome.com/siteassets/support/manuals/computer-models/inst-book-49360.pdf User Manual] and on the [https://www.janome.com/machines/sewing/3160qdc Product Home Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to set up the machine. This video shows a similar set up process to our machines, but be sure to compare to the manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PMTzXsyOVoI}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A quick video on basic stitching techniques:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yMoJWSmZI-U}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
YouTube is a great resource for learning new things. If you are new to sewing, try watching a few videos to get a general understanding before jumping into sewing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more pro tips on sewing visit this website that explains [https://nancysnotions.com/stitch-length-doesnt-have-to-be-confusing/ stitch length].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Winding the bobbin&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose your thread. Make sure you find the end before you put the spool of thread on the spool pin. Use a spool cap to hold it in place. Make sure there is no gap between the cap and the spool of thread. The thread being drawn from the spool when sewing can become tangled in any gap and break.&lt;br /&gt;
* Follow the diagram on the machine housing in order to fill a bobbin. Place the bobbin on the bobbin winder spindle that is on the right top of the machine. Slide the bobbin winder shaft over to the right to lock it. &lt;br /&gt;
* Hold the thread for couple seconds at the beginning as you press the foot pedal gently and slowly. Once it becomes even or uniform, you can let go of the thread and go faster with the foot pedal.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cut the thread once you are done and place the bobbin in the bobbin case. (Before you load the bobbin in the bobbin case, cut off the tail that may be hanging from the hole through which you initially threaded the bobbin.) The drop-in bobbin is covered by a plastic cover that you can remove by gently pulling the hook cover release button. Load the bobbin by following the diagram on the plastic cover. Replace the cover.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Threading the machine&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Draw thread from the thread spool and thread the machine by following the directional numbered arrows on the housing of the machine. Make sure the thread is well-seated between the tension discs at the numbered dial and is through the eye of the take-up lever--part 7 in the manual. At the end, thread the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Changing settings&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When altering the stitch length, stitch width, or choosing a different stitch pattern make certain the needle is in the needle-up position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The demonstration will include several steps. Demonstrate you can safely setup the sewing machine, which includes winding the bobbin, threading the machine, and removing/replacing the needle. Finally, sew a mini pillow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Wind the bobbin and thread the machine&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick two pieces of fabric and place right sides together--the 'pretty' side. Align the raw edges of the two pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
# Sew a 1/2 inch to 5/8 inch seam on three sides, using a straight stitch.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the beginning and end of each side it's best to shorten the stitch length and stitch off the edge of the fabric. It makes a more durable corner--the bulk can be trimmed out of the corner, too, which makes a cleaner (pointy-er) corner. To change the stitch length: stop sewing; leave the work in place under the presser foot; raise the needle; change the stitch length and resume stitching. Lift the presser foot to remove the work. Break the thread tails on the thread cutter, or clip with scissors.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press seams flat, then turn the work right-side out and press. Turn raw edges of the open end to the inside 1/4&amp;quot;, and press.&lt;br /&gt;
# Stuff your pillow! Sew open side shut by stitching with straight stitch close to pressed edges.&lt;br /&gt;
(Note: you can use pins to hold things in place, but you need to remove the pins as you stitch. Never sew over pins. It breaks or bends needles, and can mess up the rotation/timing of the bobbin's oscillations.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
There are many different types of problems you can have while using a sewing machine, but here are a few basic problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The needle thread breaks: Check the threading of the needle as it may not be threaded properly. It is also possible that the needle needs to be changed. Learn this skill from one of the sewing volunteers or aces so that you can perform a needle change when needed.&lt;br /&gt;
# The needle breaks: Make sure the needle is installed correctly and is tight.  Verify you are using the correct presser foot. &lt;br /&gt;
# Machine does not run smoothly: Verify the hook race and bobbin holder are free from lint.&lt;br /&gt;
# Clearing a thread jam: Because the rotation of the bobbin in the bobbin case is pretty sloppy, thread jams can happen fairly frequently. Use the screwdriver keys that came with the sewing machines to open the needle plate (a.k.a. the throat plate) and access the bobbin case. Use the lint brush and tweezers to remove any tangled thread you find.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep the sewing machine clean and free from lint. Make sure to reset the space when you are done sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate mechanisms &lt;br /&gt;
|Semester&lt;br /&gt;
|Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean machine interior&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly&lt;br /&gt;
|Tech&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Change the needle&lt;br /&gt;
|As Needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Users&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Serger&amp;diff=12008</id>
		<title>Serger</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Serger&amp;diff=12008"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:30:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=The Hub&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Cloth&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Janome&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=MyLock 634D&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=6E1013527&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Serger_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Serger_image3.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Janome Mylock 634D&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1268&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Sara Wytsma;swytsma23@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some safety instructions for the {{PAGENAME}}. Remember... SAFETY FIRST!!!&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Sharp Hazard''' – needles are very sharp and can pierce your skin. Turn off the serger when inserting/removing needles to avoid bumping the foot pedal and moving the needle assembly. Never place your fingers directly underneath the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Crush Hazard''' – be aware of all moving parts and keep your fingers away from any pinch points.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Entanglement''' – ensure that loose clothing, long hair, or any other dangling/loose items do not become entangled in the machine. Hair that extends below the collar should be tied up.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Eye Injury''' – needles can break if they hit a solid object while sewing. The broken tip can fly off and become lodged in your eye. Wear safety glasses when using the serger.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not sew over pins. This can break or bend the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
*Always use the proper needle plate. The wrong plate can cause the needle to break.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not push or pull fabric while stitching. It may deflect the needle causing it to break.&lt;br /&gt;
*Ensure the needle you are using is undamaged.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the needle is installed correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Verify that you are using the correct presser foot. When changing out the presser foot, manually check that the needle’s travel will clear the foot before using the foot pedal.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not run thick fabrics or many layers of fabric through the serger. Use the industrial sewing machine for these applications.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you finish using the serger, disconnect the power cable from both the machine and the wall outlet/power strip. Coil the power cable neatly on the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
Sergers preform a type of stitch known as overlock stitching. An overlock stitch is a type of stitching that overcasts the edge of one or more pieces of fabric. Sergers also have the ability to trim the excess seam allowance as it is fed through the machine. This type of stitching is useful for edging, hemming, and seaming. This process will create a clean edge of your fabric that will not fray.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Janome MyLock 634D features 2 needles and a choice of 2, 3, or 4 thread overlocking stitching. The color-coded thread guiding makes threading simple and easy to follow. The MyLock 634D allows the user to easily switch from overlock stitching to rolled hemming without needing to change to needle plate. Some of the key features of the MyLock 634D are a tension release lever, easily accessible lower looper guides, changeable thread guide, easily retractable upper knife, adjustable foot pressure, and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Inst-book-634d.pdf|Serger User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.janome.com/machines/sergers/mylock-634d/ Product Home Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Needle - The pointed metal component that pierces the fabric and carries thread through it to form stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
*Spool - The cylindrical holder that contains the thread, supplying it to the machine during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All information on this specific machine can be found in the [https://www.janome.com/siteassets/support/manuals/sergers/inst-book-634d.pdf User Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A simple intro to serging:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oQww9QqVwOw}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the serger. You will then proceed to edge a piece of scrap material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Janome MyLock 634D is a multi-thread serger designed for overlocking, trimming, and finishing fabric edges in one step. To operate, start by threading the machine in the correct sequence (upper looper, lower looper, right needle, left needle), following the color-coded guides. Select the desired stitch type and adjust tension dials, stitch length, and differential feed settings based on fabric type. Place fabric under the presser foot, lower the foot lever, and gently guide the material while the machine trims and serges the edge. For best results, maintain a consistent feed and avoid pulling the fabric. Always test on a scrap piece before sewing the final garment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;The Hub - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
You may look in the user manual for troubleshooting instructions. But, if you are not confident in what you are doing, ask a supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open the covers and use a lint brush to clean out the lint. Do not try to blow the lint away; you will drive it deeper into the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate mechanisms &lt;br /&gt;
|As Needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean machine&lt;br /&gt;
|When Done&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Change the needle&lt;br /&gt;
|As Needed&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Scroll_Saw&amp;diff=12007</id>
		<title>Scroll Saw</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Scroll_Saw&amp;diff=12007"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:29:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Wood Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Wood&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Excalibur&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=EX-21&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=EX2100170900211&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Scroll Saw.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Excalibur EX21 Scroll Saw Image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1197&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current Ace of the {{PAGENAME}} is '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are several hazards you need to be aware of when using a scroll saw.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Keep your fingers and hands away from the blade and all moving parts.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a blade breaks or gets pulled from the holder turn off the machine and tell the supervisor.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Always wear proper safety equipment to prevent injury. &lt;br /&gt;
* Some woods can create toxic dust so be aware of what you are cutting.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Hold onto material firmly as the blade will try to lift the material off the table.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Use a brush to clear away chips and sawdust.&lt;br /&gt;
* Allow the blade to do the cutting at its own speed. Don't force material into the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the material hold down is correctly adjusted. The hold down should never impede the material movement and should barely sit above the material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Excalibur EX21 Scroll Saw Image.jpg|thumb|Excalibur EX-21 Scroll Saw]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Excalibur EX-21 Scroll Saw is a small variable speed electric saw. It operates similarly to a band saw, but uses a reciprocating blade instead of a loop. This reciprocation means the blade does not cut continuously and only on the down stroke. The thinness of the blade allows it to be turned in the work piece at an almost 90 degree angle, which allows the blade to track along fine detail and sharp lines. The blade can also be removed on either the top or bottom of the reciprocating arm which allows the blade to be inserted inside of a work piece without needing an entry cut, the only thing necessary is a small hole drilled through the material. There is a blade guard and a dust blower nozzle that both need to be adjust before a piece can be cut into the material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The scroll saw is simple machine with an oscillating blade. The thin shallow blade has a very narrow kerf and allows the user to cut fine details and sharp corners.  There are a variety of blades available for various types of materials and cuts. Some of the scroll saw uses include wood puzzle making, intarsia projects, and dovetail cutting. The blade can also be removed and inserted into a drilled hole to give access to the center of an island area in material to cutout the center of an &amp;quot;O&amp;quot; for example. A paper template with a design can be glued onto the top of a work piece and traced. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TU3V3MdkaJg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:5da1c223-3df7-4236-8b34-34eb1641764a.pdf|Scroll Saw User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Material hold down  - Adjustable metal bar that sits above work piece used to help keep material from lifting off the table.&lt;br /&gt;
* Kerf - The material removed by the width of the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The scroll saw has an oscillating blade with a variable speed control.  The thin narrow blade allows you to make tight turns and produce very detailed cuts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cutting angle of the scroll saw can be changed by doing the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Release the locking lever by rotating it counter-clockwise.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
2. Turn the tilting handle left or right as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Use the spring loaded indexing pin for common angles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Tighten the locking lever.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup and operate the scroll saw.  You will sketch a letter on a piece of scrap using a pen or pencil. You will follow the lines with the blade and cut out the letter. Keep your fingers away from the blade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Obtain a piece of wood roughly 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;.  If the work piece is too small it will be difficult to hold onto. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Using a pencil or pen sketch a letter without a isolated center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Make sure to tension the blade by flipping the blade tension lever.  If the blade is not tensioned properly the blade cut will tend to drift and will make it difficult to follow the cut lines. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
4. Adjust the height of the hold down and blade guard for the thickness of material you are using.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Make sure the air blow-off nozzle is pointing at location in front of the blade. This will remove dust from the cut lines and make it easier to follow your lines.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Make sure the material is clear of the blade and turn on the power switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Using the blade speed adjustment knob you can set the blade strokes per minute. The EX-21 is capable of producing 400 to 1550 strokes per minute. Normally harder/thicker material will require a slower blade speed. Set the blade around 800 to start with.  If you notice burn marks slow down the speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Gently feed the material into the blade while aligning your marks with the blade. Slowly follow the line with the blade and cutout around the letter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Adjust the blade oscillation speed as needed. If the material is showing burn marks you need to slow down the speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. When you finish cutting out the letter turn off the power switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Detention the blade by flipping the lever above the blade. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Reset the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Wood Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
If the blade pulls out of the holder, stop the machine and contact the supervisor. Over tightening the blade holder will damage the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several items on the machine that will need attention over time.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Every 10-15 hours of use, the blade tension lever should be lubricated.&lt;br /&gt;
* The blade may need to be squared up to the table if it gets out of adjustment.&lt;br /&gt;
* The upper arm adjustment screw will need to be adjusted if the upper arm will not stay in the upright position. &lt;br /&gt;
* If the blade slips in the holder frequently it is time to change the blade clamp thumb screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|N/A&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Router_Table&amp;diff=12006</id>
		<title>Router Table</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Router_Table&amp;diff=12006"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:29:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Wood Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Wood&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=SawStop/Bora Portamate Motor&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model= RT-LFT 4-Post&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=107015&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Router Table Icon 2.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Router Table Icon 2.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=Router Table Icon 2.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Router Table.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description= &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1212&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|400px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Although the router table displays the SawStop logo, it does not have the SawStop technology. If your fingers come in contact with the spinning bit, the bit will not stop and it will be a very bad day for you. Remember... SAFETY FIRST!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Always wear safety glasses in the wood shop and wear hearing protection as applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
* Always unplug the router table when changing the bit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Leave an eighth inch gap of exposed shank when mounting the bit in the collet.&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock the height adjustment before turning on the router table.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the available feather boards and push blocks to keep your hands away from the spinning bit.&lt;br /&gt;
* When using the fence, always move your workpiece from right to left.&lt;br /&gt;
* Never position the fence so that the workpiece travels between the router bit and the fence.&lt;br /&gt;
* The material you are cutting needs to be free from nails, screws, staples, or other foreign objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A router table can be used to make custom moldings and make slots in workpieces. Router tables are extremely versatile in the types of cuts they can perform. Holes and channels of varying depths and nearly limitless shapes can be cut. The router table can also use special bits to cut bevels and chamfers along the edges of a workpiece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Introductory Video&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_EnPZofVCRE}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Things you can do with a router table&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jamwRhQTJbA}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each bit is made for a different job. The wood shop has a wide assortment, although less common types may be unavailable. It should be noted that different bit sizes and profiles will operate better at different speeds. A good rule of thumb for setting the router bit speed is: the larger the cutter the slower the speed.  Usually the router table will be set to 20000 RPM. If you plan to use a larger bit and reduce the speed of the router, ask a shop supervisor for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Bit Chart.jpg|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RouterBits.jpg|500px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Portamate-PM-P254-Variable-Speed-3-1-4-HP-Router-Motor-Instructions.pdf|Router Table User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Feed Direction.jpg|500px|right]][[File:Router Incorrect Feed Direction.jpg|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Changing a Bit====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Always unplug the router before changing a bit.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always raise the router collet above the throat plate when changing bits. Insert the bit until the cutting edge touches the collet then pull the bit out about an eighth inch and finger tighten the collet. It’s important to allow an eighth inch of space between the bit and the collet. Router bits can heat up quickly when in use. This heat causes expansion, and the eighth inch space between the bit and the collet allows for this expansion. Router bits that are not installed properly can come loose while making your cut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the two wrenches to tighten the locking nut on the collet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting the Fence====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When setting the fence, the router fence does not need to be exactly parallel to the bit for most cuts. Usually, a router bit’s performance is not affected by the angle of the fence. This differs greatly from equipment like the table saw or bandsaw which have flat blades instead of a rounded bit. The important thing is to set the fence the proper distance away from the bit, and the bit will do the rest work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your bit has a bearing guide, lay a straightedge against the fence and adjust it until there’s a paper-thin space between the outer edge of the bearing and the straightedge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Feed Direction====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the fence, always feed the workpiece from the right side of the router table to the left. The bit spins counterclockwise. Always push the workpiece against the cutter’s rotation. The force generated by the bit’s rotation helps push the workpiece against the fence. This is the proper way to make a controlled cut on the router table. It is dangerous to feed the workpiece from left to right because the router bit will pull the workpiece out of your hands and fling it across the room.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feed rate is how fast the workpiece moves through the router bit. A feed rate that is too fast can cause the surface of the wood to tearout. In other words, you will get a poor cut and the surface of the wood will be rough or chipped. A feed rate that is too slow can cause the wood to burn. See the troubleshooting section for more info on burning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Material Removal====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be mindful of how much material you are removing in a single pass. If you attempt to remove too much material, you could end up straining the router motor, putting too much sideways pressure on the router bit, or cause tearout/burning on your workpiece. If you need to remove a lot of material, break it up into multiple smaller passes. If you are unsure how much material is &amp;quot;too much,&amp;quot; ask a shop supervisor for assistance. Unfortunately, there is no magic number that indicates you are removing too much material. It's based on several factors including: the cross-sectional area of the material you plan to remove, the shape of the router bit, the speed of the router bit, and the hardness of the wood. With some experience, you will get a feel for how much material you can remove in a single pass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Demonstration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the router table with a roundover bit.  Remember to always unplug the router when changing tools or making adjustments to prevent an accidental turn-on situation. Perform a roundover cut on a piece of scrap wood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Procedure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind as you use the router table that the motor has a soft-start feature. This means that the router bit will take a couple seconds to get up to speed. Don't start feeding your workpiece until the motor reaches steady state. Also, keep in mind that the router bit will coast down after it is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long and narrow stock is easily machined on a router table. Featherboards make it even easier; they hold the stock tight against the surface of the fence and table and let you can concentrate on a steady, even feed rate. In general, a router table will help you work with stock of dimensions that don't lend themselves to handheld router work. Long, narrow stock, such as that used to make moldings and trim are nearly impossible to work with a handheld router. Edge profiling a few hundred feet of a particular door or base molding could probably be done with handheld router and the aid of special shop-built rigging, but dong so would be an extremely inefficient choice, when a router table makes long runs of narrow stock routine. Small pieces of stock are also a challenge to work with a handheld router. Handheld work on small parts often involves a difficult balancing act. You have to keep the router perfectly upright on stock that doesn't do a good job of supporting the router base. To compound the problem, you have to have a way of holding the stock itself in place while you work. A router table leaves both of your hands free to hold on to small parts while the table surface provides a sturdy, flat support for the entire surface of the workpiece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trimming the edge of a piece of stock to a flat, smooth, square surface or exactly following the contour of a pattern is one of the router's specialties. Attaching a straightedge or a template to a piece of stock is one of the quickest and most effective ways to clean up an edge, or to perfectly and repeatedly form the arched top of a frame and panel door or any other curved part.  Using a router table for edge trimming and pattern work speeds the process by eliminating the need to hold both the workpiece and the pattern down while you make the cut.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wide Groove Router Table.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Cutting grooves, slots, dadoes and rabbets, sliding dovetails, mortises and tenons are all part of the router tables stock in trade. If you need to cut a wide groove, click on the image to the right. Start with the inside edge. To avoid a climb cut, consider the second cut when positioning the fence for the first. Push the fence back, then rout the rest. By routing the outer side, the bit continues to push the work against the fence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many woodworking operations call for stopped cuts - cuts that do not continue for the entire length of the stock. Stopped cuts can be either decorative, like a chamfer that begins and ends at a certain point on a table leg, or functional, as in the case of a mortise or a half blind dovetail pin. A router table can be set up in seconds to perform a stopped cut; the same operation with a handheld router or a table saw is often extremely cumbersome or dangerous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Wood Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally routing can leave burn marks on the workpiece. This can happen when the workpiece is fed through the router too slowly, but it can also mean that the bit in the router has become dull. Let a shop supervisor know if a bit seems dull. Sometimes the burning is due to build up of resin and other gunk (a technical term) on the backside of the cutter which insulates the bit and allows for more heat to build up. Inspect the router bit before using, and make sure it looks clean. If the bit seems both clean and sharp, the cause of burning on your workpiece is either a feed rate that is too slow or a router bit speed that is too high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are shaping end grain with a router table, use a square push block behind your workpiece to support the trailing edge and prevent tearout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a general rule, the miter gauge should not be used on the router table. But, if you have a special cut where you think the miter gauge would help, talk to the wood shop staff about setting it up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure cutter bits are clean.&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove and clean the collets as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure any adjustment screws are tight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean out router box&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Rotary_Punch&amp;diff=12005</id>
		<title>Rotary Punch</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Rotary_Punch&amp;diff=12005"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:28:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Archived&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is sheet metal equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility= Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Metal&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Di-Acro&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=Turret Punch No. 12&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=BD-1291&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=Rotary Punch&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Rotary_punchIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Rotary Punch icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Rotary Punch.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Rotary Punch&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=48 inch bending brake, 14 gauge&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace= Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1313&lt;br /&gt;
}} &lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A rotary punch, also known as a turret punch. The punch in the shop is a &amp;quot;C Frame&amp;quot; style punch and is used to shear holes in materials.  The turret would normally contain a variety of punches of different shapes and sizes.  The selected punch and die required needs to be properly aligned before use. You can use the laser to cut any shapes needed as the rotary punch does not currently have any tooling. &lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a similar piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nPMle_WkP3k}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Punch- The shaped metal the gets pressed through the working material and removes its shape. &lt;br /&gt;
*Die- The material that supports the punch as it passes through the working material. &lt;br /&gt;
*Turret- The rotary head of the equipment that holds the punch and dies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Rotary_Punch_Manual.pdf|Rotary Punch User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rotary punch consists of a handle and 2 rotary carousels that house various punch/die sets.  The top carousel needs to match the correct bottom carousel to prevent damage to the punch/dies. Always verify the letter on the top and bottom carousel match. Always move the handle slowly when testing die alignment to verify proper alignment. Most dies have an alignment stub to center the die with the material you want to punch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to demonstrate safely setting up the rotary punch and make a hole or square of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# You will need to find a piece of 16 gauge or thinner scrap sheet metal larger than the punch you want to use.  The material will also need to be large enough to hold onto.&lt;br /&gt;
# Drill a hole roughly 1/16&amp;quot; in the center location of where you would like to punch. &lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the handle of the punch is in the up position.&lt;br /&gt;
# Pull the carousel release lever towards the front of the machine to allow rotation of the carousel.&lt;br /&gt;
# Rotate the top carousel to the desired punch and release the lever while rocking the carousel to verify it has locked in place.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Lift the bottom locking lever for the lower carousel and rotate it until the top and bottom letters match. This will align the top punch with the lower die.&lt;br /&gt;
# When in position release the lower lever and rotate the carousel to verify it has locked into position. &lt;br /&gt;
# Slowly lower the punch handle to verify proper alignment of the punch and die. If you feel resistance DO NOT FORCE THE HANDLE. Get help from a supervisor if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Slip your material into the slot between the punch and dies.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Align the small center punch located on the end of the punch with the small hole you made earlier in your material. You many need to move the handle to get the punch at the correct height. &lt;br /&gt;
# Pull down on the punch handle and you should feel the punch push through the material. &lt;br /&gt;
# Pull up on the punch handle to retract the punch.  &lt;br /&gt;
# You can now remove your material and it should have a hole where the punch sheared though the material.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Reset the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to keep your hands and fingers away from all pinch points.&lt;br /&gt;
# Always check alignment of the punch and die by slowly advancing the punch handle without material in the machine. If you feel resistance stop and get a supervisor to help you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/R6RF69 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
* If the punch and die does not appear to be align make sure the lock handles are engaged in the carousel by gently trying to rock the carousel back and forth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several grease fittings located on the machine that need to be greased.  The punches also need to be oiled as needed by the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate&lt;br /&gt;
|As Needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Ring_Roller&amp;diff=12004</id>
		<title>Ring Roller</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Ring_Roller&amp;diff=12004"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:28:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is sheet metal equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Machine Shop&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Metal&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Baileigh Industrial&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=R-M5&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=US14464115&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has function=Ring Roller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File: Ring_rollerIcon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Ring Roller icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Ring_Roller.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Baileigh Ring Roller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=Baileigh Ring Roller&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1319&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|140px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|275px|thumb|upright=1.0|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety First==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Safety First HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some safety instructions for the {{PAGENAME}}. Remember... SAFETY FIRST!!!&lt;br /&gt;
* Always be aware of the position of the clamp handle and the counterweight. They are heavy and can swing back suddenly causing serious body or head injuries.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hands and fingers away from the rollers when the machine is in operation.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hands and fingers clear of any gears or mechanisms. Make sure guard is in place before operating machine.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hands and fingers from between the roller and die when bending materials to avoid possible injury.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring roller is a machine used to roll metal into a ring by forcing the material through rollers, also called dies. The rollers can be adjusted to change the formed radius. The maximum mild steel machine capacity is 1/4&amp;quot; x 1&amp;quot; flat bar or 1/2&amp;quot; round rod. The minimum diameter you can form is 2.75&amp;quot;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of this piece of equipment being used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wiVWrE1OMJ8}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Dies - Round pieces of steel used to guide the material as its shaped.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:R-M5_07-2019.pdf|Ring Roller User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Ring Roller is a manual roll bender used to form rings, curves, and arcs from flat bar, round bar, or tubing. Operation involves selecting the correct roller set for the material, placing the workpiece between the rollers, and adjusting the top roller downward to apply bending pressure. The operator then turns the crank handle to feed the material through the rollers, gradually tightening the top roller in small increments until the desired radius or ring diameter is achieved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demonstrate you can safely setup the Ring Roller. You will then proceed to cut a 5&amp;quot; long piece of 1/4&amp;quot; steel rod. Roll this material into the smallest radius possible. When rolling the material remember to keep your fingers away from the rollers to keep from smashing your fingers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Adjust the knob on the right to adjust the radius, loosen the handle on the left if it restricting you from adjusting the right one.&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure both knobs are secure and tightened before rolling, always start by rolling the largest radius, and work your way up from there.&lt;br /&gt;
#Insert the bar between the rollers.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn the crank to roll the metal bar or rod.&lt;br /&gt;
#Start with a large radius and continue to make the radius smaller every time you roll. If you attempt to roll a small radius all at once, the rod may make a corkscrew shape instead of a circle.&lt;br /&gt;
#You have completed the roll when the two ends overlap each other by a couple of inches to account for the ends of the bar or rod that stay straight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset the Space==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reset The Space HD2.png|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here is how you can reset the space for the {{PAGENAME}}. Always reset the space!!!&lt;br /&gt;
* Release the pinch roll. &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove the material.&lt;br /&gt;
* Return all unused stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Machine Shop - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Material slipping - Tighten the top roller adjustment or use a roller set that matches the material profile.&lt;br /&gt;
*Uneven bend - Ensure material is fed straight and apply consistent pressure throughout the bend.&lt;br /&gt;
*Material kinks - Reduce roller gap increments and make multiple passes instead of one heavy pass.&lt;br /&gt;
*Difficulty turning crank - Check for roller lubrication and remove any debris or burrs from rollers.&lt;br /&gt;
*Roller wear or damage - Inspect for flat spots or cracks; replace rollers if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inconsistent ring size - Verify roller settings remain unchanged during bending and measure frequently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only things that need to be done to maintain the Ring Roller are general cleaning and periodic lubrication. For details on the lubrication process see the user manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lubricate gears&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Apply rust inhibitive lubricant&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Rework_Station&amp;diff=12003</id>
		<title>Rework Station</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Rework_Station&amp;diff=12003"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:27:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=PCB Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Zephyrtronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=ZT-2, ZT-3, ZT-1-CLS-DPU, Hakko FR-301, Quick861DW&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Solder Rework Station.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Rework Station Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=File:image_pending.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Rework Station.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=The Rework Station&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1297&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rework Station.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solder Rework Station.png|left|110x110px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Rework Station is essential for fixing what you messed up during the fabrication process. Consisting of an Air Bath, Air Pencil, and Air Pick, the Rework Station allows you heat up a specific area of the PCB and make modifications, whether that means adding/removing some solder on the pads, rotating a component, or completely replacing a component. Other tools are available for similar purposes, such as a desoldering gun, and an additional heat gun for larger components. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=f_yFDpSTfao}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:...airBath.jpg|Air Bath (ZT-1-CLS-DPU)&lt;br /&gt;
File:...airPencil.jpg|Air Pencil (ZT-2)&lt;br /&gt;
File:...airPick.jpg|Air Pick (ZT-3)&lt;br /&gt;
File:...desolderingGun.jpg|Desoldering Gun (Hakko FR-301)&lt;br /&gt;
File:...heatGun.jpg|Heat Gun (Quick861DW)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.zeph.com/smdpreheater.htm Zephyrtronics Airbath]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.zeph.com/pencil.html Zephyrtronics Airpencil]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.zeph.com/zt3web.htm Zephyrtronics Airpick]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Fr301e20180402.pdf|Hakko FR-301 User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:861DW-english--manual.pdf|Quick-861DW User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Airbath can heat up to 205 °C, which can be enough to melt the solder on a PCB. Some solder melts at even higher temperatures than this, which can be achieved using the Air Pencil and/or Heat Gun. Essentially, the Air Bath heats up the board and the Air Pencil finishes the job by heating up the part of the board that we want to fix (because we don't want to melt the solder on the parts that are already good to go). This is where the Air Pick and tweezers come in. After heating up the part we want to fix, the tweezers are used to remove a component while the Air Pick uses a vacuum to place a component on the board. If the component is too small, using tweezers to pick up the component is also a good alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete knowledge of the Air Bath, Air Pencil, Air Pick, Desoldering Gun, and Heat Gun, the student will have a PCB prepared and perform tasks with the station as a whole. Using the Air Bath, Air Pencil, and Air Pick, students will remove a SMD and solder it back on. Using the Desoldering Gun, students will remove a soldered through hole component. Using the Heat Gun, students will mount a larger SMD, solder it on, and then remove it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Fixing/Replacing SMD Components&lt;br /&gt;
##Before turning on the Air Bath, clamp the PCB on the black stand, preferably placing it so that the component you want to fix is directly above the air. You should not be able to move the board once it is clamped. Keeping it sturdy helps from accidentally moving the PCB during the reworking process.&lt;br /&gt;
##The Air Bath has a power switch on the left, three buttons on the right, and a screen on the right. The switch has 3 positions which allows you to choose Cool, Off, and Warm by pressing it in their respective directions. The button on the right allow you to adjust the temperature in a rather funny way. The middle button has a down arrow while the right button has an up arrow, indicating which button decreases/increases the temperature of the bath. However, you need to hold down the left button while doing so. For instance, to increase the temperature, you would hold the left and right buttons at the same time.[[File:AirBathBoi.jpg|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Now you will heat up the Air Bath. Hit the Power switch on the front, and set the temperature about 20-30 °C below the solder's melting point. The melting point for your solder can be found using the table below. Voltera's Solder Paste (Orange) melts at lower temperatures than the Sn63Pb37 Solder Paste (Blue). If the Voltera Solder Paste says T4 at the top, heat the Air Bath to 180 °C. If the Voltera Solder Paste says T5 at the top, heat the Air Bath to 150 °C. If you are using the Sn63Pb37 Solder Paste, heat the Air Bath to 150 °C. [[File:...meltingPointTable.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##Once the board is heated, you can use the Air Pencil to heat up a specific component. The pencil blows hot air out the end. When you turn it on, adjust the settings to be 3/4 of the heat capacity and about 1/3 of the air flow. We do this because when the air flow is maximized at full temperature, it does not get hot enough to melt the solder. Too much air flow is bad.&lt;br /&gt;
##Hold the tip of the pencil over the SMD you want to solder/desolder, and move it slightly around the leads to allow for more distribution of heat. If it is not heating it up, try turning the heat of the pencil higher. This should allow for your SMD components solder to melt, and you will be able to pick up the component up with a pair of static-safe tweezers or the Air Pick. If you are soldering a part on, make sure to generously apply flux to the pads, and make sure all the solder sticks to the pads after heating.&lt;br /&gt;
##If the pencil is not doing a good enough job to heat up the component, then you may graduate to using the  bigger heat gun, the Quick861DW. The same theoretical concepts apply, however, one potential downside of this is that it affects a larger area than the pencil. You may unintentionally melt the solder of components that you don't want to melt, so be extra careful my dudes.&lt;br /&gt;
##The Air Pick uses a vacuum to pick up and place components. Typically you would use both hands for this; one hand heats up the component with the pencil and the other grabs the component with the pick.&lt;br /&gt;
##On the handle of the pick there is a divot that is connected to the vacuum. When you plug the divot with your finger, it will enable it to pick up a component. When you release your finger from the divot, it will let go of the component. There are different tips that you will place on the end of the tip based on the component you want to pick up, each having a different size for varying components.&lt;br /&gt;
#Desoldering Through Hole Components&lt;br /&gt;
##For desoldering through hole components, you will want to use the Desoldering Gun. It has a hot tip that can fit over a solder joint and utilizes a vacuum when the trigger is pulled. As a result, it melts the solder and sucks it into a cartridge, completely removing the joint.&lt;br /&gt;
##Before using the Desoldering Gun, make sure you have the little metal stand for the gun to sit on for safety purposes. Have Solder ready nearby to tin the tip before use, and clean the tip after tinning using the wire mesh.&lt;br /&gt;
##On the handle of the gun there is a temperature control wheel that ranges from 1-4 (coolest to hottest). Be sure to set it to the correct temperature using the graphic below. Typically, a through hole component would require you to set the scale to 2.[[File:...SolderingGun.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
##To use the Desoldering Gun, briefly put the top over a solder joint (not completely on the PCB or you might damage it), press the trigger to enable the vacuum, and the solder should be sucked away!&lt;br /&gt;
##Tin the tip before cooldown, and take note that the cooldown may take a bit of time. Don't burn yourself!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
The most important thing about all these machines: THEY GET REALLY HOT!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be so so careful because these machines can get up to temperatures of potentially 700°F. Always be wary of where you are blowing the hot air with the air guns, so you don’t melt other things. Be wary of how hot your PCB can get, and always put the cooling setting on after you’re finished with the Air Bath before picking your PCB up, because you can burn yourself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;PCB Lab - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Suppose the solder isn't melting. Consult the temperature table in the General Procedure, chances are that you just need to make it hotter, little by little.&lt;br /&gt;
#Suppose the Air Pick is not picking up the component. Use the appropriate tip and make sure you are plugging the little divot to enable it to pick up. If these aren't working, resort to using tweezers.&lt;br /&gt;
#Suppose the components are getting blown away from the pads you want it to sit on. Well, turn down the air my dude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrap all cords and make them look tidy. Make sure all devices are turned off and returned to their original place. Do not leave tweezers or extra parts laying around, put them back in the accessories drawer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|General Cleaning&lt;br /&gt;
|Before and after every use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tinning tip of Desoldering Gun&lt;br /&gt;
|Before and after every use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Emptying solder out of desoldering gun reservoir&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Student/Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Replacing desoldering gun filter&lt;br /&gt;
|As needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Reflow_Oven&amp;diff=12002</id>
		<title>Reflow Oven</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Reflow_Oven&amp;diff=12002"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:27:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=PCB Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=LPKF&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model=ProtoFlow S N2&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial number=0Z2701N343&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:reflow_oven_icon.png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Reflow Oven Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:protoflow.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Protoflow Reflow Oven&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=https://georgefox.instructure.com/courses/1297&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=Circuit Board Design&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Needed;Makerhub@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reflow oven icon.png|left|140x140px|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:....theOven.jpg|thumb|400x400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}} ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}}).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reflow Oven (ProtoFlow S N2) is LPKF's premiere convection oven, ideal for lead-free reflow soldering, meeting the stringent demands of rapid PCB soldering applications. The Reflow Oven features even heat distribution, easy programming, and many pre-defined temperature profiles. The compact design and efficient power consumption make it one of the most useful components in any rapid PCB prototyping environment.  {{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Zsvn2-WkZLk}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Documentation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Terminology====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:bake_ink_selection.jpg|LCD Dispay&lt;br /&gt;
File:bake_go.jpg|Tray&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:LPKF ProtoFlow S, User manual, ENG, v2.11.pdf|Reflow Oven User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:protoflow_datasheet.pdf|Reflow Oven Datasheet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.lpkfusa.com/products/pcb_prototyping/smt_assembling/protoflow_s/ Product Home Page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Training==&lt;br /&gt;
====Operation====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reflow Oven bakes PCBs to harden the traces and pads where components are laid. It's just like your oven at home with a few extra accessories, like preset profiles that adjust the temperature and time based on the ink/paste you put on your board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Demonstration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show a complete knowledge of the oven, the student will have a PCB prepared by the PCB Printer and follow the instructions in the General Procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====General Procedure====&lt;br /&gt;
# Power the Reflow Oven on by pressing the power button on the front.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the respective ink/paste on the LCD Display. Different inks and pastes have different heat cycles, so it is important that you choose the right one. You can scroll through the options using the Up and Down keys. The Left key goes back, and the Right key selects. In this specific instance, V1 Ink is selected. Recall that each dispenser is assigned to a color. Green is V1 Ink, Orange is V1 Paste, and Blue is Sn63Pb37.[[File:bake_ink_selection.jpg|300x300px|none|link=https://maker-hub.georgefox.edu/wiki/File:Bake_ink_selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
# The oven will warm up. When its ready, select &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; to open the tray.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''DANGER: The rails could be HOT! Take caution.''' Place the board securely on the rails.[[File:bake_place.jpg|300x300px|none|link=https://maker-hub.georgefox.edu/wiki/File:Bake_place.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; to close the tray.&lt;br /&gt;
# The preheat will take 2 minutes. The baking process takes about 30 minutes for traces and 3 minutes for the paste.&lt;br /&gt;
# The tray will automatically open to initiate the cool down phase. At the end of this process, the traces and pads will harden. '''DO NOT remove the board until the oven says all the stages are complete. DANGER: The rails are HOT!'''&lt;br /&gt;
# When cool down is complete, remove the board from the oven, and turn off the oven. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Safety==&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Never''' place anything in front of the oven door inside of the yellow striped area. This could result in severe damage to the oven.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under no circumstances may the lab be left unattended for more than a brief minute while the oven is running.&lt;br /&gt;
# Always follow the instructions on the LCD Display. It is your guide that keeps you safe.&lt;br /&gt;
# When the tray opens up after baking a board, be patient and let the board cool down. If you handle it while it is too hot, it can burn you and shift your components (not good).&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you are finished using the Reflow Oven, clean the inside and turn it off. '''RESET THE SPACE'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you do not want to risk being burnt by the rails when you place your board in the oven, open the tray and place your board '''BEFORE''' beginning the baking process.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you do get burnt, immediately place the burn under cold running cold water for a while. There is a sink to the right of the oven to help you out. This keeps it from blistering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;PCB Lab - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
There are little to no issues to run into while using the oven. The most common issue is failure to select the correct profile, which results in non-hardened traces and pads. Remember, Green is V1 Ink, Orange is V1 Paste, and blue is SN63Pb37. If this happens, simply bake the board again using the correct profile. In the event that something happens out of the ordinary, follow the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:...ovenTroubleshooting.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
====General maintenance====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The oven should always be clean. Make sure it is clean before and after use. If something is not working and needs to be fixed, refer to the table above in the Troubleshooting section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specific Maintenance Tasks====&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to the table in the Troubleshooting section for advanced solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Remove Debris&lt;br /&gt;
|Before and after each use&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br \&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br \&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br \&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br \&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br \&amp;gt;&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Prusa_XL&amp;diff=12001</id>
		<title>Prusa XL</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Prusa_XL&amp;diff=12001"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:27:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: /* Certification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Prusa&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model= XL&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial numbers=SN25028124319&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Prusa_Icon(1).png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Prusa XL Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Prusa__XL.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Prusa XL&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=3D Printers&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Allison Rodgers;arodgers24@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|170px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}})&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}        &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Description ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Prusa Xl is a large 3D printer that includes removeable heatbed, filament sensor and multiple print heads. These features can be used to create great prototypes. Multiple heads allow for multiple types of material to be used on one print. The Prusa XL uses  [[Prototype Lab#FDM Printing Anchor|FDM Printing]]. The Prusa XL is a prototyping device that works well for larger prototypes that could possibly be made from multiple materials. The Prusa XL has a hard time with complicated shapes, but it is great at simple models.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== User manuals ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Prusa3d manual mk3 en 3 04.pdf|Prusa 3D Printer User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Terminology''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Nozzle/Extruder: The nozzle (or extruder) is the part of a 3D printer which deposits the molten plastic filament onto the 3D printer bed. The extruder can reach 200°-300°C, depending on the filament used, but typically stays around 215°C for regular prints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Heatbed: The heatbed is a 14.17&amp;quot; x 14.17&amp;quot; x 14.17&amp;quot; plate where the filament will be &amp;quot;printed&amp;quot; on. The bed heats up to around 60°C. Heated beds typically prevent the plastic from warping by keeping it warm. Warping is a common issue that happens on 3D printers, where the plastic of the print cools at an uneven rate, leaving the print wavy and not the way you intended.&lt;br /&gt;
* Feeder: The feeder is the part of the 3D printer that &amp;quot;feeds&amp;quot; the filament to the nozzle. Sometimes &amp;quot;feeder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;extruder&amp;quot; are used synonomously, so it's important when you're teaching someone to differentiate whether or not you're talking about the ''nozzle'' extruder or the ''feeder'' extruder. Feeders are typically composed of stepper motors, gears, and sometimes bolts and pulleys to guide the filament to the hot end.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fan: There are usually two fans on the nozzle of a 3D printer, and they serve the purpose of cooling the plastic as soon as it comes out of the nozzle. If the plastic is super hot, we don't want it to move as soon as it is in place on the part we're making, otherwise our part will turn out warped or failed. The fans are put in place to strategically cool the plastic as soon as it comes out of the nozzle. You are able to turn the fan speeds up and down in the slicer software (if that is a provided feature), but you can manually configure it on the printer as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Stepper Motor: There are two main places where you'll find stepper motors on a 3D printer. There's a motor for each axes, one for the x, y, and z. These motors receive instructions from the gcode to move the certain axes at certain points to create your print. There is also a stepper motor in the extruder setup, pushing and pulling the filament whenever more or less is needed for the current print.&lt;br /&gt;
* Infill: Infill has to do with a 3D print's structural integrity. It can be multiple shapes and patterns (providing different strength optimizations), different sizes, and different thicknesses. Infill ranges anywhere from 0% (hollow) to 100% (solid). It is very unlikely you'll ever want a print to be 100% infill, because it takes an insane amount of filament and a lot of time to complete. Most 3D prints are 15% infill since it is the most optimal choice for cost efficiency and durability. If your concern is cost, a lesser infill density is a good way to go. If strength and mass is important, a higher density (between 30%-50%) is a good estimate. When using a higher infill, always double check to make sure it's a good idea for your part, and that you're using the right machine. Other 3D printers in the prototype lab have the option of a stronger filament than PLA or ABS, so it may be a better idea to print for strength on those rather than the Prusas.&lt;br /&gt;
* Filament: There are many different kinds of filament you can use on the 3D printer, ranging from PLA, to ABS, TPU to Nylon. The most common of these are PLA and ABS; the Prusas are usually set up with PLA. PLA stands for Polylactic Acid, it is the most common desktop 3D printing filament because it is odorless and very hard to warp on its own, therefore not always a need for a heated bed. ABS stands for Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene. It's one of the most commercial versions of plastic available (found in legos, packaging, and more)--it's durable, scratch resistant, and tough. Heated beds are a must with ABS filament because it is so temperature sensitive, so it warps very easily. The Prusas use 1.75 mm filament.&lt;br /&gt;
* CAD Modeling and Thingiverse: There are two ways you can 3D print models. You can either design your own with a CAD (computer-aided design) software, or you can find something similar to what you want on websites like Thingiverse. Thingiverse has all sorts of community-contributed designs, which you can download the .stl files for, slice, and print the models. As for modeling your own projects, there are multiple softwares you can use such as SolidWorks, AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, FreeCAD, and many more.&lt;br /&gt;
* Slicing: Each 3D printer uses a slicer software, a software where you can import the model file (usually an .stl file) onto a computerized build plate, resize, change up the nozzle and bed temperatures, adjust the infill and precision, and more. The slicer software takes into consideration all your configurations, then &amp;quot;slices&amp;quot; it into a .gcode file, a set of instructions for the x, y, and z dimensions. The 3D printer can read and tell the stepper motors what to do from the set of instructions within the gcode. The slicer software used for the Prusa XL is called Prusa Slicer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Materials on Prusa Slicer==&lt;br /&gt;
To use multiple filament you need to first make sure that you have multiple filaments in the Prusa that can be used. &lt;br /&gt;
* Go under the &amp;quot;Printer&amp;quot; drop down on the right tab, make sure that 'Original Prusa XL .4 nozzle'&lt;br /&gt;
is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa1.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the 'Printer Settings' tab on the top left and set the number to 5 (even if you are not using 5 nozzles the number still needs to be 5. This is because the filament you need may be in the 5th position). &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa2.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Go back to the platter and then add whatever filaments you will be using on the print.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa3.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the paint icon labeled 'multimaterial painting'. It is on the left panel of icons&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa4.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The smart fill option will be the most useful, however you can use whichever feature you need. Left click to use the first filament and right click to use the second filament. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa5.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Now your file has multiple types of material!!&lt;br /&gt;
* I found this video very helpful&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DhTc3jOhz8E&amp;amp;t=135s}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Priority Printing== &lt;br /&gt;
Due to the speed and capability for multiple print materials, prints for classes will take priority to personal prints. Especially during busier times, personal prints may be prohibited in order to give students the resources they need.  &lt;br /&gt;
==Water Dissolvable Filament==&lt;br /&gt;
With multiple filaments being used on the Prusa XL, we have the ability to utilize water dissolvable filaments for supports on complex builds. This enables students to use the [[Dissolvable Support Bath]] to remove supports made of water dissolvable filament. To use the Bath, students still need to pass the canvas quiz for the bath and Prusa XL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Training ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Printing on the Prusa will always start with an STL file that you export from Solidworks or download from the internet. However, the printer cannot interpret a STL file and must be converted to a gcode file which instructs the printer on how to complete the print. The process of creating a gcode is called &amp;quot;slicing&amp;quot; and is done in the Prusa Slicer software. Prusa Slicer allows you to customize any part of the print process and is color coded to distinguish simple settings from expert settings so you can tell which settings can be adjusted without risk of messing things up. For the most part, the preset setting options will work well but feel free to experiment with settings to improve print detail or speed (check out [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3kW9SnK4LKc this video] for example). After you have sliced your STL file the rest of the setup is simple. Save the new gcode to the SD card found in the printer, turn on the machine, select &amp;quot;print from SD card&amp;quot; to find your file, and then click to start the print. Make sure to clean the print bed with isopropyl alcohol before the print starts and watch the print for the first five minutes to make sure it doesn't fail. Also, the video below walks through the setup process in detail starting from downloading a stl file which is helpful.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ttg2wEjD784&amp;amp;list=PLP1rv37BojTfJ5TjDXiSNqDnEPnvChsYZ&amp;amp;index=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Demonstration ====&lt;br /&gt;
The student will need download, setup, and successfully start a print of their choice, providing it is within reason and follows Prototype Lab guidelines. If possible, they should stay as long as possible in case a print fails, which will be an opportunity to teach them basic troubleshooting of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
==== General Procedure ====&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up a print:&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have a model you would like to print (which you can find on either thingiverse or model one yourself), you will be using a software called Prusa Slicer to slice your .stl files into a .gcode file, which the printer will interpret and print your model from.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open Prusa Slicer. When you open Prusa Slicer, it looks like this:[[File:Slicer Home.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]At the top, you have your basic toolbar where you can import files and fine tune print settings. The toolbar on the left side of the screen is used for rotating/orienting, moving, scaling, and even cutting the model. The window on the right side of the screen is used to select the printer being used and select preset print settings. You can also choose between simple, advanced, and expert settings in this window. Feel free to select any of these modes. Throughout the software each setting is color coded to match these skill levels to make it easy to tell which settings are simplest to adjust. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import your file, click on &amp;quot;File &amp;gt; Import &amp;gt; Import STL&amp;quot;, and you'll be presented with your file system to choose whatever model you have ready. Click &amp;quot;open&amp;quot; to import the file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the model is imported you will need to orient it correctly. The toolbar on the left has two options for doing this. One is the basic rotate tool which allows you to rotate a specific number of degrees around any axis. You can drag the model with this tool as well but this is not advised because you may not line the face up with the print bed properly which may result in print errors. If you do not know the rotation angle you need use the second option, place on face, to rotate one face of your model to match the print bed. The correct orientation will change based on your model so make sure to check out the short video below for some tips.{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JGhgaypou6E&amp;amp;list=PLTCCNNvHC8PDR_jQy609toqq8EAfhiOOL&amp;amp;index=26}}&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the rest of the object setting using the left toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the Position settings, you can adjust where on the printer bed you would like your print to start. Due to automatic bed leveling, the center of the printer bed is always the best place to put your model. If you are printing multiple parts, then arrange everything from the center outwards. You can click and drag your model around and see the change in the X and Y coordinates, and if you need it to be super precise, you can use the keyboard to change the values in the Position settings.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Scale is important, it determines how large you want your print to be. If you modeled your print to specific dimensions, Prusa Slicer will import it with the correct dimensions, and you can skip this section. If it is too large, you can scale the model down to 70%-90% and see how that affects the size, and vice versa, changing the scale to 110%-130% if need be.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the correct printer settings.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The quality of the print has to do with the size of each individual layer. The finer the quality, the longer the time is to print your model. Almost always you'll want your print to be Optimal quality (0.15mm), since about all prints turn out good with that setting, but you can choose from several other presets as well. A smaller layer height will allow for more definition in the vertical plane but will take longer to print. Each layer height has a preset for fast and quality that you can choose from based on your print needs. If you are feeling adventurous then the pint and printer settings can be individually adjusted instead of using a preset. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Next, you'll change the infill. If you don't know how much infill you need, check out the definition of infill above or talk to the supervisor for help. This option will almost always stay at 15% infill.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Now we come to support! Support is extra material printed around your model to support tougher geometric angles and overhangs that the printer can't get to on its own. It is easily torn off at the end of the print.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The Brim option is for bed adhesion. You will typically want this option, since it helps prevent the warping of the part you are printing. A brim is most important for prints that have a small surface area that is in contact with the plate.&lt;br /&gt;
# When all those settings are complete, you can click &amp;quot;Slice now&amp;quot; in the bottom right corner, and Slicer will give you a time and filament estimate for your print. If they seem reasonable, you can save the newly &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot; .gcode file to the SD card that will go into the printer! Do this by clicking  &amp;quot;Export G code.&amp;quot; You can always go back and adjust the settings to fit your time and/or filament needs before saving the file. &lt;br /&gt;
Starting a Print: &lt;br /&gt;
# Thoroughly clean the build plate with isopropyl alcohol and a paper towel. &lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have the gcode file on the SD card, put the SD card into the Prusa (on the left side of the orange menu), and turn the printer on using the power switch on the left side of the printer. The printer will read the SD card and initialize itself, then you can start. &lt;br /&gt;
# In the menu, there is an option you want called &amp;quot;Print from SD Card&amp;quot; that will take you to a list of all the .gcode files on the SD card. Select this by rotating the knob until this option is highlighted and then press down on the knob. &lt;br /&gt;
# Search until you find your file, and then select it.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure there is enough filament on the printer for your print, or it will fail midway! &lt;br /&gt;
# Naturally, the printer will set itself up for PLA settings, which is approximately 215°C for the extruder, and 60°C for the heated bed. This will take a few minutes. Often filament will start oozing out of the nozzle once it is fully heated, but don't worry, the printer will clean off the filament after calibration. If these temperatures are not correct, click to open a menu and the scroll to the &amp;quot;Tune&amp;quot; option. From there the temperatures can be adjusted.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that there are no filament strings attached to the nozzle as the print is starting. &lt;br /&gt;
# Watch the print for at least 5 minutes to make sure it adheres properly and then every 5 minutes for the next 20 minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
Finishing a Print:&lt;br /&gt;
# When the print completes successfully, the Prusa will delightfully present the print by moving the print bed forward, and the extruder will go back to the homing location. On the menu screen it will display how long the last print took, and the other normal settings like the temperature of the print bed and nozzle. &lt;br /&gt;
# To get the print off of the bed, take the magnetic steel bed off and bend it just slightly to pop the brim of the print off of the bed. From there you can take the print off carefully by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the print was successful, congratulations! If not, time to diagnose the problem and try again.&lt;br /&gt;
# Put the magnetic bed back onto the Prusa, and if there are no more prints needing to be done, power it off.&lt;br /&gt;
Loading New Filament:&lt;br /&gt;
# When the printer runs out of filament, typically you'll want to find a shop aid to help you change the filament.&lt;br /&gt;
# All you need to do is go to the menu, select the &amp;quot;Unload Filament&amp;quot; option, and the printer should start heating up.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once it heats up, it'll unload the filament and you can pull it out of the extruder.&lt;br /&gt;
# Be sure to tuck the end of the filament through one of the holes on the spool before storing it. If this is not done, it can cause knots in the spool which cause failed prints and damage to printers.&lt;br /&gt;
# As for loading new filament, find the option in the menu labelled &amp;quot;Autoload Filament&amp;quot;, and the printer will walk you through the instructions for loading the new spool of filament.&lt;br /&gt;
Pausing or Stopping a Print:&lt;br /&gt;
# To pause a print in the middle of the job, press the knob and it'll pull up a printing menu. There are two options near the bottom, &amp;quot;Stop Print&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Pause Print&amp;quot;. If the print is failing, you definitely want to stop it. If you need to change filament or think you can save the print before it fails anymore, you can pause the print.&lt;br /&gt;
Possible Print Failure Causes:&lt;br /&gt;
# Failure of material to adhere to the bed.&lt;br /&gt;
# No support around the model.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first layer of the print warps.&lt;br /&gt;
# The brim gets torn and dragged around&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==TVs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking for a project that uses the Prusa 3D printer? Check out this TV for an [[Egg Shaker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Safety ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Be careful what you touch; the nozzle and filament leaving it are over 200°C which will easily cause burns. Although only 60°C, the build plate should not be touched during printing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hands away from the travel rods because they will pinch fingers with ease.&lt;br /&gt;
* Support material can be sharp so be careful when removing it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Approved Filaments==&lt;br /&gt;
* PLA&lt;br /&gt;
* PETG (seek assistance from the Prototype Lab staff to set up a Prusa to print with PETG)&lt;br /&gt;
* TPU&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/JFA784 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some ways your print can fail in the beginning, and how to troubleshoot it:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Brim is pulled off of bed and dragged around by the nozzle:''' If it's just starting the brim of the print and having trouble adhering to the bed, you can pull off the first few rounds of the brim and let the print continue. Sometimes the outer part of the brim has more trouble adhering than the inner parts. If it continues to fail, stop the print. Make sure you have the best orientation possible for your part, make sure the nozzle of the printer is clean, and try starting the print again. If it continues to fail, find a supervisor to help you.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Parts of the print detach mid-print:''' Stop the print. Often if parts of the print detach from the model it is due to failure to adhere to support. Ask a supervisor if the geometry of your part is too complex for the Prusas. If not, adjust the sizing, change around some support settings, and try the print again. If it continues to fail, try to break the part into smaller prints and assemble them when done.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Extruded filament is too thin/not adhering to layers OR Filament will not come out of nozzle:''' When the filament is too thin or not coming out, there is often a blockage or small piece of filament in the extruder. Ask a supervisor for help.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Print will not adhere to bed:''' If your 3D print will not adhere to the bed after lots of tries, the last resort can be some glue stick. For trickier prints with small bases, sometimes this is the trick. Always make sure you try the brim option before using the glue stick on the printer. When the print is finished, clean off the printer bed.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Support fails:''' If the support gets really stringy as the print continues and in turn fails the print, see if you can have a supervisor help you change the density of the support. Double check that the printer is not shaking too much as you print your model. If you still don't know what to do after your print fails, ask a supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''First layer of print warps:''' If the first layer of your print warps and affects the rest of your print, lower the bed temperature, and start the print again. If it continues to warp, try adding some adhesive on the printer bed. &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Thermal Runaway:''' Thermal Runaway is a safety feature designed to prevent the printer from accidentally catching fire. If your printer's thermistor would somehow dislodge itself, electronic parts would get a lower (incorrect) temperature reading. In an attempt to compensate for the lower temperature, the heater would reach dangerously high temperatures, with the printer potentially becoming a fire hazard. Thermal Runaway prevents that from happening. Thermal Runaway is configured to shut down the printer when the temperature drops by more than 15°C for more than 45 seconds. If the temperature reading doesn't recover in the set time period, the printer will shut down and display the Thermal Runaway error. All hotend heaters are thoroughly tested, so they can run at 200°C with the print cooling fan at a 100% speed. To print materials that require higher temperatures (like PLA at 215°C), the speed of the fan must be decreased in the Prusa Slicer software or manually during the print. Incorrect fan speeds are sometimes the result of using gcode from a different type of printer. Pay attention to your prints as they start the second layer, as this is usually when the print cooling fan kicks in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your issue or error is not found here, ask the supervisor for help, or you can research on this website: https://all3dp.com/1/common-3d-printing-problems-troubleshooting-3d-printer-issues/#section-fdm-3d-printing-problems-my-print-failed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Failed Calibration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the printer fails while calibrating, there will be an error message that suggests you clean the nozzle off and retry the print. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crash Detected:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the nozzle hits something it's not used to, such as an obstruction in the print, the print bed, or something else that stops the extruder from moving, the printer will error and say it crashed. It will ask you to clean off any excess filament and stuff that gets in the way of the extruder. If it continues to fail because of a crash, ask a supervisor for help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintenance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Specific Maintenance Tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wiping Down Buildplate&lt;br /&gt;
|Before every new print&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cleaning of Nozzle&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean and lubricate travel rods&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# Grab a paper towel from the sink and the isopropyl alcohol from next to the Formlabs printer. Use these to wipe down the build plate and make sure you do not touch the plate after doing this because that will get oils on it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Raise the print head in the z axis until the nozzle is easily accessible. Use tweezers, paper towels, isopropyl alcohol, or any other substances to remove filament from the nozzle. If the nozzle is clogged, use a wrench to remove it and clean out any filament inside. A heat gun may be helpful for this. &lt;br /&gt;
# Wipe down the smooth travel rods with a paper towel and then re-lubricate them. Clean the threaded rods with a brush and then re-lubricate them.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Prusa_XL&amp;diff=12000</id>
		<title>Prusa XL</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://makerhub.georgefox.edu/w/index.php?title=Prusa_XL&amp;diff=12000"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T18:26:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nsullivan: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#set:&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is equipment=True&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is located in facility=Prototype Lab&lt;br /&gt;
 |Is used in domain=Electronics&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has name={{PAGENAME}}&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has make=Prusa&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has model= XL&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has serial numbers=SN25028124319&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has life expectancy=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has year of manufacture or purchase=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has replacement cost=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icon=File:Prusa_Icon(1).png&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has icondesc=Prusa XL Icon&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has iconwname=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has image=File:Prusa__XL.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has imagedesc=Prusa XL&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has description=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has certification=&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has group=3D Printers&lt;br /&gt;
 |Has ace=Allison Rodgers;arodgers24@georgefox.edu&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icon|link=none}}|170px|left|top|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has icondesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has image|link=none}}|300px|thumb|upright=1.5|{{#show: {{FULLPAGENAME}}|?Has imagedesc}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has make}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has model}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serial Number: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has serial number}}  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ace: '''{{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has name}}''' ({{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Has ace.Has email address}})&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location: {{#show: {{PAGENAME}} |?Is located in facility}}        &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Description ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Prusa Xl is a large 3D printer that includes removeable heatbed, filament sensor and multiple print heads. These features can be used to create great prototypes. Multiple heads allow for multiple types of material to be used on one print. The Prusa XL uses  [[Prototype Lab#FDM Printing Anchor|FDM Printing]]. The Prusa XL is a prototyping device that works well for larger prototypes that could possibly be made from multiple materials. The Prusa XL has a hard time with complicated shapes, but it is great at simple models.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== User manuals ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Prusa3d manual mk3 en 3 04.pdf|Prusa 3D Printer User Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== '''Terminology''' ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Nozzle/Extruder: The nozzle (or extruder) is the part of a 3D printer which deposits the molten plastic filament onto the 3D printer bed. The extruder can reach 200°-300°C, depending on the filament used, but typically stays around 215°C for regular prints.&lt;br /&gt;
* Heatbed: The heatbed is a 14.17&amp;quot; x 14.17&amp;quot; x 14.17&amp;quot; plate where the filament will be &amp;quot;printed&amp;quot; on. The bed heats up to around 60°C. Heated beds typically prevent the plastic from warping by keeping it warm. Warping is a common issue that happens on 3D printers, where the plastic of the print cools at an uneven rate, leaving the print wavy and not the way you intended.&lt;br /&gt;
* Feeder: The feeder is the part of the 3D printer that &amp;quot;feeds&amp;quot; the filament to the nozzle. Sometimes &amp;quot;feeder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;extruder&amp;quot; are used synonomously, so it's important when you're teaching someone to differentiate whether or not you're talking about the ''nozzle'' extruder or the ''feeder'' extruder. Feeders are typically composed of stepper motors, gears, and sometimes bolts and pulleys to guide the filament to the hot end.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fan: There are usually two fans on the nozzle of a 3D printer, and they serve the purpose of cooling the plastic as soon as it comes out of the nozzle. If the plastic is super hot, we don't want it to move as soon as it is in place on the part we're making, otherwise our part will turn out warped or failed. The fans are put in place to strategically cool the plastic as soon as it comes out of the nozzle. You are able to turn the fan speeds up and down in the slicer software (if that is a provided feature), but you can manually configure it on the printer as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Stepper Motor: There are two main places where you'll find stepper motors on a 3D printer. There's a motor for each axes, one for the x, y, and z. These motors receive instructions from the gcode to move the certain axes at certain points to create your print. There is also a stepper motor in the extruder setup, pushing and pulling the filament whenever more or less is needed for the current print.&lt;br /&gt;
* Infill: Infill has to do with a 3D print's structural integrity. It can be multiple shapes and patterns (providing different strength optimizations), different sizes, and different thicknesses. Infill ranges anywhere from 0% (hollow) to 100% (solid). It is very unlikely you'll ever want a print to be 100% infill, because it takes an insane amount of filament and a lot of time to complete. Most 3D prints are 15% infill since it is the most optimal choice for cost efficiency and durability. If your concern is cost, a lesser infill density is a good way to go. If strength and mass is important, a higher density (between 30%-50%) is a good estimate. When using a higher infill, always double check to make sure it's a good idea for your part, and that you're using the right machine. Other 3D printers in the prototype lab have the option of a stronger filament than PLA or ABS, so it may be a better idea to print for strength on those rather than the Prusas.&lt;br /&gt;
* Filament: There are many different kinds of filament you can use on the 3D printer, ranging from PLA, to ABS, TPU to Nylon. The most common of these are PLA and ABS; the Prusas are usually set up with PLA. PLA stands for Polylactic Acid, it is the most common desktop 3D printing filament because it is odorless and very hard to warp on its own, therefore not always a need for a heated bed. ABS stands for Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene. It's one of the most commercial versions of plastic available (found in legos, packaging, and more)--it's durable, scratch resistant, and tough. Heated beds are a must with ABS filament because it is so temperature sensitive, so it warps very easily. The Prusas use 1.75 mm filament.&lt;br /&gt;
* CAD Modeling and Thingiverse: There are two ways you can 3D print models. You can either design your own with a CAD (computer-aided design) software, or you can find something similar to what you want on websites like Thingiverse. Thingiverse has all sorts of community-contributed designs, which you can download the .stl files for, slice, and print the models. As for modeling your own projects, there are multiple softwares you can use such as SolidWorks, AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, FreeCAD, and many more.&lt;br /&gt;
* Slicing: Each 3D printer uses a slicer software, a software where you can import the model file (usually an .stl file) onto a computerized build plate, resize, change up the nozzle and bed temperatures, adjust the infill and precision, and more. The slicer software takes into consideration all your configurations, then &amp;quot;slices&amp;quot; it into a .gcode file, a set of instructions for the x, y, and z dimensions. The 3D printer can read and tell the stepper motors what to do from the set of instructions within the gcode. The slicer software used for the Prusa XL is called Prusa Slicer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Materials on Prusa Slicer==&lt;br /&gt;
To use multiple filament you need to first make sure that you have multiple filaments in the Prusa that can be used. &lt;br /&gt;
* Go under the &amp;quot;Printer&amp;quot; drop down on the right tab, make sure that 'Original Prusa XL .4 nozzle'&lt;br /&gt;
is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa1.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the 'Printer Settings' tab on the top left and set the number to 5 (even if you are not using 5 nozzles the number still needs to be 5. This is because the filament you need may be in the 5th position). &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa2.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Go back to the platter and then add whatever filaments you will be using on the print.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa3.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the paint icon labeled 'multimaterial painting'. It is on the left panel of icons&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa4.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The smart fill option will be the most useful, however you can use whichever feature you need. Left click to use the first filament and right click to use the second filament. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prusa5.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Now your file has multiple types of material!!&lt;br /&gt;
* I found this video very helpful&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DhTc3jOhz8E&amp;amp;t=135s}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Priority Printing== &lt;br /&gt;
Due to the speed and capability for multiple print materials, prints for classes will take priority to personal prints. Especially during busier times, personal prints may be prohibited in order to give students the resources they need.  &lt;br /&gt;
==Water Dissolvable Filament==&lt;br /&gt;
With multiple filaments being used on the Prusa XL, we have the ability to utilize water dissolvable filaments for supports on complex builds. This enables students to use the [[Dissolvable Support Bath]] to remove supports made of water dissolvable filament. To use the Bath, students still need to pass the canvas quiz for the bath and Prusa XL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Training ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
Printing on the Prusa will always start with an STL file that you export from Solidworks or download from the internet. However, the printer cannot interpret a STL file and must be converted to a gcode file which instructs the printer on how to complete the print. The process of creating a gcode is called &amp;quot;slicing&amp;quot; and is done in the Prusa Slicer software. Prusa Slicer allows you to customize any part of the print process and is color coded to distinguish simple settings from expert settings so you can tell which settings can be adjusted without risk of messing things up. For the most part, the preset setting options will work well but feel free to experiment with settings to improve print detail or speed (check out [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3kW9SnK4LKc this video] for example). After you have sliced your STL file the rest of the setup is simple. Save the new gcode to the SD card found in the printer, turn on the machine, select &amp;quot;print from SD card&amp;quot; to find your file, and then click to start the print. Make sure to clean the print bed with isopropyl alcohol before the print starts and watch the print for the first five minutes to make sure it doesn't fail. Also, the video below walks through the setup process in detail starting from downloading a stl file which is helpful.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ttg2wEjD784&amp;amp;list=PLP1rv37BojTfJ5TjDXiSNqDnEPnvChsYZ&amp;amp;index=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Demonstration ====&lt;br /&gt;
The student will need download, setup, and successfully start a print of their choice, providing it is within reason and follows Prototype Lab guidelines. If possible, they should stay as long as possible in case a print fails, which will be an opportunity to teach them basic troubleshooting of the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
==== General Procedure ====&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up a print:&lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have a model you would like to print (which you can find on either thingiverse or model one yourself), you will be using a software called Prusa Slicer to slice your .stl files into a .gcode file, which the printer will interpret and print your model from.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open Prusa Slicer. When you open Prusa Slicer, it looks like this:[[File:Slicer Home.png|none|thumb|1108x1108px]]At the top, you have your basic toolbar where you can import files and fine tune print settings. The toolbar on the left side of the screen is used for rotating/orienting, moving, scaling, and even cutting the model. The window on the right side of the screen is used to select the printer being used and select preset print settings. You can also choose between simple, advanced, and expert settings in this window. Feel free to select any of these modes. Throughout the software each setting is color coded to match these skill levels to make it easy to tell which settings are simplest to adjust. &lt;br /&gt;
#To import your file, click on &amp;quot;File &amp;gt; Import &amp;gt; Import STL&amp;quot;, and you'll be presented with your file system to choose whatever model you have ready. Click &amp;quot;open&amp;quot; to import the file.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the model is imported you will need to orient it correctly. The toolbar on the left has two options for doing this. One is the basic rotate tool which allows you to rotate a specific number of degrees around any axis. You can drag the model with this tool as well but this is not advised because you may not line the face up with the print bed properly which may result in print errors. If you do not know the rotation angle you need use the second option, place on face, to rotate one face of your model to match the print bed. The correct orientation will change based on your model so make sure to check out the short video below for some tips.{{#evu:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JGhgaypou6E&amp;amp;list=PLTCCNNvHC8PDR_jQy609toqq8EAfhiOOL&amp;amp;index=26}}&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the rest of the object setting using the left toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#* In the Position settings, you can adjust where on the printer bed you would like your print to start. Due to automatic bed leveling, the center of the printer bed is always the best place to put your model. If you are printing multiple parts, then arrange everything from the center outwards. You can click and drag your model around and see the change in the X and Y coordinates, and if you need it to be super precise, you can use the keyboard to change the values in the Position settings.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Scale is important, it determines how large you want your print to be. If you modeled your print to specific dimensions, Prusa Slicer will import it with the correct dimensions, and you can skip this section. If it is too large, you can scale the model down to 70%-90% and see how that affects the size, and vice versa, changing the scale to 110%-130% if need be.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the correct printer settings.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The quality of the print has to do with the size of each individual layer. The finer the quality, the longer the time is to print your model. Almost always you'll want your print to be Optimal quality (0.15mm), since about all prints turn out good with that setting, but you can choose from several other presets as well. A smaller layer height will allow for more definition in the vertical plane but will take longer to print. Each layer height has a preset for fast and quality that you can choose from based on your print needs. If you are feeling adventurous then the pint and printer settings can be individually adjusted instead of using a preset. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Next, you'll change the infill. If you don't know how much infill you need, check out the definition of infill above or talk to the supervisor for help. This option will almost always stay at 15% infill.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Now we come to support! Support is extra material printed around your model to support tougher geometric angles and overhangs that the printer can't get to on its own. It is easily torn off at the end of the print.&lt;br /&gt;
#* The Brim option is for bed adhesion. You will typically want this option, since it helps prevent the warping of the part you are printing. A brim is most important for prints that have a small surface area that is in contact with the plate.&lt;br /&gt;
# When all those settings are complete, you can click &amp;quot;Slice now&amp;quot; in the bottom right corner, and Slicer will give you a time and filament estimate for your print. If they seem reasonable, you can save the newly &amp;quot;sliced&amp;quot; .gcode file to the SD card that will go into the printer! Do this by clicking  &amp;quot;Export G code.&amp;quot; You can always go back and adjust the settings to fit your time and/or filament needs before saving the file. &lt;br /&gt;
Starting a Print: &lt;br /&gt;
# Thoroughly clean the build plate with isopropyl alcohol and a paper towel. &lt;br /&gt;
# Once you have the gcode file on the SD card, put the SD card into the Prusa (on the left side of the orange menu), and turn the printer on using the power switch on the left side of the printer. The printer will read the SD card and initialize itself, then you can start. &lt;br /&gt;
# In the menu, there is an option you want called &amp;quot;Print from SD Card&amp;quot; that will take you to a list of all the .gcode files on the SD card. Select this by rotating the knob until this option is highlighted and then press down on the knob. &lt;br /&gt;
# Search until you find your file, and then select it.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure there is enough filament on the printer for your print, or it will fail midway! &lt;br /&gt;
# Naturally, the printer will set itself up for PLA settings, which is approximately 215°C for the extruder, and 60°C for the heated bed. This will take a few minutes. Often filament will start oozing out of the nozzle once it is fully heated, but don't worry, the printer will clean off the filament after calibration. If these temperatures are not correct, click to open a menu and the scroll to the &amp;quot;Tune&amp;quot; option. From there the temperatures can be adjusted.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that there are no filament strings attached to the nozzle as the print is starting. &lt;br /&gt;
# Watch the print for at least 5 minutes to make sure it adheres properly and then every 5 minutes for the next 20 minutes. &lt;br /&gt;
Finishing a Print:&lt;br /&gt;
# When the print completes successfully, the Prusa will delightfully present the print by moving the print bed forward, and the extruder will go back to the homing location. On the menu screen it will display how long the last print took, and the other normal settings like the temperature of the print bed and nozzle. &lt;br /&gt;
# To get the print off of the bed, take the magnetic steel bed off and bend it just slightly to pop the brim of the print off of the bed. From there you can take the print off carefully by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the print was successful, congratulations! If not, time to diagnose the problem and try again.&lt;br /&gt;
# Put the magnetic bed back onto the Prusa, and if there are no more prints needing to be done, power it off.&lt;br /&gt;
Loading New Filament:&lt;br /&gt;
# When the printer runs out of filament, typically you'll want to find a shop aid to help you change the filament.&lt;br /&gt;
# All you need to do is go to the menu, select the &amp;quot;Unload Filament&amp;quot; option, and the printer should start heating up.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once it heats up, it'll unload the filament and you can pull it out of the extruder.&lt;br /&gt;
# Be sure to tuck the end of the filament through one of the holes on the spool before storing it. If this is not done, it can cause knots in the spool which cause failed prints and damage to printers.&lt;br /&gt;
# As for loading new filament, find the option in the menu labelled &amp;quot;Autoload Filament&amp;quot;, and the printer will walk you through the instructions for loading the new spool of filament.&lt;br /&gt;
Pausing or Stopping a Print:&lt;br /&gt;
# To pause a print in the middle of the job, press the knob and it'll pull up a printing menu. There are two options near the bottom, &amp;quot;Stop Print&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Pause Print&amp;quot;. If the print is failing, you definitely want to stop it. If you need to change filament or think you can save the print before it fails anymore, you can pause the print.&lt;br /&gt;
Possible Print Failure Causes:&lt;br /&gt;
# Failure of material to adhere to the bed.&lt;br /&gt;
# No support around the model.&lt;br /&gt;
# The first layer of the print warps.&lt;br /&gt;
# The brim gets torn and dragged around&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==TVs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking for a project that uses the Prusa 3D printer? Check out this TV for an [[Egg Shaker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Safety ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Be careful what you touch; the nozzle and filament leaving it are over 200°C which will easily cause burns. Although only 60°C, the build plate should not be touched during printing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep hands away from the travel rods because they will pinch fingers with ease.&lt;br /&gt;
* Support material can be sharp so be careful when removing it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Approved Filaments==&lt;br /&gt;
* PLA&lt;br /&gt;
* PETG (seek assistance from the Prototype Lab staff to set up a Prusa to print with PETG)&lt;br /&gt;
* TPU&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Certification==&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Prototype Lab - {{PAGENAME}} Module&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; at the link below to gain access to the {{PAGENAME}}. The Maker Hub Canvas course pertains to all facilities and equipment contained in the Maker Hub; simply complete the quizzes for the facilities/equipment you wish to use in the Maker Hub. Please email &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:blue&amp;quot;&amp;gt;makerhub@georgefox.edu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://georgefox.instructure.com/enroll/R6RF69 Maker Hub Canvas Course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some ways your print can fail in the beginning, and how to troubleshoot it:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Brim is pulled off of bed and dragged around by the nozzle:''' If it's just starting the brim of the print and having trouble adhering to the bed, you can pull off the first few rounds of the brim and let the print continue. Sometimes the outer part of the brim has more trouble adhering than the inner parts. If it continues to fail, stop the print. Make sure you have the best orientation possible for your part, make sure the nozzle of the printer is clean, and try starting the print again. If it continues to fail, find a supervisor to help you.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Parts of the print detach mid-print:''' Stop the print. Often if parts of the print detach from the model it is due to failure to adhere to support. Ask a supervisor if the geometry of your part is too complex for the Prusas. If not, adjust the sizing, change around some support settings, and try the print again. If it continues to fail, try to break the part into smaller prints and assemble them when done.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Extruded filament is too thin/not adhering to layers OR Filament will not come out of nozzle:''' When the filament is too thin or not coming out, there is often a blockage or small piece of filament in the extruder. Ask a supervisor for help.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Print will not adhere to bed:''' If your 3D print will not adhere to the bed after lots of tries, the last resort can be some glue stick. For trickier prints with small bases, sometimes this is the trick. Always make sure you try the brim option before using the glue stick on the printer. When the print is finished, clean off the printer bed.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Support fails:''' If the support gets really stringy as the print continues and in turn fails the print, see if you can have a supervisor help you change the density of the support. Double check that the printer is not shaking too much as you print your model. If you still don't know what to do after your print fails, ask a supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''First layer of print warps:''' If the first layer of your print warps and affects the rest of your print, lower the bed temperature, and start the print again. If it continues to warp, try adding some adhesive on the printer bed. &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Thermal Runaway:''' Thermal Runaway is a safety feature designed to prevent the printer from accidentally catching fire. If your printer's thermistor would somehow dislodge itself, electronic parts would get a lower (incorrect) temperature reading. In an attempt to compensate for the lower temperature, the heater would reach dangerously high temperatures, with the printer potentially becoming a fire hazard. Thermal Runaway prevents that from happening. Thermal Runaway is configured to shut down the printer when the temperature drops by more than 15°C for more than 45 seconds. If the temperature reading doesn't recover in the set time period, the printer will shut down and display the Thermal Runaway error. All hotend heaters are thoroughly tested, so they can run at 200°C with the print cooling fan at a 100% speed. To print materials that require higher temperatures (like PLA at 215°C), the speed of the fan must be decreased in the Prusa Slicer software or manually during the print. Incorrect fan speeds are sometimes the result of using gcode from a different type of printer. Pay attention to your prints as they start the second layer, as this is usually when the print cooling fan kicks in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your issue or error is not found here, ask the supervisor for help, or you can research on this website: https://all3dp.com/1/common-3d-printing-problems-troubleshooting-3d-printer-issues/#section-fdm-3d-printing-problems-my-print-failed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Failed Calibration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the printer fails while calibrating, there will be an error message that suggests you clean the nozzle off and retry the print. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crash Detected:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the nozzle hits something it's not used to, such as an obstruction in the print, the print bed, or something else that stops the extruder from moving, the printer will error and say it crashed. It will ask you to clean off any excess filament and stuff that gets in the way of the extruder. If it continues to fail because of a crash, ask a supervisor for help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintenance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Specific Maintenance Tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!Maintenance Procedure&lt;br /&gt;
!Frequency&lt;br /&gt;
!Done By&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wiping Down Buildplate&lt;br /&gt;
|Before every new print&lt;br /&gt;
|Student&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cleaning of Nozzle&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed&lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Clean and lubricate travel rods&lt;br /&gt;
|When needed &lt;br /&gt;
|Ace&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# Grab a paper towel from the sink and the isopropyl alcohol from next to the Formlabs printer. Use these to wipe down the build plate and make sure you do not touch the plate after doing this because that will get oils on it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Raise the print head in the z axis until the nozzle is easily accessible. Use tweezers, paper towels, isopropyl alcohol, or any other substances to remove filament from the nozzle. If the nozzle is clogged, use a wrench to remove it and clean out any filament inside. A heat gun may be helpful for this. &lt;br /&gt;
# Wipe down the smooth travel rods with a paper towel and then re-lubricate them. Clean the threaded rods with a brush and then re-lubricate them.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nsullivan</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>